Sea Scout Manual

User Manual: Pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 233 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

The Sea PromiSe

As a Sea Scout I promise to do my best:

• To guard against water accidents

• To know the location and proper use of the

lifesaving devices on every boat I board

• To be prepared to render aid to those in need

• To seek to preserve the motto of the sea:

Women and Children First

BSa miSSion STaTemenT

The mission of the Boy Scouts of America is to prepare young

people to make ethical and moral choices over their lifetimes

by instilling in them the values of the Scout Oath and Law.

BSa ViSion STaTemenT

The Boy Scouts of America will prepare every

eligible youth in America to become a responsible,

participating citizen and leader who is guided by

the Scout Oath and Law.

SEA SCOUT MANUAL

11th Edition

33239

ISBN 978-0-8395-3239-2

2012 Printing

A Word About Youth Protection

Child abuse is a serious problem in our society, and unfortunately, it can occur anywhere,

even in Scouting. Youth safety is of paramount importance to Scouting. For that reason,

the BSA continues to create barriers to abuse beyond what have previously existed

in Scouting.

The Boy Scouts of America places the greatest importance on providing the most secure

environment possible for our youth members. To maintain such an environment, the BSA

has developed numerous procedural and leadership selection policies, and provides

parents and leaders with numerous online and print resources for the Cub Scout,

Boy Scout, and Venturing programs.

The BSA requires Youth Protection training for all registered leaders.

New leaders are required to complete Youth Protection training. To take the training

online, go to www.MyScouting.org and establish an account using the member number

you receive when you register for BSA membership. If you take the training online before

you obtain a member number, be sure to return to MyScouting and enter your number

for training record credit. Your BSA local council also provides training on a regular basis

if you cannot take it online. For more information, refer to the back of the BSA adult

membership application, No. 524-501.

Youth Protection training must be taken every two years—regardless of position. If a

volunteer does not meet the BSA’s Youth Protection training requirement at the time of

recharter, the volunteer will not be reregistered.

We encourage all adults, including all parents, to take the BSA’s Youth Protection training.

To ﬁnd out more about the Youth Protection policies of the Boy Scouts of America

and how to help Scouting keep your family safe, see the Parent’s Guide in any of the

Cub Scouting or Boy Scouting handbooks, or go to http://www.scouting.org/Training/

YouthProtection.aspx.

Revised October 2011

Dedication 3

DEDICATION

In 1910, Lord Baden-Powell, founder of Boy Scouts, created Sea Scouts to serve as

an extension of Scout training. Young men would develop personal character—pluck,

patriotism, and intelligent discipline—through a sense of duty. By teaching boat

management and seamanship, young men would also gain individual knowledge to help

them become self-supporting. Sea Scouts performing coast guard duties, lifesaving and

salvage at wrecks would also perform invaluable community service.

Baden-Powell’s belief that Sea Scouts would combine the best attributes of seaman-

ship with training in character was shared by the Boy Scouts of America. Two years

after the Boy Scouts of America was born, Sea Scouts was organized in the United

States with the aid of the Secretary of the Navy in 1912.

Welcome Aboard 5

WELCOME ABOARD

Welcome aboard—to the fun and adventure of Sea Scouts, a program combining the

traditions of the past with the technology of the future. Whether you look to the sea for

a career or lifelong hobby, Sea Scouts is for you.

e element of water makes Sea Scouts unique. Sea Scout units use a variety of

boats, from outboard motorboats to large sailing yachts. Sea Scouts belong to a world

that is distinct from anything on shore, and they have their own language and customs.

e water is not a place for the unwary, and the Scout motto, “Be Prepared,” is

imperative. e challenge is taking a vessel from point A to point B while being ready

for whatever may be encountered along the way. Crewing a vessel involves sharing the

duties of helmsman, navigator, lookout, cook, sail handler, or engineer. Outings on a

boat oﬀer new destinations in the morning and the changing scenery of a new harbor by

evening. Every event is an adventure.

Sea Scout programs are run by the youth members. Elected oﬃcers plan and conduct

the program. Being part of the vessel’s crew teaches teamwork. As experience is gained,

more opportunities arise to contribute to the leadership of the unit. At quarterdeck

meetings, ship’s oﬃcers work together to plan and evaluate the ship’s program.

Leadership skills learned in Sea Scouts last a lifetime.

Sea Scouts give service to others. Sea Scouts have been of service to hundreds of

communities across the nation. Service can be expressed in individual good turns to

others or in organized projects involving the crew or the whole ship. In rescues at sea, or

facing emergencies on shore, Sea Scouts have saved lives and property. Sea Scout service

puts citizenship into action.

Sea Scout advancement rewards individual pursuits of excellence. Each level of

advancement marks growth as a seaman and a leader. e highest rank a Sea Scout can

earn is the prestigious Quartermaster rank.

Seafaring has traditions that go back hundreds of years. Sea Scouts have adapted

these traditions to the Sea Scout program and have created traditions of their own.

A youth must be 13 years of age and graduated from the eighth grade or be 14 to join

Sea Scouts. You can stay in Sea Scouts until you are 21 years of age. Sea Scout ships can

be located by contacting the Boy Scouts of America in your area. If there is not a ship

nearby, encourage parents, school, church, or community organizations to organize one.

Contents 7

CONTENTS

Dedication .......................................................... 3

Welcome Aboard .................................................... 5

Section One—Ship Organization and Uniforms ......................11

The Organization of a Ship ....................................11

Ofﬁcers’ Responsibilities ......................................13

Adult Leader Responsibilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Quarterdeck Training .........................................15

Ship Management ............................................15

The Ship Code and Bylaws ....................................15

The Right Vessel .............................................17

Uniforms ....................................................17

Insignia .....................................................26

Section Two—Ship Operations ......................................27

The Ship Meeting ............................................27

Two-Part Program ...........................................30

The Quarterdeck Meeting .....................................32

A Balanced Program ..........................................34

Cruise and Superactivity Plans ................................35

Written Communications .....................................38

Recruiting New Members .....................................38

Fund-Raising ................................................39

Customs and Courtesies ......................................39

Section Three—Advancement and Recognition .....................47

Advancement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Sea Scout Advancement ......................................49

Other Recognition ...........................................62

Section Four—Safety and Seamanship ..............................69

Safety ......................................................69

Accident Prevention: Elements of Safe Swim

Defense and Safety Aﬂoat ............................69

Safety Equipment .......................................77

Emergencies Underway ..................................82

Sample Crisis-at-Sea Emergency Drills ....................86

Communication ........................................ 90

Communications Signaling ...............................93

First Aid ................................................96

General Safety ........................................ 100

8 Contents

Marlinspike Seamanship .....................................103

Rope ..................................................103

Helpful Knot Terminology ...............................107

Knots .................................................108

Hitches ................................................111

Bends .................................................113

Whipping ..............................................114

Splicing ................................................115

Canvas Work and Sail Repair ............................120

Blocks and Tackles ......................................122

Boat Handling ..............................................125

Parts of a Boat .........................................125

Types of Sailing Craft ...................................128

Sailing a Small Boat .....................................131

Smaller Powerboats ....................................137

Underway in a Powerboat ...............................138

Wharfs, Piers, Docks, and Slips ...........................139

Heaving a Line .........................................143

Water-Skiing ...........................................143

Trailering Your Boat ....................................144

Rowing ................................................145

Ground Tackle ..............................................147

Anchor Parts ...........................................147

Types of Anchors .......................................148

Anchor Selection .......................................149

Stowage of Ground Tackle ...............................150

Anchor Cable for Larger Vessels ..........................151

Anchoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Navigation Rules ............................................157

Rules of the Road .......................................157

Steering and Sailing Rules ...............................158

Lights and Shapes ......................................161

Aids to Navigation ..........................................165

Light List ..............................................165

Lighthouses ............................................166

Daybeacons ............................................166

Buoys .................................................167

Port-Side Odd-Numbered Aids ...........................167

Starboard-Side Even-Numbered Aids .....................167

Safe Water Marks ......................................168

Isolated Danger Marks ..................................168

Dayboards .............................................168

Contents 9

Special Marks ..........................................168

Characteristics of Lighted Buoys .........................169

Sound Buoys ...........................................169

Dependence on Buoys ...................................169

The Rule of Lettering ....................................169

Intracoastal Waterway ..................................170

Western River (Mississippi River) System .................170

Piloting and Navigation ......................................172

Charts .................................................172

Compass ...............................................175

Variation ..............................................176

Deviation ..............................................176

Measuring Speed .......................................177

Time ..................................................179

Distance ...............................................180

Speed, Time, and Distance ...............................181

Dead Reckoning ........................................181

Deck Log ...............................................181

Chart Plotting ..........................................183

Fixes ..................................................185

Weather ...................................................193

Before Leaving the Dock ................................193

Weather Underway .....................................198

Practical Deck Seamanship ................................. 203

Watches .............................................. 203

The Lookout .......................................... 204

Helmsmanship ........................................ 205

Cruise Log ............................................ 206

Vessel Maintenance .................................... 206

Environment .............................................. 213

Water Pollution ........................................ 213

Aquatic Nuisance Species .............................. 215

Appendix ..........................................................217

Navigation Aids .............................................217

International Flags and Pennants ............................ 220

Lights Conforming to Rules 23–31 of Navigation Rules,

International and Inland ................................221

Resources ..................................................223

Glossary ...................................................227

Credits .....................................................233

Ship Organization and Uniforms 11

SHIP ORGANIZATION

AND UNIFORMS

You and other high school–age young adults have joined Sea Scouts to go places and

do things, and when people get together for this, they must plan and organize.

Organization is the key to success in Sea Scouts. You organize in such a way that you

can carry out a program of activities that will provide you and your friends with the fun

and adventure you are seeking.

is chapter explains in detail the organization of a Sea Scout ship and describes

how the various responsibilities are divided. At times you may want to run a “tight” ship

with formality and ceremonies. At other times you will want to operate informally. In

Sea Scouts, there is a time and place for both kinds of operation.

All the adult leaders—the Skipper, mates, and committee members—have one objective.

ey want to facilitate a program of activities that will accomplish the purposes of the

Scout movement—character development, citizenship training, and personal ﬁtness. At

the same time, they know that the program must be youth-driven, reﬂecting the desire for

fun and adventure promised to Sea Scouts.

The Organization of a Ship

rough the National Council, a council issues charters to organizations that

organize Sea Scout ships, Venturing crews, Boy Scout troops, and Cub Scout packs. By

accepting the charter, an organization agrees to provide a ship with a good Sea Scout

program under the best available leadership.

e ship committee is appointed by the chartered organization. Although a ship

may register with a minimum of three committee members, it should have at least

ﬁve or six active adults. e committee is responsible for the selection of the Skipper,

mates, and general program support of the ship.

Sea Scouts have a vast reservoir of experts at their disposal for program support. ose

who provide specialized help are called consultants. ey may come from inside the

ship or from the community. Consultants have special skills or knowledge, equipment or

facilities, or contacts that can help your ship.

Oﬃcers such as boatswain, yeoman, purser, etc. are elected by the youth.

Program activities of a Sea Scout ship are carried out through activity committees,

and specialists may be appointed by adult leaders to carry out assignments such as

photographer, engineer, or other speciﬁc skills.

12 Ship Organization and Uniforms

SHIP ORGANIZATION AND LEADERSHIP

SEA SCOUT MANUAL

BOATSWAIN

PURSER

YEOMAN

SHIP MEMBERSHIP

CREW LEADERS

BOATSWAIN’S MATE

(Administration)

BOATSWAIN’S MATE

(Program)

SKIPPER

MATE

(Administration)

MATE

(Program)

APPOINTED

ACTIVITY

CHAIRMAN

SHIP COMMITTEE

CHAIRMAN

TREASURER

CONSULTANTS

CHARTERED

ORGANIZATION

REPRESENTATIVE

CHARTERED ORGANIZATION

SHIP

COMMITTEE

MEMBERS

SEA SCOUTS ADULT ADVISORS ADULT COMMITTEE

33239.03.CHAP1.kg Page 4 Thursday, December 12, 2002 10:47 AM

Ship Organization and Uniforms 13

Officers’ Responsibilities

All Ofﬁcers

• Supporttheboatswainandocersintheirleadershipfunctions.

• WorkcloselywiththeSkipperandadultleaders.

• Leadandinspirebyexample.

• Stimulateparticipationandencourageteamwork.

• Recruitnewmembersfortheship.

• Carryoutotherdutiesasassignedbytheboatswain.

Boatswain

• Planandconductregularquarterdeckmeetings.

• Giveleadershiptoallshipmeetingsandactivities.

• Shareresponsibilitiesofleadingtheshipwiththeotherocers.

• Knowtheneedsandinterestsofshipmembers.

• Watchforindividualshipmemberswhomayhaveproblems,

questions, or concerns.

• Directthedevelopmentofyourship’soperationalplan.

• Appointshipmemberstoserveasactivitycommitteechairs.

Boatswain’s Mate for Administration

• Takeoverfortheship’sboatswainwhennecessary.

• Giveleadershiptorecruitingnewmembersintotheshipby

—Coordinating plans for an annual open house to invite new

members to join

—Encouraging all ship members to bring new prospects to

ship meetings and activities

—Admitting new members into the ship. Be sure they are

introduced and feel welcome.

• Followupwithshipmemberswhoseemtobelosinginterest

in the ship.

• Recognizetheachievementsofshipmembers.

• Conductopeningandclosingceremoniesforyourship.

Boatswain’s Mate for Program

• Collectactivityandmeetingideasfromshipmembersby

—Asking ship members what they would like their ship to do

—Surveying ship members on their interests

—Evaluating ship meetings and activities after they take place

• Maintainanactivitiesleofprograms,activities,projects,

and trips.

• Helpship’sactivitychairsplanandconductsuccessfulactivities.

Yeoman

• Keepminutesofquarterdeckandshipmeetings.

• Remindocersofassignedtasks.

• Keepmembershiprecordsfortheship.

• Superviseship’scorrespondence.

• Keepallshipmembersinformedaboutcomingmeetings,

activities, and projects.

• Handleallpublicity.

14 Ship Organization and Uniforms

Purser

• Trackincomeandexpendituresoftheshipwithguidance

from the adult committee treasurer.

• Withthehelpofyourship’sSkipperandocers,setupa

yearly budget.

• Makeregulartreasuryreportsatship’smeetings.

• ObtainapprovalfromshipocersandSkipper

for expenditures.

Storekeeper

• Procureandarrangeequipmentmaintenance.

• Trackthecomingandgoingofshipequipment.

• Keepaninventoryofequipment.

Crew Leader

• Maintainthemoraleandconductofthecrew.

• Helptraincrewmembers.

• Delegateresponsibilitiestocrewmembers.

Assistant Crew Leader (Elected by Crew)

Take over for crew leader when necessary.

Activity Chair (Appointed by the Boatswain)

• ConsultwiththeboatswainandSkipperregardingthe

assigned activity.

• Plan,promote,runandevaluateanevent.

• Recruitandchairacommitteeifnecessary.

Adult Leader Responsibilities

Ship Committee

• Selectandrecruittheadultleadersandprovidesfacilitiesforthe

ship meeting place.

• Superviseshipfundsandpropertyandhelpsobtainsupplies

and equipment.

• Seethattheshipoperatesinaccordancewiththepoliciesand

standards of the chartered organization, the Boy Scouts of

America, and the ship’s code and by-laws.

• Isresponsibleforcompletingtheannualrecharter.

Ship Organization and Uniforms 15

Skipper

• ServeasthekeyadultleaderofaSeaScoutship.

• Givedirectiontotheshipprogramwhilecarryingoutthe

most important duty—advising and coaching the oﬃcers as

they plan, organize, and conduct the meetings and activities

of the ship.

• Bealiaisonbetweentheadultleaders,thechartered

organization, and the youth.

Mates

Assist the Skipper as directed, and assume the Skipper’s duties

if absent.

Quarterdeck Training

Elected oﬃcers should participate in quarterdeck training soon after elections. is is

an orientation and planning meeting conducted by the Skipper and boatswain working

as a leadership team. is training enables the Skipper to focus the oﬃcers on program

possibilities, set goals, and establish a calendar.

Ship Management

e ship’s oﬃcers are the elected Sea Scout youth leaders. ey work with the

Skipper and mates to give leadership to your ship. Elected oﬃcers generally serve terms

of six months or a year. ey are trained by the Skipper to carry out their assignments.

Ship activities are selected by the oﬃcers based on the desires of the membership.

Foreachactivity,anactivity committee chair is appointed. Activity chairmen may be

invited to quarterdeck meetings by the boatswain to present detailed plans of coming

events and activities.

Monthlyquarterdeck meetings are held by the oﬃcers of the ship. e Skipper and

other adult oﬃcers attend this meeting. e boatswain determines an agenda with the

Skipper’s approval, and conducts quarterdeck meetings.

The Ship Code and Bylaws

A ship’s code is a statement of ideals and conduct developed and approved by the

ship’s members. Each ship’s code is diﬀerent and meets the needs of the ship. In addition

to supplementing the Sea Promise, the ship’s code should express:

• Astatementofpurpose

• Standardsofconduct

• Goals

e entire ship should develop the ship’s code since everyone is expected to subscribe

to the results. e ship code should be reviewed annually and modiﬁed if necessary.

New members should be required to sign the ship’s code when they join the ship.

Bylaws deﬁne the operations of the ship.

16 Ship Organization and Uniforms

Sample

Ship Code and Bylaws

1. OBJECTIVES

e objectives of Ship 2502 are:

A. To learn

B. To share responsibilities

C. To have fun

2. MEMBERSHIP

Membershipshallbeopentoallyoungadults

living in the surrounding area who are 14 years

of age or 13 years of age and have completed

the eighth grade and under 21 years of age.

No prospective member shall be disqualiﬁed

because of race, color, creed, or sex. All members

must be registered as Sea Scouts and agree to

and sign the ship code and bylaws.

3. OFFICERS

A. e elected oﬃcers shall be boatswain,

two boatswain’s mates, yeoman,

and purser.

B. e normal term of oﬃce shall be for one

yearstartingonFebruary1.Electionsshall

be held in January.

C. No member shall serve more than two

successive terms in the same oﬃce.

D. eboatswainshallappointanominat-

ing committee that shall consist of three

members. e committee shall present

a complete slate of candidates who have

agreed, if elected, to serve to the best of

their abilities.

E. On the night of the elections, nominations

may be presented from the ﬂoor by any

member. If the nomination is seconded

and the candidate agrees to serve, he or she

must be included on the ballot.

F. Allcontestedballotsshallbesecret.

G. Nomineesmustbewillingandableto

serve in the position elected for the full

term of the oﬃce.

4. SHIP BUSINESS

Ship business will be conducted under the

principles outlined in Robert’s Rules of Order.

Voting on all issues will be by simple majority,

with the exception of changes or amendments

to the bylaws, which will require a two-thirds

vote of the total active membership. A quorum

shall consist of one more than the majority of

members for votes on routine business.

5. GENERAL MEETINGS

Generalmeetingswillbeheldatleastoncea

month, during the third week. Special meet-

ings may be called by the boatswain as needed.

6. OFFICERS’ MEETINGS

Oﬃcers’ meetings will be held at least once a

month, during the third week. Special meet-

ings may be called by the boatswain as needed.

7. NEWSLETTER

e ship will publish a newsletter the ﬁrst

week of every other month. Included in this

mailing, too, will be all other supplemental

information of interest to the membership.

e newsletter will serve as the historical

record of the ship.

8. DUES

Dueswillbe$5permonth,payableatthe

ﬁrst meeting of every month. College reserve

members’dueswillbe$2permonth.Two

months of delinquent dues make the member

ineligible to participate in activities.

9. MONEY EARNING

Dueswillbesupplementedbymoney-earning

activities involving the participation of all

members.Membersnotparticipatingwill

not be entitled to the beneﬁts of the money

derived from the activities. All money-earning

projects must be approved by the skipper and

meet the requirements listed on the BSA Unit

Money-EarningApplication,No.34427.

10. ACTIVITIES

It shall be the intention of the ship’s leadership

to provide outside activities.

Ship Organization and Uniforms 17

The Right Vessel

Each Sea Scout ship is diﬀerent and must select the correct vessel for its program. If

thehomewatersaretheMississippiRiver,choosinga54-footsailboatisnotappropriate.

Apowerboatwouldbebetter.IfyouaresailingontheGulfofMexico,somethinglarger

than a Sunﬁsh will be necessary. e ship should also assess the sailing, boating, engine

maintenance, and vessel maintenance skills available within the unit before choosing

craft for the ship.

No matter which type boat the ship chooses, it must be seaworthy. While painting,

cleaning, and routine maintenance are well within the capabilities of most ships, major

structural repairs or engine rebuilds are not. A good rule of thumb is to never accept a

boat that has been oﬀered to you just because it is free. Select the type of boat you want

for the ship and then ﬁnd that boat.

Uniforms

Uniforming is an important part of developing program recognition and self-identity.

When Sea Scouts was ﬁrst organized in the United States, a U.S. Navy uniform was

chosen to be most representative of our maritime heritage. By wearing the Sea Scout

uniform, youth make a statement to observers about courtesy, thoughtfulness, honesty, and

other core values that convey character.

Working on a vessel reinforces the fact that with privilege comes responsibility.

e same is true with the privilege of wearing the Sea Scout uniform. Anything done

while wearing the uniform reﬂects upon the reputation of all Sea Scouts in our nation.

Because of this, it becomes each Sea Scout’s responsibility to always do the right thing,

and it becomes each Sea Scout’s responsibility to keep the Sea Scout uniform correctly

creased, cleaned, and maintained.

Sea Scout dress uniforms are worn on special occasions such as bridges of honor,

annual banquets, public appearances, and other formal occasions. e dress uniforms

are identical to U.S. Navy uniforms except for distinctive Sea Scout modiﬁcations.

Uniformscomeinnavyblue(black)andinwhite.Dressblueuniformsareactually

black and made of a lightweight wool gabardine. White uniforms are made of cotton or

polyester. A plain white crewneck T-shirt is always worn under the jumper, and white

underwear is a must for the white uniforms.

If dress whites are required for an event, and space is limited, a uniform can be rolled

and stowed.

Rolling the trousers:Brushcleanandturninsideout.Foldonelegovertheotherso

theseamsontheinsideofthelegscometogether.Foldthecrotchoverandthenrollthe

trousers from the top toward the bottom of the legs. Secure the roll with cotton ties.

“In our uniforms we

are not just individuals, but

representatives of the vast

movement, a great cause, a

vital part of a great nation.”

—James E. West

18 Ship Organization and Uniforms

Rolling the jumper: Brush clean and turn inside out. Place one sleeve directly over

theotherinfrontofthejumper.Foldthecollarlengthwisesothesideedgesaretogether

andthenfolddown.Foldthearmsbackoverthecollartwice.Rollthejumpertightly

toward the lower edge. Secure with cotton ties.

Uniforms are always pressed with a military press. To press the jumper, turn it inside

out. Press the front, back, collar, and sleeves. Place one sleeve directly over the other in

frontofthejumper.Foldthecollarlengthwisesothesideedgesaretogether.Creasethe

folded edge of the collar and the center fold on the jumper. is will result in an inverted

fold running the length of the center front of the jumper.

Proper uniforming is simple. As with Boy Scout and other BSA uniforms, the

national organization establishes the uniform requirements. Obtain the proper uniform

and sew the patches and insignia on it according to the rules in this manual. When in

doubt, consult the ship’s boatswain or the adult leader responsible for helping your ship

in uniforming. e uniforms described in this manual are required for participation

in national Scouting events.

In the interest of economy, ships should consider choosing only one dress uniform for

their members. A new white dress uniform is less expensive than a new dress blue uniform

and is available in male and female sizes. Some ships may be in areas where the availability

of high-quality, low-cost used dress blue uniforms makes them more desirable. Other units

may elect to wear blue uniforms in the winter and whites in the summer.

All members and leaders of the individual ship must wear whatever national standard

uniform is selected by the ship. Insignia must be properly placed on the uniform, and it

is important that the uniform clearly indicates that the wearer is a Sea Scout in the Boy

Scouts of America. National oﬃcial Sea Scout uniform insignia must be worn exactly

as speciﬁed in the Sea Scout Manual.

Sea Scout Youth Dress Uniform—Whites (Male and Female)

e national oﬃcial Sea Scout uniform, youth dress white, conforms to the U.S.

Navy enlisted uniform speciﬁcations and consists of a white traditional jumper with

ﬂap on the back; white trousers; Navy-style white enlisted cover (hat) (no insignia on

cover and identical cover for male and female); black, rolled tie secured with a square

knot; black, plain-toe, polished dress shoes; black socks; and white web belt with plain

silver buckle. e back of the uniform ﬂap has two Sea Scout oval cloth anchors (bugs)

attached, positioned one inch from the lowest portion of the anchor crown to each

corner of the ﬂap with the crown of the anchor pointed at the corner of the ﬂap, thus

placing the anchor at a diagonal. e ﬁrst step in preparing a cover is to wash it. While

the cover is wet, put it on the owner’s head, then take if oﬀ and roll the upper half-inch

portion of the lip of the cover down tightly. e roll will dry at a 45-degree angle to the

side of the hat. e cover is worn with the bottom band of the cover one inch above the

eyebrow. e cover is never worn cocked back on the head or to one side.

Sea Scout Youth Dress Uniform—Blues (Male)

Ships in colder climates may choose to wear a navy blue (black) uniform. is

uniform consists of a black, Navy-style enlisted jumper; black trousers; a black, rolled

Ship Organization and Uniforms 19

tie secured with a square knot; black, polished, plain-toe shoes; and black socks. e

cover is white (with no insignia) and is the same as the white uniform. Oval cloth Sea

Scout anchors (bugs) are positioned one inch from the corner of the inside piping to the

lowest position of the anchor crown. e crown of the anchor is pointed at the corner

of the piping, placing the anchor insignia at an angle, replacing the stars on the ﬂap of

U.S. Navy uniforms. e cuﬀ and back ﬂap have only two rows of piping. e center

row of piping on the cuﬀ and back ﬂap of U.S. Navy uniforms is removed.

Sea Scout Youth Dress Uniform—Blues (Female)

FemaleSeaScoutyouthuniformsmustmeetUSNfemaleenlisteduniformspeci-

cations: woman’s garrison cap (no insignia); woman’s white, short-sleeve blouse; black

tab tie; woman’s service blue coat with Sea Scout silver buttons; woman’s blue trousers;

black medium-heel pumps; and black socks.

If a ship chooses, the entire female ship’s company may elect to wear a woman’s

garrison cap (no insignia); woman’s white, short-sleeve blouse; black tab tie; woman’s

service blue coat with Sea Scout silver buttons; and woman’s plain blue, six-gored skirt,

unbelted with a waistband pocket in the upper right front. e welt pocket style may

be worn as long as it is serviceable. e skirt must match the coat in color and fabric.

e kick pleat should not exceed six inches in length. e skirt is worn at the middle

of the knee to one and a half inches below the knee. e zipper is worn on the left side.

e skirt is worn with ﬂesh-colored, no-seam hose with no design. Black medium-heel

pumps are worn.

Sea Scout Youth Work Uniform (Male and Female)

e “work uniform” refers to uniforms used in day-to-day Sea Scout activities. It is

sometimesknownasanactivityuniform.Dierentactivitiesrequiredierentclothing,

and the ship should designate the appropriate uniform for each activity. A Sea Scout

ship may, for example, designate a ship T-shirt for member use. All clothing used by

ships should identify members as part of Sea Scouts, Boy Scouts of America. is may

beaccomplishedbyincludingthewordsSeaScoutsBSAortheFirstClassanchoron

the clothing item.

Youth Uniforms

20 Ship Organization and Uniforms

While program variation requires ﬂexibility with the work uniform, the national

oﬃcial Sea Scout youth work uniform consists of a light blue short- or long-sleeve

cotton-blend U.S. Navy enlisted shirt, dark blue trousers with navy blue web belt and

silver buckle, and navy blue baseball cap. e cap may have the ship name or insignia

on it. e footgear will usually consist of plain black shoes with black socks, but may

be altered by the nature of the work involved. e badge of oﬃce is worn on the left

sleeve as usual. e Sea Scouts BSA strip is worn over the right pocket. Work uniforms

should be lightly starched and pressed with a regular military press. is is a great

uniform for a ship to start out with due to its low cost and practicality.

e work uniform is not designed for actual work such as painting or engine repairs.

Use old clothes for dirty work. e work uniform is used for ship activities. It is practical,

easily cleaned, comfortable, and provides recognition of individuals as members of Sea

Scouts. It is a good uniform to wear on an outdoor activity or while underway. Ships may

substitue navy blue cargo-type shorts as optional wear for warm months of the year.

Adult Dress White Uniform (Male and Female)

Adult leaders should always set the example regarding standardization of the uniform.

e national oﬃcial Sea Scout dress white uniform for adult leaders conforms to U.S.

Navy oﬃcer speciﬁcations, with a white, short-sleeve shirt with epaulets; white trousers;

white web belt and silver buckle; and plain-toe, high-polish white shoes with white socks.

e adult leader wears a traditional U.S. Navy-style oﬃcer combination white cover

with the Sea Scout headband, silver chin strap, and Sea Scout silver cap buttons. A white

crewneck T-shirt is worn under the shirt. Adult women wear the same uniform as men,

except women do not wear the T-shirt under the blouse, and they wear a woman’s white

U.S. Navy oﬃcer combination cover. is cover must be altered to Sea Scout speciﬁca-

tions. e badge of oﬃce (Skipper, mate, etc.) is worn on black epaulet covers that cover

the entire epaulet of the shirt. e badge of oﬃce is centered on the black epaulet cover

with the crown of the anchor directed away from the body.

As an alternative, adult females may wear the above uniform with a white A-line skirt

(U.S. Navy speciﬁcations) hemmed at the knee to one and a half inches below the knee

with a kick pleat in the center back not to exceed six inches. When wearing the skirt, the

female adult will wear white, medium-heel pumps and ﬂesh-colored seamless hosiery

with no design.

Adult Dress Blue Uniform (Male)

Maleadultleadersmaywearanavyblue(black)uniformsix-buttonjacket;white,

long-sleeved dress shirt; black four-in-hand tie; black trousers, navy blue web belt with

silver buckle; black, highly polished, plain-toe dress shoes with black socks; and white

U.S. Navy oﬃcer combination cover with Sea Scout hatband, silver chin strap, and Sea

Scout silver cap buttons. Six Sea Scout silver buttons replace Navy brass buttons on the

jacket. e badge of oﬃce insignia is positioned two inches above the edge of the sleeve,

measured from the lowest portion of the insignia to the edge of the sleeve, with the

crown of the anchor pointed toward the hand.

Adult Dress Blue Uniform (Female)

FemaleadultleadersmaywearthefollowinguniformmeetingU.S.Navyocer

speciﬁcations: navy blue, single-breasted, four-button uniform jacket; white blouse;

black tab tie; black wool gabardine A-line skirt, hemmed at the knee one and a half

inches below the knee with a kick pleat not to exceed six inches in the center back; black,

medium-heel pumps; ﬂesh-colored seamless hosiery; and Navy uniform female oﬃcer’s

combination cover with a white cover, silver Sea Scout hatband, silver Sea Scout chin

Ship Organization and Uniforms 21

strap,andsilverSeaScouthatbuttons.FourSeaScoutsilverbuttonsreplacetheNavy

buttons on the jacket. As an alternatvie, adult females may wear black slacks with black,

highly polished, plain-toe shoes with black socks.

Adult Work Uniform (Male and Female)

e national oﬃcial Sea Scout adult work uniform is a khaki, short-sleeve shirt;

khaki trousers; black, plain-toe, polished shoes; black socks, navy blue baseball cap; and

khaki web belt with brass buckle. e adult leader signiﬁes his or her oﬃce by wearing a

silver metal insignia on each collar. A white crewneck T-shirt is worn under the uniform

shirt, and the uniform shirt is worn with the collar open.

Adult Male Uniforms

Adult Female Uniforms

22 Ship Organization and Uniforms

Quartermasters

e Quartermaster Award, the highest achievement in Sea Scouts, entitles

(but does not require) the holder to wear an adult leader’s uniform (see page 21).

e Quartermaster may elect to wear the Sea Scout youth uniform instead. If the

Quartermaster chooses to wear the youth uniform, the Able rank patch is removed.

Quartermaster youth members who elect to wear an adult leader’s uniform wear a

black chin strap in place of the silver strap on the adult leader’s combination cover. No

rank insignia is worn on the left pocket. e medallion or square knot is worn instead.

e Sea Scout anchor device without stars is worn on both sleeve cuﬀs of white or blue

dress jackets in the same position as an adult badge of oﬃce. On white dress oﬃcer’s shirts,

the Quartermaster knot is worn. Quartermasters wear boatswain’s and boatswain’s mate

badges of oﬃce on the sleeve as designated for all youth uniforms, except khaki work

uniforms. Quartermasters wearing khaki uniforms will wear the Sea Scout anchor (lapel

pin) on the collar in the same position as the adult leader’s badge of oﬃce.

Where to Find Uniforms

Navy uniforms can be obtained from Navy exchanges, surplus stores, or by mail

orderthroughtheNavyresalesystem.Khakiorwork-typeuniformscanbelocatedat

stores specializing in work clothing.

e best source of uniforms for most units is the U.S. Navy:

Navy Support Center

 1240GatorBlvd.,Suite200

 BuildingNo.3126,SecondFloor

Norfolk, Virginia 23521-2315

 Fax:800-551-6289

Veriﬁcation of registration is necessary if a Sea Scout.

e unit leader must send a letter to the Uniform Support Center on ship stationery.

e letter must state that he or she is a Sea Scout leader and is authorized to purchase

Navy uniforms for Sea Scout purposes. e letter must include the full name, Social

Security number, and address of the sender. Ask for a Navy Uniform Catalog and a

Uniform Price List. e letter must be endorsed by the BSA council verifying current

registration.

Followingreceiptofthisletter,theNavywillentertheunitleader’snameandSocial

Security number in the Uniform Support Center computer. e unit leader may then

call and order uniforms by telephone by using a credit card. e uniforms will then be

mailed to his or her address.

In 2009, the cost of a white Sea Scout dress uniform through the Uniform Support

Centerwas$66.95foreverythingbutshoes.ispriceincludesshipping.(Activeand

retired military have access on the Web to the Navy Exchange.)

eNavynolongermakesthewhiteocer’sshirtwithepaulets.However,pilot

shirts are a low-cost option. If a better grade white shirt is desired, the U.S. Coast

GuardAuxiliaryisasource.

Another source of traditional uniforms and information is Ship’s Stores. Operated

as a nonproﬁt service by several Sea Scout adult leaders, it oﬀers quality uniforms for

both Sea Scouts and Sea Scout adult leaders. If Ship’s Stores has the items you need in

stock, then this is the most economical option for white and blue uniforms. Prices do

not include shipping.

Along with dress blue uniforms, white uniforms, and work uniforms, Ship’s Stores

carries program materials such as advancement scorecards and wallet certiﬁcates, and

from time to time introduces detailed how-to-do-it books and pamphlets for Sea

Scouts and their leaders.

Ship Organization and Uniforms 23

Ship’s Stores is a mail-order house. e catalog and current price list can be found on

the Web, or Skippers and council oﬃcers may request a free catalog and current price

list by writing to:

Ship’s Stores

 2100W.Highway12

Lodi, CA 95242

 Phone:209-406-7434

E-mail: jackie@ships-store.org

Web site: www.ships-store.org

Insignia

e placement of Sea Scout insignia is detailed in the following pages. Placement is

speciﬁc and is eﬀective as of the publication date of Sea Scout Manual, No. 33239, in

2010. e BSA’s Insignia Guide, No. 33066, will provide any required updates. Insignia

information is also available on the BSA Web site at www.scouting.org.

Council emblems will be worn on all dress Sea Scout uniforms. In addition, each

ship will wear a custom-designed ship emblem unique to the respective ship. is

custom ship emblem must be round and approximately two and a half inches in diam-

eter. It must contain the name of the ship, the ship number, and the city of registry. In

addition, the emblem may contain a custom design of the ship’s choosing. It may not

contain U.S. Navy or U.S. or local government seals or insignia. (Units with present

inventory of ship insignia may use that insignia until it is exhausted before ordering new

custom emblems that conform to the 2010 standards.)

Youth Dress Uniform

Rightsleeve—eU.S.agiscenteredattheseam.Flagsizeisapproximately1½

by2½inches.eshipcustomemblemiscenteredoneinchbelowtheU.S.ag.e

Quality Unit Award is centered one inch below the ship emblem.

Left sleeve—e council emblem is centered touching the seam. e badge of oﬃce

(boatswain, etc.) is centered four inches below the seam. e Long Cruise badge is

centered½inchimmediatelybelowthebadgeofoceor,ifnobadgeofoceisworn,

four inches below the shoulder seam. Note that stand-alone unit numbers are not

displayed on the uniform.

Rightpocket—ereisnorightpocketonsomedressuniforms.eSeaScouts

BSA strip, No. 04125 (blue), or No. 04126 (white), is to be approximately ⅜ of an

inch above where the top of the pocket would be if it were there (use the left pocket

top as your guide). Order of the Arrow insignia are not worn on Sea Scout uniforms.

Nameplates must be black with white block lettering (No. 20100) and are worn

immediately above the Sea Scouts BSA strip. As an alternative to the Sea Scouts BSA

strip, adult or youth uniforms may have the letters SEA SCOUTS BSA embroidered

or sewn in contrasting white or black thread, ⅜ of an inch above the right pocket (or

approximate position if no pocket) measured to the bottom of the letters from the top

of the pocket seam. e letters must be in block-style letters ⁄

₁₆ of an inch in height. All

thread will be black in color except for lettering on navy blue (black) uniforms, where

the thread will be white.

Left pocket—e badge of rank is centered on the left pocket. e SEAL (Sea Scout

Advanced Leadership) twin dolphin insignia is worn ⅜ of an inch above the left pocket.

If suspended medals or knots are worn, the SEAL insignia is worn above the suspended

medals or knots. Suspended medals are worn no more than ﬁve at a time, pinned in

asinglerowimmediatelyabovetheseam.Medalsarewornforbridgesofhonorand

formaloccasions.Barawards(e.g.,SmallBoatHandler)areworncentered⅜ofaninch

below the pocket.

24 Ship Organization and Uniforms

Youth Work Uniform

e Sea Scouts BSA strip is worn or the words SEA SCOUTS BSA are embroi-

dered ⅜ of an inch above the right pocket in black block letters ⁄₁₆ of an inch in height.

e badge of oﬃce is worn centered four inches below the left shoulder seam, measured

from the shoulder seam to the top of the embroidered insignia. e ship may elect to

wear the ship emblem on this uniform in the same location as on the dress uniform. e

ship may elect to wear the badge of rank in the same location as on the dress uniform.

e American ﬂag is worn on the right sleeve at the shoulder seam. No other insignia

is worn on this uniform. A nameplate, black plastic with white letters (No. 20100), is

worn immediately above the Sea Scouts BSA strip.

Adult Dress Uniform

ese regulations apply to all the adult dress uniforms, except as noted in the sections

above relating to each individual uniform.

Rightsleeve—Ondressuniformjackets,thecuinsigniabadgeofoceisworn

two inches above the coat sleeve cuﬀ, measured from the cuﬀ to the bottom portion of

the insignia on both sleeves. If wearing a dress white uniform shirt, a silver metal badge

of oﬃce is worn on black soft epaulet covers centered on each shoulder, or the black

epaulet cover may have the badge of oﬃce embroidered directly on it in silver thread.

is insignia shall be centered with the crown of the anchor facing toward the shoulder.

e black epaulet cover shall cover the entire epaulet. Collar insignia is not worn with

this white uniform shirt. e white shirt worn without a jacket is worn open at the neck

with a white crew-neck T-shirt. e U.S. ﬂag is worn at the right shoulder seam on the

white dress shirt. e U.S. ﬂag is not worn on any of the dress jackets.

Left sleeve—e council emblem is worn at the top of the shoulder. e badge of

oﬃce is worn centered two inches above the cuﬀ on uniform jackets only. In the case of

dress white shirts, the badge of oﬃce is worn as described on the shoulder. No collar

insignia is worn on dress white shirts.

Rightpocket—ereisnorightpocketonsomedressuniforms.eSeaScouts

BSA strip, No. 04125 (blue), or No. 04126 (white), is to be approximately ⅜ of an

inch above where the top of the pocket would be if it were there (use the left pocket top

as your guide). Order of the Arrow insignia is not worn on Sea Scout uniforms. e

Seabadge trident insignia is worn centered above the right pocket, over Sea Scouts BSA

and immediately above the nameplate. Nameplates must be black plastic with white

letters with block lettering. Nameplates are worn immediately above the Sea Scouts

BSA strip.

Left pocket—Up to six knots may be worn immediately over the pocket in two rows

of three. e SEAL insignia is worn centered immediately above the square knots. Only

ﬁve suspended medals may be worn at a time, pinned in a single row immediately above

the seam of the left pocket. Scouting medals are worn for formal or bridge of honor

occasions only. e order in which medals and knots are worn is at the discretion of

the wearer. It is suggested that the medal or knot deemed most important by the wearer

be worn on his or her own right. Embroidered knots are representative of suspended

medals and are designed for the convenience of the wearer. No youth awards are worn

by adults on any Sea Scout uniforms, with the exception of the Quartermaster, Eagle

Scout,VenturingSilver,oroldAirScoutAceawards;theHonorMedal,Heroism

Award,MedalofMerit,andHornadayAward;andScoutreligiousawards.Military

ribbons or other awards not awarded by the BSA are not worn on any Sea Scout

uniformswiththeexceptionoftheFinleyAwardgivenbytheU.S.PowerSquadronsto

deserving Sea Scouts.

Other—No temporary insignia is worn.

Ship Organization and Uniforms 25

Adult Work Uniform

e national oﬃcial adult work uniform (khaki) has very little insignia. It is highly

recommended that insignia on work uniforms be kept to an absolute minimum.

Rightsleeve—eAmericanagiswornattheseam.Optional:shipcustomemblem

one inch below the American ﬂag.

Left sleeve—None

Rightpocket—KhakiSeaScoutBSAstrip,No.04127,isworninlinewiththetop

edge of the pocket, with the lettering centered ⅜ of an inch above the pocket seam mea-

sured to the bottom of the letters. Temporary insignia and Order of the Arrow pocket

ﬂaps are not worn on any Sea Scout uniform. A nameplate, black plastic with white

block letters (No. 20100), is worn immediately above the Sea Scouts BSA strip. e

Seabadge trident may be worn centered above the right pocket, above the nameplate.

Left pocket—e SEAL pin may be worn ⅜ of an inch above the left pocket and

above any other insignia in that location.

Collar—e insignia denoting responsibility consists of a metal device worn on each

collar on khaki work uniforms only. e insignia is centered ¾ of an inch from the tip

of the collar to the lowest portion of the insignia. e crown of the anchor is pointed

toward the tip of the collar so the insignia is at an oblique angle. Quartermaster youth

wearing the adult uniform will wear the Sea Scout lapel pin, No. 04135, centered on

both sides of the collar in the same location.

No other insignia is authorized for the work uniform.

Sea Scout Pocket Strips

eBoyScoutsofAmericaSupplyGroupoerstheSeaScoutsBSApocketstrips

to be worn by Sea Scouts and adult leaders on all uniforms above the right pocket.

e only correct wording for strips is Sea Scouts BSA. Strips with the words Sea

Explorers BSA or Sea Scouting BSA must be replaced with white, No. 04126B; navy,

No.04125B;ortan(khaki),No.04127B.einsigniausesblackthreadonalluni-

forms except the navy blue (black) uniforms, which use white thread. e words SEA

SCOUTS BSA are in block letters ⁄₁₆ of an inch in height. Old insignia with colored

thread other than black or white must be replaced.

Units may elect to embroider SEA SCOUTS BSA directly on the uniform. Superior

results can be achieved by having the words SEA SCOUTS BSA directly embroidered

onto the material above the right pocket or in the approximate position. e letters must

be ⁄₁₆-inch block letters in contrasting black or white. e letters are positioned ⅜ of an

inch above the pocket seam measured to the bottom of the letters.

26 Ship Organization and Uniforms

Recommended Placement

of Sea Scout Insignia

RIGHT SLEEVE LEFT SLEEVE

RIGHT POCKET LEFT POCKET

Council Emblem

Badge of Ofﬁce

Long Cruise

Badge

SEAL Pin

Badge of Rank

Bar Awards

Seabadge Pin

(adult uniform)

Sea Scouts

BSA Strip

NAME PLATE

Ship Emblem

U.S. Flag

Shoulder Seam

Ship Operations 27

SHIP OPERATIONS

e time and place for things to happen in Sea Scouts is at ship meetings. A Sea

Scout ship whose meetings are full of fun and meaningful activity is a ship that has few

moraleormembershipproblems.Highschool–ageyouthjointotakepartinthefun

and exciting adventures of Sea Scouts, so, keep your regular meetings full of activities

that are just as interesting as cruises and other seagoing events.

Meetingsalsoinvolveadministration.Itisatimeforreportsanddecisionsbythe

members in the democratic spirit of America. It is the place where members can and

should speak up so that most decisions will be in the best interests of the majority of the

membership. Experience has shown that where the program is based on discussion and

general agreement, the response is usually enthusiastic.

To be successful, meetings must be carefully planned and organized in advance. e

agenda, activity ideas, and meeting techniques in this chapter are designed to give you

the information you need to plan successful meetings.

The Ship Meeting

Ship meetings should be held at a regular time and

place. Some ships build a landship to add atmosphere

and provide a proper setting for ceremonies.

Generally,successfulshipsfollowtheseguidelines:

• eshipholdsregularweeklymeetingsatan

established time and place.

• eship’socersholdaquarterdeckmeeting

once a month to problem-solve and plan.

• eshipschedulesatleastonemonthlyactivity.

• Shipmeetingsareheldonthesamenightofthe

week. Quarterdeck and ship committee meetings

are held on a diﬀerent night. is makes it easier

for members to remember.

• Shipocerscanplanadditionalmeetings,

activities, work parties, etc., during the month,

as needed.

28 Ship Operations

FIRST SHIP MEETING OF THE MONTH

A. OPENINGCEREMONIES boatswain

Call ship to attention.

Advance the colors.

 Recognizevisitors.

B. THEBUSINESSSESSION

Call to order boatswain

 Minutesofthelastmeeting yeoman

Ofﬁcers’ reports boatswain

 • Communications yeoman

 • Membership boatswain’smate

 • Financialreport purser

 • Equipment storekeeper

 • Districtandcouncilactivities boatswain

New activity chair and committees boatswain

Promotion of activities activity chair

Questions for ship decision boatswain

Skipper’s comments Skipper

C. THEACTIVITY

At the conclusion of the business session, the boatswain calls upon the Sea

Scout who is the chair of the activity scheduled for that particular meeting.

Heorshetakesoverandwiththeaidofhisorhercommitteeconducts

the activity.

D. CLOSINGCEREMONIES boatswain

Retirethecolors.

Skipper’s minute

 Dismisstheship.

Ship Operations 29

CHECKLIST OF ITEMS FOR SHIP MEETING AGENDA

OPENING CEREMONY, boatswain

e standard opening ceremony for a Sea Scout ship should

be carried out with the dignity and the respect due the tradi-

tions of the sea. It can be carried out aboard a landship and

follows this pattern:

Call ship to attention.

Advance the colors.

Recognizevisitors.

ADMISSION OF NEW MEMBERS, boatswain’s mate

New members can be brought in and registered at any time,

but in many ships the oﬃcial admission ceremony for new

members is generally carried out during the second ship

meeting of each month. is should be an impressive, formal

welcome of the new member to the ship and should be

scheduled imme diately after each new member is registered.

MINUTES OF THE LAST SHIP MEETING, yeoman

e minutes of the last ship meeting—read, corrected, and

approved—may be posted on the bulletin board in advance

so they can be read by members before the meeting. If this is

done, they can be approved by a vote when presented without

being read by the yeoman.

OFFICERS’ REPORTS, boatswain

At the ﬁrst meeting of every month, the boatswain calls

for verbal reports from the oﬃcers. ese are brief reports

which should, if necessary, be discussed by the membership.

Questions calling for ship action concerning these reports

should be delayed until the portion of the meeting con cerning

“questions for ship decision.”

COLLECTION OF ACTIVITY SUGGESTIONS, Skipper

Realizingthattheactivitydesiresoftheshipareessential

to successful programming, the Skipper discusses activities

with the members. e yeoman makes a list of the most

popular ideas, which will then be discussed at the next

quarterdeck meeting.

PROMOTION OF ACTIVITIES, activity chair

Activity chairs responsible for the activities are asked to promote

participation in those activities. is is done through progress

reports on superactivities as well as the regular activities.

QUESTIONS FOR SHIP DECISION, boatswain

Questions may be presented by members for vote at any

time. is permits members to have a direct vote in any ship

decision.However,ifmembershaveelectedgoodocersto

represent them, the members should rely upon the oﬃcers to

make decisions. Suﬃcient time should be allowed for questions

that are referred from quarterdeck meetings or come up during

a discussion of the oﬃcers’ reports.

ELECTION OF SHIP OFFICERS, boatswain and Skipper

e election of oﬃcers should be followed by setting a time

and place for the training of the new oﬃcers by the Skipper.

SKIPPER’S COMMENTS, Skipper

Late in each meeting, the Skipper should be asked for his or

her comments. is does not mean the Skipper cannot make

comments during the rest of the meeting, for he or she must

be alert to answer direct questions or to make comments

which are necessary to the smooth operation of the ship.

COMMUNICATIONS, yeoman

Pertinent parts of letters and bulletins received are discussed.

e ship decides what action to take.

MEMBERSHIP, boatswain’s mate

Discussthenamesofnewprospectsandassignthemto

members in accordance with the ship recruiting plan.

FINANCES, purser

A brief ﬁnancial report is made by the purser. It should

include last month’s income, disbursements, balance, and any

unpaid dues or outstanding assessments. e ship budget

should be approved by the ship members annually.

EQUIPMENT, storekeeper

e storekeeper gives a complete report on the inventory and

general condition of all the ship equipment, securing help as

needed from ship members.

ANNOUNCEMENT OF ACTIVITY COMMITTEES, boatswain

e boatswain announces the chair, committee members,

and consultants (if any) for each scheduled activity for the

next month.

At intervals the ship will be represented at national, regional,

or local activities and conferences. ese representatives

should be asked to prepare and make reports to the ship

membership at the ﬁrst meeting following the conference.

SHIP MEETING ACTIVITY, activity chair

At this time, during each ship meeting, the boatswain turns

the meeting over to the activity chair who, with the help of

his or her committee, conducts the activity. At the close of

the activity, the activity chair turns the meeting back to

the boatswain.

CLOSING CEREMONY, boatswain

e closing ceremony of a ship is generally an established

ceremony that follows an inspirational and meaningful pat-

tern. Listed below are some things you might consider.

• Changingthewatch

• Skipper’sminute

• PipingtheSkipperovertheside

• Dousingthecolors

• Dismissingthecrews

At times, when an activity is not carried out aboard a landship,

the boatswain, with the Skipper’s approval, may dispense with

the closing ceremony and merely dismiss the ship.

30 Ship Operations

Two-Part Program

Ship meetings consist of two parts, a business session and an activity. Since the activity

is the focus and involves the major portion of the time, the business session should be

handled as eﬃciently as possible.

Oﬃcers’ report only needs to be made once a month. Usually these reports are

made during the ﬁrst meeting of the month. Other meetings are reserved for program,

advancement, and those business items that happen occasionally.

The Ship Business Session

e business session of a ship meeting is generally brief but important. Because of its

nature, it is not necessarily the most interesting part of the meeting, but it need not be

dull. e way to make this session eﬀective, and fun, follows.

• Shipbusinessmustbeconductedinconcurrencewiththeshipbylaws.

• eocersneedtounderstandtheoverallorganizationandoperationofaSea

Scout ship. Well-trained oﬃcers will ﬁnd it easy to carry out their responsibilities

during the ship business session.

• eboatswain,whoisinchargeofthebusinesssession,shouldinvolveother

oﬃcers and members in the preparation of reports and assignments related to the

business session. e session will be more interesting if more people are involved

and have responsibility for business matters.

• Makethegroupfeelatease.

• Giveeveryoneachancetoparticipate.Freediscussionwillencouragebetterideas.

Direct,donotdominate,theconversation.Don’tforgettoasktheopinionsofshy

members. At the same time, slow down the person who talks too much.

• Focusonthesubject.Makethediscussionleadtodecisionsandaplanofaction.

is means that once in a while you will have to stop a discussion that deviates

from the main subject, and get the group back on track.

• Befair.Respecttheopinionsofboththemajorityandtheminority.Todothis,

you must determine the true wishes of both sides. is is done by giving both

parties a fair hearing. Once each has had its say, bring the matter to a vote. When

there is a divided opinion, use a secret ballot.

• Summarizeoccasionally.Reviewthepointsthathavealreadybeenmade.

• eonethingthatwillhelpmostistofollowthepreparedagendafortheship

meeting. If you are knowledgeable about the agenda, you should have eﬀective,

interesting business sessions.

Hints for Ship Members

Business sessions provide a real opportunity for ship members to inﬂuence the

conduct and program of their ship. To have an equal opportunity to express themselves,

the ship members should observe these general rules of conduct:

• Taketurnsspeakingduringthegeneraldiscussion.Ifyouhavetroublegettingaword

in, address the boatswain and ask for the ﬂoor. If everyone is talking and interrupting

each other, your boatswain should call for order and decide who has the ﬂoor.

• Staywiththetopicofdiscussion.Helpthegroupreachadecisionononetopic

before discussing the next one. Ship members can help the boatswain by staying

onthesubjectandclarifyingthepointofdiscussionforothers.Remember,this

will save your time as well as everyone else’s.

• Beinformal.Eciencyinhandlingshipbusinessshouldnotrequireagreatdeal

of parliamentary procedure. Parliamentary procedure was developed primarily

forlargegroupsofpeoplewithmanyconictingopinions.Mostshipswillnd

informal discussion a faster and more eﬀective way to operate.

Ship Operations 31

• Somebusinesscanbehandledformally.Ifthereisalargegrouppresentthatis

discussing a controversial issue, the motion and vote are the most eﬀective method

for reaching a decision.

The Activity Session

Inviting a Guest Speaker

Choose a speaker for his or her knowledge and ability to present accurate informa-

tion in an interesting and captivating manner. Extend an invitation that gives the

speaker plenty of time to prepare. e speaker will need to know how much time will be

available, the size and age range of the audience, the experience and knowledge level of

the group, the meeting location, time for arrival, and contact information.

On behalf of the ship, the moderator should publicly thank the speaker at the end of

the presentation. In addition, it is appropriate to thank the speaker with a letter from

the yeoman expressing the appreciation of the ship.

Giving a Demonstration

Ship meetings are the time for planning and learning. When planning a program that

will teach a skill, the following ideas should be considered:

• Decidewhattrainingisneededandtheskillstheparticipantsshouldmasterbythe

end of the training.

• Createatrainingoutlineandestimatethetimetheinstructionwilltake.

• Selectteachingmethodsmostsuitableforyou,yourtopic,andyourstudents.

• Designorselectteachingaidsandactivities.

• Requirefeedbacktodemonstratethattheinformationgivenhasbeenunderstood.

• Beexible.Sometimespeoplereallygetit,butsometimestheyneedmoretimeto

digest and process information.

• Evaluate.Performancetestsarepreferabletowrittentests.

In summary, you must ﬁrst decide what you want your students to do. en you tell

them what to do, show them what to do, let them practice doing it and ﬁnish by evaluat-

ing their performance.

Coaching a Skill

Coaching—the method of supervised learning by doing—is the perfect follow-up to

the demonstration of a skill.

Suggestions for Coaching

• Beabletoperformtheskillwellyourself.Reviewyourownexperienceinlearning

the skill and work out a series of steps for teaching it.

• Keepthecoachingonapersonalbasisbyworkingwithasmallgroup,perhapsonly

onetostartwith.Getadditionalcoaches,ifnecessary,tokeepthegroupssmall.

• Evaluatetheabilitiesandpersonalitytraitsofthoseyouarecoaching,asrelatingto

their power to learn a particular skill.

• Ifsomeonehasacquiredlittleornoneoftheskillthroughreading,discussion,or

past experience, go slowly at ﬁrst. Insist on accuracy or form ﬁrst, then speed.

• Don’tinterferewithaperson’shonestattempts.Don’tinterrupteortsunlessheor

she bogs down or goes oﬀ on the wrong track.

• Letthepersonmakemistakesifheorshecanlearnfromthem,butdenitely

point out any mistakes.

• Nevermakecorrectionssarcasticallyorfortheentertainmentofonlookers.

• Encouragebyremarkingonprogress,pointingoutthecompletionofeachstep

and the steps done well.

• Urgethepersontopracticeandperhapstocoachsomeoneelse,whenheorshe

has mastered the skill.

32 Ship Operations

The Quarterdeck Meeting

e quarterdeck meeting is a monthly business meeting of all the ship’s oﬃcers. e

meeting provides the oﬃcers a regular opportunity to review the ship’s program. It also

aﬀords an opportunity to plan future activities to satisfy the special interests and needs

of the members. Equally important, this meeting allows oﬃcers to practice the demo-

cratic principles of self-government with the counsel of qualiﬁed adult leaders.

e skipper, the mates, and the elected oﬃcers attend quarterdeck meetings. Crew

leaders, ship committee members, and consultants may attend by invitation.

Prior to every quarterdeck meeting, the boatswain and skipper should agree on the

agenda. ey determine and then discuss each item of business and reach a mutual

understanding of how it is to be handled.

Ship Operations 33

SUGGESTED AGENDA FOR QUARTERDECK MEETINGS

(e boatswain presides. Other oﬃcers participate as indicated.)

1. CALL TO ORDER, boatswain

2. MINUTES OF LAST QUARTERDECK MEETING, yeoman

 Minutesareread,corrected,andapproved.

3. REPORTS OF OFFICERS—Called for by boatswain

Communications, yeoman

• Readsorsummarizesallcorrespondence

depending on its importance.

• Takesnotesandplansappropriateaction.

Membership, boatswain’s mate

• Presentsplansforfutureceremonies.

• Reportsprogressinrecruiting,includinga

discussion of prospective members.

Finances, purser

• Reportslastmonth’sincome,disbursements,

and balance.

• Reportsmembersowingduesorfees.

• Obtainsauthorizationforpaymentofbills.

Boats and equipment, storekeeper

• Reportslastmonth’snew,lost,ordamageditems.

• Reportsneededmaintenanceorrepairs.

• Securesapprovalforitemstobepurchased

or repaired.

District and council activities, boatswain

• Reportsdistrictandcouncilactivitiesandleadsa

discussion concerning ships’ participation in them.

• Securessuggestionsforfuturedistrictor

council activities.

Past activities review, boatswain

Givesabriefreviewofthepastmonth’sactivities,

complimenting those responsible for success and

encouraging positive discussion of any weaknesses.

Ship committee meeting report, Skipper

Givesbriefsummaryofmeetingemphasizingthe

committee’s plans for its support of ship activities.

4. APPROVAL OF SHIP MEETING AGENDA, boatswain

e boatswain presents for approval the agenda for

the business part of the two regular meetings to be

held during the month.

5. CHECK ON THIS MONTH’S ACTIVITY PLANS, Skipper

• Conductsathoroughcheckonallactivityplans

for the month with deﬁnite action to tie up any

loose ends.

• Takesactionconcerninganynecessarychangesin

activities or committees.

6. PROGRAM PLANNING SESSION FOR

FUTURE ACTIVITIES

e program planning procedure is followed at

this time during each quarterdeck meeting. Under

the supervision of the Skipper, the oﬃcers use this

practical and democratic four-step method to make

ﬁnal decisions concerning the activities they feel will

meet the needs and desires of the ship’s membership.

STEP 1: Collect activity ideas.

STEP 2: Select the activities you want.

STEP 3: Assign committees to conduct them.

STEP4:Double-checkallplansandenthusiasti-

cally promote and enjoy the activities.

7. ADJOURNMENT, boatswain

34 Ship Operations

A Balanced Program

Youth join Sea Scouts to take part in interesting and exciting activities. is puts the

creation and production of activities high on the list of things oﬃcers must consider.

e Skipper must guide the unit into a well-balanced set of exciting and interesting

activities. When selecting and promoting activities, oﬃcers should consider social,

leadership, outdoor, ﬁtness, service, and citizenship experiences.

Planning activities for your ship program should be a collaborative eﬀort. Begin by

collecting and brainstorming activity ideas. e best sources are ship members. Once

completed, this list can be used by oﬃcers in planning programs for the ship.

Sources of Consultants

Listed here are some of the more common sources of consultants:

• Yachtclubmembers

• Boatclubmembersandocers

• LocalPowerSquadronorCoastGuardAuxiliaryotillamembers

• Boatingsupplyandequipmentstorepersonnel

• Ownersandemployeesofmarinas

• Militarypersonnel,especiallyactiveandreservemembersoftheNavyand

CoastGuard

• Shipcommitteemembers

• Parentsandfriends

• Teachersinschools,colleges,anduniversities

• Peopleinindustry,businesses,andprofessions

• Peopleingovernmentandotherpublicagencies

• Membersoflocalboatingandwatersafetyorganizations

Activity Committees

To produce a successful Sea Scout activity, two elements must be present. e ﬁrst is

a good idea, and the second is a good committee to carry it out. A good activity idea can

be a complete washout if the committee does not have the spirit and know-how to plan,

organize, and promote it.

e Skipper consults with the oﬃcers on the selection of chairs for each activity

committee. Overloading “workhorses” needs to be avoided in order to help all Sea

Scouts develop leadership abilities.

e boatswain and chair select the committee. e size of the committee, chosen

by the boatswain and the activity chair, should be tailored to the size of the activity.

Activity chairs schedule meetings and make plans well in advance of the deadline date,

and report on their progress at quarterdeck meetings. is ensures reliable information

concerning the project, and recognizes the importance of each activity chair.

After each activity, publicly give credit to those who helped, then thank them pri-

vately.Besurethelocationoftheactivityiscleanerthanitwasbeforetheactivity.Return

equipment to its proper place in good condition. Anything lost, damaged, or destroyed

should be repaired or replaced, particularly if it was borrowed. Settle ﬁnancial matters

for the activity with the purser. is includes any bills paid or unpaid by the committee

and any income collected or to be collected. It is important to make this ﬁnancial report

inwritingandattachanyreceiptsandinvoices.Finishbyreportingsuggestionsfor

improving similar future activities to the boatswain.

Ship Operations 35

Cruise and Superactivity Plans

Although the ship has a simple month-by-month procedure for program planning, it is

sometimes necessary to do some long-range planning. Nearly every teenager, and certainly

every Sea Scout, dreams of taking a cruise. It is, therefore, not merely a good idea, but a

solemn responsibility that the ship’s oﬃcers plan at least one long cruise each year.

Once a long cruise has been set, oﬃcers need to schedule things that must be carried

out to ensure the success of the cruise. e cost of food and lodging, essential equip-

ment,andtransportationhavetobeconsideredcarefullyforanysuperactivity.From

such discussion will come a monthly plan of action.

Cruises are just one phase of the many superactivities available to Sea Scouts. ere

are unlimited opportunities, tours and visits, and special at-home features available to

ships. Passport to High Adventure, No. 34245, describes how to plan, prepare for, and

carry out a high-adventure experience. is guidebook includes a directory of councils

with high-adventure programs and a list of councils with high-adventure bases.

A superactivity requires special planning and preparation. e ship’s oﬃcers must be

sure the members really want the activity and that the decision is made far enough in

advance to allow time for thorough preparations.

Plans are usually made months ahead. As the oﬃcers meet for each monthly planning

session, some portion of the preparation for the superactivity is included in their planning.

In this way, essential preparations are made for the coming high-adventure experience.

A cruise or other superactivity must be the choice of the majority of the ship members.

Unless they approve strongly of the event, they will not give it their wholehearted support.

erefore, involve as many members as possible from the very beginning to ensure success.

Superactivities need the approval of the ship’s committee. Once you get their

approval, you have a ﬁne team of adults to help you succeed.

A superactivity calls for a special committee of adults and ship members. e main

ingredient needed to make this committee ﬂourish is enthusiasm. If each member of the

committee is looking forward to the activity with high anticipation, you can be sure it

will happen in a big way.

Check your equipment. Well in advance of any cruise or superactivity, all equipment,

such as boats, camp gear, and trailers, should be carefully checked and put in good

condition. All secondary equipment should be secured and readied for use.

A certain amount of training is necessary before almost every superactivity.

Sometimes it involves the handling of a boat, other times a knowledge of the history

and terrain of the area you are visiting. Long before a cruise or superactivity, decide what

training must be conducted. is kind of preparation makes an activity safer, more

exciting, and meaningful.

Financeinadvance.Althoughmostcruisesorsuperactivitiesaresomewhatcostly,

early planning permits Sea Scouts to earn and save their share of the expenses.

When plans for a cruise or superactivity involve extensive travel, investigate the pos-

sibleuseofmilitaryfacilitiesalongtheway.TravelstopoversatAirForce,Army,orNavy

bases make meals and accommodations available at very reasonable rates.

Besafety-minded.FortheprotectionoftheSeaScouts,everyprecautionshouldbe

taken to conduct cruises and superactivities safely. Safety must not be secondary. It must

be a prime consideration from the very beginning of the superactivity planning experi-

ence. A ship must go prepared with the right skills and equipment. Leaders, at all times,

must avoid unnecessary risks even though their decisions may make them unpopular.

Each Sea Scout must be mature enough to take care of himself or herself and to realize

he or she is also responsible for the safety of the entire ship.

36 Ship Operations

Cruises and superactivities are usually rugged experiences. Everyone must be in good

healthbeforestartingout.UsetheAnnualHealthandMedicalRecord(No.34605)

to check each person in advance. Emphasize good health habits with those who are ﬁt

to go. Especially important to the health of the ship’s company is good sanitation as it

relates to cooking, drinking water, sleeping arrangements, and toilet facilities. e ship

should also check with the council to make sure they have the insurance necessary to

cover the group during the activity. If not, consult a local insurance agent on the advis-

ability of carrying health and accident insurance.

Disciplineisnecessary.Asashiptravels,itisinthepubliceye.Itsconductisareec-

tion of its chartered organization and the Boy Scouts of America. Safety is based on the

assumption that each person will obey the leader as directed especially in an emergency.

All cruises, tours, and trips require a tour permit from your local BSA council. At least

two weeks in advance, apply online for a local permit or use paper form No. 34426 for a

tour that is less than 500 miles. Apply online for a national tour permit or use paper form

No. 4419 at least one month before you leave for a tour or cruise over 500 miles.

Cruising—whether by sail, motor, or pulling boat on a river, lake, or ocean—is the

reason that 99 out of 100 of your shipmates joined. is calls for training and interest-

ing activities based on reliable information.

Ship Operations 37

Sample Plan—Long Cruise

Because cruising is a fundamental activity of Sea Scouts, we use it as an example

here to show how a big production of this type requires advanced preparation and

planning. Although the example used here is a cruise, the general idea applies to any

other superactivity. e techniques that ensure an enjoyable and meaningful experi-

ence are basically the same.

OCTOBER

• Select a long cruise to meet the desires

of the majority of the ship members.

• Getshipcommitteeapproval

and support.

• Skipper selects cruise chair and together

they select a committee.

• Determineadultleadershipfor

the cruise.

NOVEMBER

• Plan cruise in detail.

• Determinemethodofnancing

and, if necessary, select money-

earning projects.

• Select and then secure consultants,

if needed.

• If cruise is to be aboard a vessel not

owned or operated by the ship, make

necessary arrangements.

JANUARY

• Conduct money-earning project.

• Secure or repair cruise equipment.

• Gatherinformationandthendiscuss

historic background, wildlife, maps

and charts, etc. related to the cruise.

FEBRUARY

• Plan and conduct a meeting of the

parents to ensure their understanding

and wholehearted support of the cruise.

MARCH

• Conduct special training, if necessary.

• Chart detailed cruise plans and, if

advisable, make special arrangements

regarding campsites, docking,

supplies, etc.

• Apply for a local tour permit or national

tour permit, as required, through your

local council service center.

MAY

• Put vessel(s) in shape and conduct a

shakedown cruise.

• Makeanalcheckofplans,equip-

ment, supplies, and reservations.

• Firmupadultleadership.

JULY

• Cast oﬀ–have a good time–keep an

accurate log–and remember, travel

courtesy pays oﬀ.

Help in selecting resource material can be found in other chapters of this manual. Additional

information can be secured from your public library, boating enthusiasts, and Coast Guard

and Navy personnel.

38 Ship Operations

Written Communications

Ship Logbook

Keepingtheship’spapersandrecordsistheresponsibilityoftheyeoman.Minutes

of ship and quarterdeck meetings, membership rosters, rosters of the ship’s oﬃcers and

adult leaders, records of attendance, advancement, etc., will provide a historical record

of the ship. e ship logbook is a place to keep photographs, clippings, and program

souvenirs, and notes on outstanding achievements by the members of the ship. When

new members join the ship, they can sign the logbook during the admission ceremony.

Letters of Appreciation

Manypeoplewillhelpashipovertime.Donationsofequipmentwillbemade,

consultants will give time and expertise, hospitality will be extended, and adult leaders

will patiently guide and teach. A thoughtful letter of appreciation is always appropriate.

Makesuretoexpressthanksforspecichelp,andmentionthelastingeectthehelp

will provide.

Publicizing Your Ship

Publicity is simple. Plan something, do something, and tell everyone something

happened. Sea Scouts regularly participate in fun, exciting, and unique events. Once

you plan an event, notify the local newspaper, the school newspaper, the local television

station, and neighborhood papers of the details. If reporters and photographers are

not sent, make sure you send a press release to the media describing the event. When

submitting an article, include the following:

• Answerthe5W’s:who,what,when,where,andwhy.

• Explainhowtheeventoccurred.

• Usesensorydetails,dialogue(ifappropriate),andactionverbstoshowexactly

what was observed.

• Presenteventsinaclear,logicalorder.

• Capturethemoodoftheevent.

• Putacontactnameandphonenumberattheendofthearticle.

• Editandproofread.

• Submitapictureshowingtheactionoftheevent.

Recruiting New Members

e continuous addition of new members is essential for growth and running a

successful program. Empowering youth to develop and run a good program is one of

the best ways to recruit.

What works? If kids are having fun, word of mouth will bring in recruits. Youth

sharing experiences with other youth, interacting with Scout troops, Cub Scout cruises,

and volunteering at camporees are all ways to let others know about your ship. Be a

presence in uniform wherever possible—award ceremonies, parades, festivals, outdoor

shows, boat shows, and other civic events. Create a Web site with high-impact images

and a calendar of events. Invite people to an open house and feed them with both food

and ideas. e possibilities for letting others know about the dynamics of your program

are endless. Just remember, the key is to make it fun.

Ship Operations 39

Fund-Raising

Maintainingboatsisacostlyundertaking.Longcruisesandhigh-adventureexperi-

ences require money. Before taking on a fund-raising campaign, check with your council

regardingFriendsofScoutingoranyotherlimitations,andlethecouncilfund-raising

approval form.

Possibilities are unlimited, but there are tried and true methods of bringing money

into the ship’s treasury. Selling concessions, yard sales, silent auctions, car washes,

spaghetti suppers, and pancake breakfasts are great fun and serve multiple purposes—

publicity, recruitment, fund-raising, and fun.

Customs and Courtesies

Sea Scouts brings to its members a wealth of customs and courtesies based on the lore

of the sea. ese traditions furnish the background for Sea Scout ceremonies and formali-

ties. ey add atmosphere and connect us to our heritage as sailors and as Sea Scouts.

The Sea Scout Salute

Sea Scouts use the traditional military salute. e salute should be executed from

the position of attention. To execute the hand salute correctly, come to attention. e

right hand is raised smartly until the tip of the foreﬁnger touches the lower part of the

headdress or forehead above and slightly to the right of the right eye. e thumb and

ﬁngers are extended and joined, palm to the left, upper arm horizontal, forearm inclined

at 45 degrees, and the hand and wrist are straight. At the same time turn your head

toward the person saluted. To complete the salute, drop the arm to its normal position

by the side in one motion.

The Sea Scout Handclasp

e handclasp is the traditional handshake. It is delivered with the right hand in a

ﬁrm manner that indicates sincerity.

Sea Scout Courtesy

e respect of the young for the old and the junior for the senior is expressed in

manywaysinSeaScouts.Forinstance,whenseveralocersofvariousranksarecoming

aboard a large ship from a small boat, the senior always leads from the small boat,

followed by the juniors; but when disembarking, the senior always gets into the small

boat last.

At the table it is customary for the junior to remain standing until the senior is seated

or orders are given to take seats. e junior never leaves the table after the meal until he

or she has asked for and has received permission from the presiding oﬃcer at the table.

Sea Scouts do not barge aboard any vessel. Permission to come aboard is requested,

and must be granted before boarding.

e most outstanding form of courtesy found in Sea Scouts is the use of the word

“sir” or “ma’am.” A simple “yes” or “no” is not appropriate. You should respond with, “Yes,

sir,” or “no, sir,” or “Aye, aye, sir,” or “ma’am.”

Sea Scouts are ladies and gentlemen, and courtesy is the outward expression of

their character.

Apprentice 1c.

Demonstrate acceptable

courtesies used aboard

a Sea Scout vessel.

40 Ship Operations

The Boatswain’s Pipe

e boatswain’s pipe in the early days was known as

the “whistle of command” and had its origin in the

rowinggalleyofGrecianships.Althoughitmay

look and sound a bit like a whistle, it is in reality a

musical instrument on which many kinds of calls

may be played.

e pipe is used only by the boatswain and crew

leaders. e Skipper or

the mate issues orders verbally to the boatswain who, in

turn, either uses a pipe or passes them on verbally to the

crew leaders. e crew leaders wear the boatswain’s pipe as

an indication of their oﬃce and also to transmit orders to

their crew.

e boatswain’s pipe is worn suspended on a white

lanyard and carried in the pocket on the left-hand side of

the blouse.

Formal Boarding of a Sea Scout Vessel or Landship

e Double Salute

On all formal and oﬃcial occasions, whenever Sea Scouts come aboard a Sea Scout

ship or landship, they perform two salutes. As they do this, they continue to carry out a

custom of the sea that began centuries ago.

In the early days of Christianity, it was the custom to place a statue of the Blessed

Virgin or a cruciﬁx on the mainmast of the vessel. Every seaman, upon coming aboard

the ship, took oﬀ his hat or made the sign of the cross as a form of salute in the direction

of the mainmast.

National ﬂags became prominent in the 14th and 15th centuries. Ships of maritime

nations soon began to ﬂy their national ensign and requested that it be recognized also

by the seamen. So the double salute became a universal rule as each seaman saluted both

the mainmast and his national ensign when coming aboard.

Honoringthesetraditions,SeaScouts,immediatelyuponsteppingaboard,salute

rstthecenteroftheshipwhichisthetraditionalsalutetoGod.eythenturntoward

the ﬂagstaﬀ at the stern of the ship and perform the traditional salute to the ensign of

our nation. Note: is is the reverse of the Navy tradition of saluting the ensign ﬁrst

and then the oﬃcer of the deck.

When going ashore or leaving a landship, each person gives the double salute in

reverse, ﬁrst to the national ensign and then to the mainmast.

Piping the Side

Centuries ago, when ships were under the command of dandies of the court rather

than practical seamen, these worthies considered themselves too good to walk on board

the ship or climb the gangway steps. Accordingly, a boatswain and a detail of side boys

were assigned to hoist them onboard in a chair. e motions of the chair as it carefully

lifted them and deposited them “all standing” on the quarterdeck were controlled by the

boatswain’s pipe with the calls “hoist away,” “lower away,” and “secure.”

Today, the term side boys is gender neutral, and the duties are not so rigorous. When

the ship’s Skipper, other adult leaders, or dignitaries arrive at the ship for an oﬃcial visit,

honors are rendered.

Foraship’sadultleaders,twosideboysareposted.Councilocialsarerecognized

with four side boys, regional oﬃcials have six, and for national oﬃcials, eight side boys

are required.

Apprentice 1d.

Demonstrate the proper

procedure for boarding

a Sea Scout vessel

and landship.

Ship Operations 41

Side boys are mustered by the boatswain’s mate with the order, “Side boys post.”

Starting at the gangway, side boys are stationed on either side of the route taken by the

arriving oﬃcers across the quarterdeck. As the oﬃcial steps on the deck, the boatswain’s

mateannouncesthearrivalbycallingouttherankorrelationshipoftheocial.For

instance, if the person boarding is the Skipper of the Sea Scout Ship Invincible, the

boatswain’s mate announces, “Invincible arriving.” If the oﬃcer is the secretary of the

Navy, the boatswain’s mate announces, “Navy arriving.”

e announcement is followed by ringing the ship’s bell. e number of rings cor-

responds to the number of side boys posted, and the rings are sounded in groups of two.

Followingtheringingofthebell,theboatswain’smateplaysthecall “Pipe the Side” on

the boatswain’s pipe. e side boys salute at the ﬁrst note of the pipe and hold the salute

until the last note is sounded.

e person being piped aboard salutes midship, where the oﬃcer of the deck is

posted, and the oﬃcer of the deck returns the salute. e person boarding salutes the

ensign, and holds his salute until he reaches the end of the line of side boys.

If a Sea Scout party is boarding a U.S.

NavyorU.S.CoastGuardvessel,the

person in charge of the party should ﬁrst

walk up the gangway. At the top of the

gangway, this person must turn and salute

the ensign, which will be aft. is person

then will turn and salute the oﬃcer of the

deck and request permission for the party

to come aboard. All persons in the party

will salute the ensign and then the oﬃcer

of the deck when they reach the top of the

gangway. e reverse procedure applies

whendepartingtheship.WhenonaU.S.NavalvesselorU.S.CoastGuardvessel,Sea

Scouts follow military customs.

Boarding a Sea Scout Ship

Persons boarding a Sea Scout ship must request permission to come aboard. If the

persons are in a group, only the person in charge of the group must request permission

for the entire group.

History of the Flag of the United States of America

“Our ﬂag carries American ideas, American history and American feelings. It is not

apaintedrag.Itisawholehistory.ItistheConstitution.ItistheGovernment.Itisthe

emblemofthesovereigntyofthepeople.ItistheNation.”—HenryWardBeecher,1861

WehaveallheardthestoryofGeorgeWashington,BetsyRoss,andtherst

American ﬂag; however, there is no evidence to corroborate this story. We do know that

theGrandUnionagewoverGeorgeWashington’sheadquartersoutsideBostonon

January1,1776.

eRevolutionaryWarhadstartedtheyearbefore,andthe

coloniesneededaagoftheirown.eGrandUnionagis

often referred to as the ﬁrst American ﬂag; however, on

June14,1777,severalresolutionsfromtheMarineCommittee

were passed by the Continental Congress. e resolution that

established an oﬃcial ﬂag for the new nation was probably

meant to deﬁne a naval ensign rather than a national ﬂag, but

the ﬁrst ﬂag act resolved, “at the ﬂag of the United States be

Ordinary 1b.

Give a brief history of

the United States ﬂag.

Ordinary 1c.

Demonstrate how to ﬂy,

hoist, lower, fold, display,

and salute the U.S. ﬂag.

Explain ﬂag etiquette

and protocols for both

land and sea.

42 Ship Operations

made of thirteen stripes, alternate red and white; that the union be thirteen stars, white

in a blue ﬁeld, representing a new Constellation.”

Manyvariationsoftheagewuntil1818,whenCongressestablishedthenumberof

stripes at seven red and six white and provided the addition of one star for each state. e

current50-staraghasownsinceJuly4,1960,whenHawaiiociallyjoinedtheunion.

e ﬂag of the United States, referred to in general as the American ﬂag, is known

to Sea Scouts as the national ensign. Ever since John Paul Jones sailed the Ranger into

QuiberonBayinFrancetoreceivetherstsaluteoftheAmericanagbyaforeign

power, the U.S. Navy has referred to our ﬂag as the national ensign. Sea Scouts honor

this tradition.

When to Fly the Flag

e ﬂag of the United States should be ﬂown every day when weather permits,

butespeciallyonNewYear’sDay,InaugurationDay,PresidentsDay,ArmedForces

Day,EasterSunday,Mother’sDay,MemorialDay(halfstauntilnoon),FlagDay,

IndependenceDay,LaborDay,CitizenshipDay,ColumbusDay,Veteran’sDay,

anksgivingDay,ChristmasDay,thebirthdaysofstates(datesofadmission),andon

state holidays.

Ship Operations 43

Hoisting and Lowering the Flag

On Land

Two Sea Scouts are needed to hoist or lower the ﬂag correctly. In raising, one holds

the ﬂag to prevent it from touching the ground, while the other attaches the line and

raises the ﬂag, keeping it close to the staﬀ by holding the line rather taut. When the ﬂag

has left the ﬂag bearer’s arms, he steps back and comes to salute. In lowering, the ﬂag

bearer catches the ﬂag and unfastens it.

Hoisttheagbrisklyinthemorning,butnotearlierthansunrise.Loweritslowlyin

the evening, but not later than sunset.

On Board

Sea Scouts refer to the ﬂag of the United States as the ensign or colors. On Sea

Scout ships the ensign is ﬂown at the stern when the ship is alongside or at anchor. It

is ﬂown at the gaﬀ, usually aft and above the bridge, while underway on a power vessel

and three-quarters of the way up the backstay or leach on a sailboat. When the ship is

preparing to get underway, the ensign is shifted from the stern to the underway position

at the moment the ﬁrst line comes across or at the moment the crew begins to haul the

anchor. Ship’s ﬂags and oﬃcer’s ﬂags are ﬂown from the starboard spar, and signal ﬂags

are ﬂown from the port spar. e ensign is never ﬂown from the masthead.

eensignisraisedatexactly0800whentheshipisalongsideoratanchor.Itis

lowered (retired) at exactly sundown when the ship is at anchor or alongside. When

underway, the ensign is never retired. (In foreign waters it may be a violation of law not

to ﬂy the ensign.)

When raising the ensign, a color guard is posted. Sea Scouts often wear shorts

or T-shirts when underway, but when raising or retiring the colors, more respectful

clothing is required. A work uniform and baseball cap as cover is appropriate. It is also

important that the color guard is trained by the boatswain’s mate in advance so there is

no fumbling or disrespect shown during this ceremony.

e boatswain’s mate should assemble the color guard and ship’s company that

isnotondutyat0745.eboatswain’smateshouldsalutetheOOD(ocerofthe

deck)andsay,“Permissiontostrikeeightbellsontime,sir?”eOODshouldreply.

“Makeitso.”eboatswain’smatesoundstheboatswain’spipecall“Attention”followed

bytheboatswain’spipecall“AllHands.” e boatswain then gives the command, “All

handsattentionondeck.Handsalute.”Atapproximately0759:56,theship’sbellshould

bestruckeighttimessothelastbellstrikesoundsatexactly0800tothesecond.e

boatswain’s mate should then pipe the boatswain’s pipe call “Pipe the Side.” At the ﬁrst

note of the boatswain’s pipe call, the colors are briskly raised. e call should be sounded

until the colors reach the top of the spar, and then the call is ended with a sharp up

note. At the last sharp note of this call, the ship’s company on deck smartly retires their

salute. All hands should stand at attention until the halyard is secured. When the ensign

is secured, the boatswain’s mate will pipe “Carry On.” e boatswain’s mate then gives

thecommands,“Detaildismissed.Carryon,”andtheship’scompanywillresumetheir

normal duties.

Duringthisceremony,theship’scompanynotondeckstandsatattention.Ifashore,a

member of the ship’s company will come to attention and salute if in uniform. If not in

uniform, it is proper to stand at attention and place the right hand over the heart. e

ship’s ﬂag and oﬃcer’s ﬂag are raised slightly after the ensign starts its assent. ese ﬂags

are retired slightly after the ensign starts its decent. e rule is that the ensign is ﬁrst up

and last down.

Some ships may elect to use a bugle to play “To the Colors” when raising the colors.

If this option is taken, the same procedure is used, except the boatswain’s mate will not

pipe the side. e bugle takes the place of the pipe for that portion of the ceremony.

44 Ship Operations

Sunset’s exact time should be acquired for retiring the colors. (Note: Never use the

term “Strike the colors.” is term refers to cutting down of the colors when a ship is

taken by a foreign warship.) e color guard should muster on deck and prepare to

retirethecolors.eboatswain’smateshouldpipe“Attention”followedbyAllHands.”

eboatswain’smateshouldthengivethecommands,“Attentionondeck.Hand

salute.” e boatswain’s mate should then play the boatswain’s pipe call “Pipe the Side”

and continue this call until the colors have reached an area one foot above the deck.

e boatswain’s mate should end the call with a sharp up note, and simultaneously, all

hands should smartly retire their salute. All hands stand at attention until the ensign is

properly folded and presented to the oﬃcer on deck. At that time, the boatswain’s mate

willpipetheboatswain’spipecall“CarryOn”andgivethecommands,“Detaildismissed.

Carry on.”

Note: e person doing the piping should salute, even if the salute must be rendered

with the left hand.

Toindicatemourning,displaytheagathalf-sta.Hoistittothepeakrst,then

lower it to half-staﬀ. When you are ready to take it down, raise it to the peak before

lowering it.

Saluting the Flag

Whenever you see the ﬂag hoisted or lowered, or when you pass it or are passed by it,

you should show your respect by saluting if you are in uniform or by holding your right

hand over your heart if you are in civilian clothes.

When the ﬂag passes you, come to attention and face it. Salute just before the ﬂag

reaches the point opposite you and hold the salute until the ﬂag has passed. When you

pass the ﬂag, come to salute six steps before you reach it, and hold the salute until you

are six steps past. You salute at the command of your leader when in formation.

When the ﬂag is carried, there should be a color guard on each side of it. When

carried with other ﬂags, the ﬂag should be in front of the others or to the right if the

ﬂags are arranged in a line. When indoors and in uniform but not covered, do not

salute. Stand at attention and place your hand over your heart. e color guard is always

covered and must salute.

Care of the Flag

Afteritislowered,theagisfolded.Firstfolditlengthwiseinhalves,theninquar-

ters,withtheblueeldontheoutside.Finally,whileonepersonholdsitbytheblue

ﬁeld, another makes a triangular fold in the opposite end and continues to fold it in

triangles until the ﬂag resembles a cocked hat with only the blue ﬁeld showing.

Fold lengthwise in quarters with the ﬁeld showing, then

in triangles.

e ﬂag should be cleaned when soiled, and mended when torn. When worn beyond

repair, destroy it privately by burning.

Ship Operations 45

Displaying the Flag

ere is a right way and a wrong way to display the ﬂag whether on the wall or from

a staﬀ. e ﬂag is never used as drapery (use red, white, and blue bunting instead), noth-

ing is ever placed on it, and it never touches the ground, the ﬂoor, or water beneath it.

Placement with another ﬂag

From a staff

that projects

Placement for

hanging on a wall

Flags Underway

Small craft should ﬂy ﬂags of the proper size. e standard rule is: Ensigns should

be one inch on the hoist for each foot of waterline. Club, private, and ship ﬂags should

be half an inch on the hoist for each foot of waterline length. U.S. government vessels,

merchant ships, and yachtsmen have carefully prescribed codes.

When underway, colors must be displayed day and night. In the event the vessel is in

foreign waters and of U.S. registry, display of the U.S. ensign is required. e ensign is

always raised (smartly) before other ﬂags and lowered (slowly) last.

e U.S. yacht ensign is never displayed on Sea Scout vessels. Our national ensign

is never dipped as a salute except by government vessels in reply to a dip, however,

your ship’s ﬂag may be dipped. As soon as ﬂags are lowered, the appropriate lights are

displayed.

e only ﬂag ever ﬂown above the national ensign on the same hoist is the church

pennant, ﬂown only when divine services are in progress on board ship.

Colors

At morning or evening colors, boats passing reasonably near a ﬂag ceremony should

stop engines or lay on oars or, if under sail, let ﬂy the sheets. If the size of the boat and

other conditions are favorable, available members of the ship should stand, face the

colors, and salute.

On special occasions when a ship parades a guard or otherwise salutes an adult leader

in a boat that is passing, the same procedure as above is followed.

Salutes Between Boats

When distinctive ﬂags are not ﬂown and under ordinary circumstances, the salute

generally consists of a friendly acknowledgment rendered while the boats pass.

One boat, however, may salute another, but this pertains mostly to special occasions.

Forinstance,thecrewofaboatrowingmorethanfouroarsmaytossitsoars,orthe

person in charge may salute the boat carrying another adult leader.

e adult leader in every case returns the hand salute while continuing underway.

Standing salutes are given only when consistent with the size and stability of the boat.

Advancement and Recognition 47

ADVANCEMENT

AND RECOGNITION

Advancement can be a source of personal pride and a measure of your success in

Scouting. Advancement in rank is a measure of your nautical knowledge and your

performance as a leader. is unit of measure is called rank. is system is also used by

the United States military to award an individual with special privileges.

ShouldyouchoosetoenlistintheU.S.CoastGuardorU.S.Navy,youwillenter

as an E-3 if you have earned the Quartermaster rank. If you apply to a U.S. military

academy, you will be given special consideration if you are a Sea Scout Quartermaster or

Eagle Scout.

Scholarship opportunities are available for Sea Scouts who have earned Able or

Quartermaster rank.

Advancement

ere are many opportunities for advancement in Sea Scouts. Included are the trails

to Eagle and Quartermaster. Each of these trails is a highlight experience, but each

requires the Sea Scout to set his (or her, in the case of the Quartermaster Award) own

goals and follow through to achievement. Sea Scouts can also pursue Venturing awards.

e requirements for advancement were designed by Sea Scout youth to establish

standards of performance for all Sea Scouts. It’s up to you to measure up.

Reviewing Procedure

GiveyourrankadvancementapplicationtoyourSkipper.YourSkipperwillholda

Skipper’s conference with you during which he or she will assess whether you are ready

to advance in rank. If you and your Skipper agree that you are ready to advance, your

application will be forwarded to your ship’s bridge of review. is group includes members

from both the ship’s quarterdeck and the ship committee. If the bridge approves, the ship’s

advancement chair notiﬁes the council service center and secures the necessary badge.

Eagle Scout or Quartermaster Award applications must also be approved by the ship

committeeandthedistrictorcounciladvancementcommittee.Followingthis,anEagleor

Quartermaster application is forwarded to the National Council.

If your application is not approved, the Skipper will return it to you and explain what is

lacking.Heorshewillhelpyoumakecorrectionssoyoucanresubmityourapplicationlater.

48 Advancement and Recognition

Bridge of Honor

As soon as possible after an application has been reviewed and approved, it should be

forwarded through the proper channels. e badge is secured and then presented at an

impressive ceremony soon after it has been earned.

A bridge of honor is the ideal occasion for presenting awards. Traditionally, a bridge

of honor is held in connection with a social aﬀair. Although this is a good idea, it does

not always have to be done this way.

It is important that each Sea Scout get his or her award as soon as possible.

Sometimes there is an unavoidable delay between the date of approval and the bridge of

honor. If this is the case, the award may be presented informally at a ship meeting and

then presented again formally at your next bridge of honor.

The Eagle Scout Award

Eagle Scout is primarily a recognition for young men in Boy Scout

troops;however,ifyouhaveattainedtheFirstClassrankinaBoy

Scout troop, a male Sea Scout may continue to work toward the

EagleScoutAwardthroughage17bymeetingtherequirements

described in the Boy Scout Handbook. Leadership requirements may

be met in the ship as boatswain, boatswain’s mate, yeoman, purser, or

storekeeper. Personal conferences, conducted by the Skipper and the

board of review, for each progress award must be reviewed by the

ship committee.

The Quartermaster Award

Quartermaster rank is the highest award in Sea Scouts and is as impor-

tant as the Eagle Scout Award. It results from a young adult’s

determination to reach a goal he or she has set and achieved in spite of

diﬃculties along the way.

e award is rich in symbolism. e carrick bend represents an

ability to hold fast to our ideals. e blue ribbon stands for loyalty to

country. e compass suggests the importance of a carefully chosen

direction in life. e wheel reminds us that we are the guides of our

own future and that we must persevere with self-discipline. e Scout

badge—the emblem of a purposeful brotherhood—has challenged and strengthened

the lives of more than 40 million people. It represents Sea Scouts as an important

part of the Scouting tradition. e anchor reminds us that a truly worthy life must be

anchoredindutytoGod.

is badge of color, beauty, and symbolism, but most of all, of challenge, awaits every

Sea Scout who has the determination to achieve excellence.

After Achieving Quartermaster

To a Sea Scout who has earned the Quartermaster Award, it may appear that there

are no futher achievements to be attained. True, there is no higher rank, but this does

not mean the quartermaster has no future challenges, no work to be done. omas

J.Keane,formernationalSeaScoutdirector,statedthatthequartermaster“isonthe

thresholdofagreatadventure.eshiponwhichheisabouttoembarkisGod’s

greatestgift—life.FortiedbytheScoutingexperience,thequartermasterplotscourse,

sets sails, stands by the wheel, and whether the winds be fair or foul, looks forward to a

happy and successful voyage.”

“The Quartermaster

Award, which stands for

excellence, goes to the young

adult who attains the highest

rank in Sea Scouts. The

award is a reminder that

as a ship needs a rudder, a

compass, and a moving force

to reach its destination, so an

individual must be physically

strong, mentally awake, and

morally straight to achieve

worthwhile goals in life.”

—Commander

Thomas J. Keane

Advancement and Recognition 49

Sea Scout Advancement

ReferencematerialssuchasU.S.CoastGuardnavigationrules,InternationalSailing

FederationRules,OSHArequirements,InternationalCodeofSignals,andothers

change frequently. ey should be available in your ship’s library. ey are not reprinted

in this manual.

Apprentice

1. Ideals

a. Qualify as a member of your Sea Scout ship by taking part in the ship’s

admission ceremony.

b. RepeatfrommemoryanddiscusswithanadultleadertheSeaPromise.Discuss

theBSAMissionStatement,theBSAVisionStatement,theScoutOathand

Law and agree to carry out the provisions of your ship’s code and bylaws.

c. DemonstrateacceptablecourtesiesusedaboardaSeaScoutvessel.

d. DemonstratetheproperprocedureforboardingaSeaScoutvessel

and landship.

2. Active Membership

a. Provide evidence that you are fulﬁlling your ﬁnancial obligations to your ship,

including helping with fund-raisers.

Note: Check with your ship’s purser.

b. ObtaintheSeaScoutuniform.DescribetheSeaScoutworkanddress

uniforms. Tell how and when the uniforms are worn and explain care of

uniforms.

3. Leadership

a. Describeyourship’sorganization,includingtheyouthandadult

leadership positions.

b. Demonstrateyourabilitytoidentifyocerandadultleaderinsignia.Explain

the chain of command in your ship.

4. Swimming

a. Jumpfeetrstintowateroveryourhead,swim75yards/metersinastrong

manner using one or more of the following strokes: sidestroke, breaststroke,

trudgen,orcrawl;thenswim25yards/metersusingtheelementaryback-

stroke.e100yards/metersmustbeswumcontinuouslyandincludeat

least one sharp turn. After completing the swim, rest by ﬂoating on your back,

remainingasmotionlessaspossible.(RefertotheBSA’sSwimmingmerit

badge instruction if you need to improve your swimming strokes.)

b. DiscusstheBSASafeSwimDefenseplanandexplainhowitisusedto

protect Sea Scouts and other groups during swimming activities.

5. Safety

a. Explain the uses, advantages, and disadvantages of the ﬁve types of Coast

Guard–approvedlifejackets.Demonstratetheproperuseandcareoflife

jackets used by your ship.

b. Identify visual day and night marine distress signals, and know their location

and the proper use for your ship’s vessel(s).

c. UsetheDistressCommunicationsFormtodemonstratetheprocedureto

sendthefollowingVHFemergencymessages:Mayday,PanPan,andSecurity.

50 Advancement and Recognition

d. Knowthesafetyrulesthatapplytovesselsandequipmentusedbyyourship,

and safety standards in the use of power tools, machinery, lifting heavy objects,

and other safety devices used by your ship.

6. Marlinspike Seamanship

Using both large and small lines, tie and explain the use of the following knots:

overhand, square, ﬁgure eight, bowline, two half hitches, clove hitch, sheet bend,

and cleat hitch.

7. Boat Handling

Demonstratetheabilitytouseaheavingline.

8. Service

Log at least 16 hours of work on ship equipment, projects, or activities other than

regular ship meetings, parties, dances, or fun events.

Note: Arrange for this work through the ship’s oﬃcers.

Ordinary

1. Ideals

a. Explain the symbolism of the Sea Scout emblem.

b. GiveabrieforalhistoryoftheU.S.ag.

c. Demonstratehowtoy,hoist,lower,fold,displayandsalutetheU.S.ag.

Explain ﬂag etiquette and protocols for both land and sea.

2. Active Membership

a. Attendatleast75percentofyourship’smeetingsandactivitiesforsixmonths.

Note: Check with your ship’s yeoman.

b. Dooneofthefollowing.Recruitanewmemberforyourshipandfollow

through until the new member is registered and formally admitted with an

admissions ceremony, or assist in planning and carrying out a ship recruiting

activity, such as an open house or joint activity with a youth group or organi-

zation (another Sea Scout ship will not count).

3. Leadership

a. Complete quarterdeck training, either as an oﬃcer or as a prospective oﬃcer.

b. Serve as an activity chairforamajorshipevent.Responsibilitiesshould

include planning, directing, and evaluating the event.

4. Swimming

Pass all requirements for the BSA’s Swimming merit badge.

5. Safety

a. DiscussBSASafetyAoatwithanadultleader.

b. Describethesafetyequipmentrequiredbylawforyourship’sprimaryvessel.

c. Developaship’sstationbillforyourshipandreviewitwithanadultleader.

d. Plan and practice the following drills: man overboard, ﬁre, and abandon ship.

e. Describethreetypesofequipmentusedinmarinecommunications.

f. Demonstrateyourknowledgeofcorrectmaritimecommunicationsprocedures

by making at least three calls to another vessel, marinas, bridges, or locks.

g. Galley

i) Before an activity, submit a menu that uses cooked and uncooked dishes,

a list of provisions, and estimated costs for a day’s meal (breakfast, lunch,

and dinner). Once the provision list is approved, help obtain the items on

the list.

Advancement and Recognition 51

ii) Explain the use of charcoal, pressurized alcohol, and propane. Include

safety precautions for each.

iii) Preparebreakfast,lunch,anddinnerwhileontheactivity.Demonstrate

your ability to properly use the galley equipment or personal cooking gear

generally used by your ship.

iv) Demonstrateappropriatesanitationtechniquesforfoodpreparationand

meal cleanup.

6. Marlinspike Seamanship

a. Name the various materials used to manufacture rope, the advantages and

disadvantages of each, and the characteristics of laid and braided rope.

Discussthemeaningoflay,thread,strand,andhawser.Explainhowropeis

sized and measured.

b. Using both large and small lines, tie and explain the use of the following knots:

stevedore’sknot,French(double)bowline,bowlineonabight,timberhitch,

rolling hitch, marline hitch, and midshipman’s (taut-line) hitch.

c. Demonstrateyourabilitytosecurealinetopilings,bitts,cleats,andrings,and

to coil, ﬂake, and ﬂemish a line.

d. Demonstratehowtocutandheat-sealasyntheticlineandwhiptheendof

plain-laid line using waxed cord or similar material.

7. Boat Handling

a. Name the principal parts of a typical sailboat and a runabout.

b. Name the principal parts of the masts, booms, spars, standing and running

rigging,andsailsofaga-orMarconi-riggedsloop,schooner,andketchoryawl.

c. Describetheidentifyingcharacteristicsofasloop,ketch,yawl,cutter,andschooner.

d. Demonstrateyourabilitytohandlearowboatbydoingthefollowing:rowin

a straight line for a quarter mile, stop, make a pivot turn, return to the starting

pointandbackwaterinastraightlinefor50yards/meters.Makeaturnand

return to the starting point.

8. Anchoring

a. Name the parts of a stock anchor and a stockless anchor.

b. Describevetypesofanchors.Describehoweachtypeholdsthebottom,the

kind of bottom in which it holds best, and the advantages or disadvantages of

each type.

c. Calculate the amount of anchor rode necessary for your ship’s primary vessel

in the following depths: 10, 20, and 30 feet in normal and storm conditions.

d. Demonstratetheabilitytosetandweighanchor.

9. Navigation Rules

a. Explain the purpose of Navigation Rules, International and Inland.

b. Knowthegeneral“RuleofResponsibility.”

c. Denestand-onandgive-wayvesselsforthefollowingsituations:meeting,

crossing, and overtaking for both power and sailing vessels.

d. Explain“ResponsibilityBetweenVessels”(vesselpriority).

e. Explain the navigation lights required for power-driven and sailing vessels

underway. Explain what is required for a vessel under oars.

f. Describethesoundsignalsformaneuvering,warning,andrestrictedvisibility.

10. Piloting and Navigation

a. Demonstrateyourunderstandingoflatitudeandlongitude.UsingaMercator

chart, demonstrate that you can locate your position from given coordinates

and determine the coordinates of at least ﬁve aids to navigation.

52 Advancement and Recognition

b. Explain the degree system of compass direction. Explain variation and devia-

tion and how they are used to convert between true headings and bearings to

compass headings and bearings.

c. Describethreekindsofdevicesusedaboardshipformeasuringspeedand/or

distance traveled and, if possible, demonstrate their use.

d. UnderstandUniversalCoordinatedTime(GreenwichMeanTimeorZulu

Time)andzonetime.Demonstrateyourabilitytoconvertfromonetothe

other for your local area.

e. Explain the 24-hour time system and demonstrate that you can convert

between 12- and 24-hour time.

f. Makeadeadreckoningtableofcompassanddistances(minimumthreelegs)

between two points, plot these on a chart, and determine the ﬁnal position.

Note: Ideally this requirement should be met while underway. If this is not

possible, it may be simulated using charts.

11. Practical Deck Seamanship

a. Name the seven watches and explain bell time.

b. Explain the duties of a lookout and demonstrate how to report objects in view

and wind directions with respect to the vessel.

c. Name relative bearings expressed in degrees.

d. While underway, serve as a lookout for one watch.

e. DemonstratetheuseofwheelorhelmcommandsfoundintheSea Scout Manual.

f. Supervise and contribute to the cruise log for three days of cruising (one cruise

or a combination of day cruises). Submit the cruise logs to your Skipper.

12. Environment

DiscusswithanadultleadertheFederalWaterPollutionControlActasrelatedto

oildischarges.Explainwhata“DischargeofOilProhibited”placardisandndit

aboard your ship’s vessels.

13. Cruising

a. Plan and participate in an overnight cruise in an approved craft under leader-

ship that lasts a minimum of 36 hours.

b. While on the cruise, perform the duties of a helmsman for at least 30 minutes.

14. Boating Safety Course

Successfully complete a boating safety course approved by the National Association

of State Boating Law Administrators (NASBLA) oﬀered by one of the following

agencies: a state boating agency, the United States Power Squadrons, the United

StatesCoastGuardAuxiliary,orotherprivateormilitaryeducationcourses.

15. Service

As an Apprentice, log at least 16 hours of work on ship equipment, projects, or

activities other than regular ship meetings, parties, dances, or fun events.

Note: Arrange for this work through the ship’s oﬃcers.

16. Electives—Do any three of the following:

a. Drill:Demonstrateyourabilitytoexecutecommandsinclose-orderdrill.

b. Yacht Racing: Describetheproceduresusedinyachtracingandthesignals

used by the race committee to start a race. Serve as a crew member in a race

sailedundercurrentInternationalSailingFederationRules.

c. Sailing: In a cat-rigged or similar small vessel, demonstrate your ability to sail

single-handedly a triangular course (leeward, windward, and reaching marks).

Demonstratebeating,reaching,andrunning.Aqualiedsailinginstructor

should observe this requirement.

Advancement and Recognition 53

d. Ornamental Ropework:Makeathree-strandTurk’sheadandathree-strand

monkey’s ﬁst. Using either ornamental knot, make up a heaving line.

e. Engines: Perform routine maintenance on your ship’s propulsion system,

including ﬁlter, spark plug, oil changes, proper fueling procedures and other

routinemaintenancetasks.Refertooperationsmanualsoryourship’sadult

leaders for correct procedures and guidance.

f. USPS: Join a local Power Squadron as an Apprentice member.

g. Boatswain Call:Demonstrateyourabilitytouseaboatswain’spipeby

making the following calls—word to be passed, boat call, veer, all hands, pipe

down, and piping the side.

h. U.S. Coast Guard Auxiliary:SuccessfullycompleteeithertheCoastGuard

Auxiliary Boating Skills and Seamanship or Sailing Skills and Seamanship

course. All core sessions, as well as at least three elective sessions, must be

completed to fulﬁll this requirement.

Able

1. Ideals

a. Organize and conduct two impressive opening and closing ceremonies for

your ship.

b. Submit an essay of 500 to 1,000 words on how our nation’s maritime history

has contributed to our way of life.

2. Active Membership

a. Attendatleast75percentofyourship’smeetingsandspecialactivitiesforone

year. Note: Check with your ship’s yeoman.

b. Prepare and present a program on Sea Scouts for a Boy Scout troop,

Venturing crew, Venturing Oﬃcers’ Association meeting, school class, or other

youth group. Your presentation should last a minimum of 15 minutes and

describe the activities of your ship and Sea Scouts.

3. Leadership

Either serve and fulﬁll the responsibilities of a crew leader or an elected oﬃcer of

your ship, or serve as an activity chairfortwomajorshipevents.Responsibilities

should include planning, directing, and evaluating the event. (ese events are in

addition to the Ordinary requirement.)

4. Swimming

Pass all requirements for the BSA’s Lifesaving merit badge.

5. Safety

a. Developanduseacustomizedvesselsafetychecklistforaboatusedbyyourship.

b. Demonstrateyourunderstandingofrepreventiononvessels.

c. Knowtheclassesofresandthesubstancesthatwillextinguisheachtypeofre.

d. In a safe place, under adult supervision, demonstrate your ability to success-

fully extinguish a class A and a class B ﬁre with an approved ﬁre extinguisher.

See that the ﬁre extinguisher used is properly recharged or replaced.

e. Conduct a ﬁre safety inspection of the vessel normally used by your ship or of

your ship’s meeting place. Note any ﬁre hazards and report them to your ship’s

adult leaders.

f. CompletetheAmericanRedCrossStandardFirstAidcourse.

g. ObtainCPRcerticationfromacertiedagency.

h. DemonstratetheHeimlichmaneuverandtellwhenitisused.

54 Advancement and Recognition

6. Marlinspike Seamanship

a. Complete a back splice, eye splice, short splice, long splice, and a palm-and-

needle whipping.

b. Sew a ﬂat seam, round seam, and grommet eye in canvas or sail material.

Describehoweachisusedinconstructionofandthecareofsails.

c. Describethepartsofablockandexplainhowblocksaresized.Describethe

following types of tackle: luﬀ, gun, double purchase, single whip, and runner.

With the help of another shipmate, reeve a double purchase tackle.

7. Boat Handling

a. Demonstrateyourabilitytoproperlyoperateasmallboatequippedwitha

motor. Included should be fueling, starting, leaving a dock, maneuvering, and

coming alongside.

b. Knowthenamesandfunctionsoflinesusedtosecureavesseltoawharfor

pier. Understand and execute docking commands used in handling lines on

your ship’s primary vessel.

8. Anchoring

a. Describethevariouskindsofanchorrodeandtheadvantagesanddisadvantages

of each type.

b. Identify the parts of the anchor cable starting with the anchor and ending at

the vessel.

c. Describethemethodsofmarkingchainanddemonstratethatyouknowthe

chain markings on your ship’s vessel.

d. While on a cruise assist in the construction of an anchor watch schedule and

stand one watch.

e. Identify a capstan or windlass and explain its use in handling line, wire rope,

or chain.

9. Navigation Rules

a. DemonstrateaworkingknowledgeofNavigation Rules, International

and Inland.

b. Explain vessel lights for the following: towing (astern, alongside, pushing

ahead, and cannot deviate), ﬁshing, trawling, restricted maneuverability,

underwater operations, constrained by draft, and aground.

c. Describespeciallightsanddayshapesdeployedonthefollowingvessels:

not under command, restricted by ability to maneuver, constrained by draft,

ﬁshing (trawling), and sailing vessels under power.

d. Understand the system of aids to navigation employed in your area. Include

buoys, lights, and daymarks, and their signiﬁcance and corresponding

chart symbols.

e. ReadindetailaNationalOceanService(NOS)chart,preferablyforthearea

normally cruised by your ship, identifying all marks on it.

f. Explain the use of tide tables, current tables, light lists, and how to update a

chartusingtheNoticetoMariners.

10. Piloting and Navigation

a. Describethedecklogkeptaboardyourship’sprincipalcraft.Keepacomplete

log for three cruises.

b. Lay a course of at least three legs and execute it using dead reckoning.

c. Demonstrateyourabilitytoxyourpositionbythefollowingmethods:taking

bearings from two known objects, running ﬁx, and estimated position.

d. Establish distance from a known object using “double the angle on the bow”

and explain how to set a danger angle.

Advancement and Recognition 55

e. DiscusshowGPS(GlobalPositioningSystem)operatesandthepurposeof

waypoints.Whileunderway,demonstrateyourabilitytouseaGPSusing

three diﬀerent waypoints.

f. Discussthemethodofestablishingaradarx.

11. Practical Deck Seamanship

a. Demonstrateyourknowledgeofpersonalsafetyequipmentneededwhile

cleaning, maintaining, or repairing your vessel.

b. Knowthenames,uses,sizes,andpropercareofthecommonhandtoolsused

by your ship.

c. Identify and explain the use of the following: thimble, shackle, turnbuckle,

pelican hook, and other ship’s hardware and ﬁttings commonly used aboard

yourship’svessels.Describehoweachissized.

d. Demonstratepropersurfaceandcoatingpreparation,coatingtechniques,care

of stored coatings, and cleaning of brushes and tools used to maintain surfaces

on your ship’s vessel.

e. Explain techniques used for the maintenance, protection, and repair of hulls

and decks on your ship’s vessel.

12. Environment

a. Demonstrateyourknowledgeoflocalenvironmentallawsrelatedtothe

proper storage, disposal, and cleanup of maritime coating materials, fuels, and

other environmentally sensitive materials.

b. Discusswithanadultleaderthedumpingofgarbageinthemarineenviron-

ment.ReviewthecontentsoftheMARPOLplacardandlocateitaboardyour

ship’s vessels.

c. Write a 500-word report on a marine endangered species (mammal, bird, ﬁsh,

or reptile). e report should include a description of the species, its habitat,

history, current population numbers, and current steps being employed to help

its recovery.

13. Cruising

Earn the Long Cruise badge.

14. Electives—Do any three of the following.

a. Sailing: While leading a crew of not less than two other persons, demonstrate

your ability to sail a sloop or another suitable vessel correctly and safely over

a triangular course (leeward, windward, reaching marks), demonstrating

beating, reaching, running, and the proper commands.

b. Vessels: Teach and lead a crew under oar using a boat pulling at least four oars

single- or double-banked. Perform the following maneuvers: get underway,

maneuver ahead and back, turn the boat in its own length, dock, and secure.

c. Drill:Demonstrateyourabilitytogiveandexecutecommandsinclose-orderdrill.

d. Engines:

i) Understand the safe and proper procedures for the use of gasoline and

diesel inboard engines, including fueling, pre-start checks, ventilation,

starting, running, periodic checks while running, securing, postoperative

checks, and keeping an engine log.

ii) Using the type of engine aboard the vessel you most frequently use,

demonstrate your understanding of basic troubleshooting and the

preventive maintenance schedule recommended by the manufacturer.

56 Advancement and Recognition

e. Yacht Racing:

i) Demonstrateyourunderstandingoftheshapes,aghoists,gun,andhorn

signals used in yacht racing as well as a working knowledge of the racing

rulesoftheInternationalSailingFederation.

ii) Serve as helmsman, with one or more additional crew members, of a

sloop-rigged or other suitable boat with a spinnaker in a race sailed under

ISAFracingrules.

f. Maritime History:Knowthehighlightsofmaritimehistoryfromthe

earliest times to the present. Include the evolution of vessel construction and

propulsion, important voyages of exploration and development, the origin of

maritime traditions, and the achievements of notable maritime leaders in U.S.

sea history.

g. Ornamental Ropework:Demonstrateyourabilitytofashionthefollowing

items of ornamental ropework: four-strand Turk’s head, coach whipping,

cockscombing,roundbraid,atsennitbraid,wallknot,andcrownknot.Make

a useful item such as a boatswain’s lanyard, rigging knife lanyard, bell rope, etc.,

or decorate a portion of your ship’s equipment such as a stanchion, rail, lifeline,

tiller, etc.

h. Fiberglass Repair and Maintenance:Demonstrateyourprociencyand

knowledge of ﬁberglass repair and gel coating while working on your ship’s

vessel or other similar vessel.

i. Specialty Proﬁciency: Become a certiﬁed scuba diver or become proﬁcient in

boardsailing,surng,kayaking,orwhitewaterrafting/canoeing.

j. USPS: As an apprentice member of the United States Power Squadrons

complete the Seamanship and Piloting courses.

k. U.S. Coast Guard Auxiliary: SuccessfullycompletetheCoastGuard

Auxiliary Weekend Navigator course.

Quartermaster

1. Ideals

a. Initiate a discussion on the ideals stated in the Sea Promise.

b. Prepare a written analysis, oﬀering recommendations for improvements

regarding one of the following ship’s programs: bylaws and code, training pro-

grams, ceremonies, quarterdeck meetings, recruiting programs, or fund-raising.

2. Active Membership

a. Attendatleast75percentofyourship’smeetingsandspecialactivitiesfor18

months. Note: Check with your ship’s yeoman.

b. Present a talk or program at least 15 minutes long on Sea Scouts to a service

club, religious organization, PTA, or other adult organization.

3. Leadership

a. Quartermaster Project: While an Able Sea Scout, plan, develop, and dem-

onstrate leadership to others in a service project that is helpful to any religious

institution, school, or your community. e project plan must be approved

by your Skipper and ship committee and approved by the council or district

advancement committee before you start. is service project should involve

your ship and at least one other group.

b. Oﬃcer: Either serve as an elected oﬃcer for at least six months or serve as an

activity chair for three major events (ese events are in addition to the Able

requirement.)

Advancement and Recognition 57

c. Quartermaster Cruise: Take command of a vessel with a crew of not less

than four Sea Scouts for at least 40 consecutive hours, including two nights.

Youmustdelegateandsuperviseallduties.Duringthecruisecompletethe

following: Inspect the vessel for required equipment; supervise all menu prepa-

ration; prepare the boat to get underway with a proper checklist approved

by the adult leaders; anchor, dock, and maintain course by commands to the

helmsman; remain underway for an extended period during darkness; and

discuss appropriate nighttime running procedures. While underway, perform

the following drills: man overboard, damage control, abandon ship, ﬁre, colli-

sion,andanyotherdrillsusedbyyourship.Duringthiscruisenosubstantial

errors may be committed.

Successfully complete SEAL (Sea Scout Advanced Leadership) training.

4. Swimming

EithercompletetherequirementsforBSALifeguardorcompleteaRedCross

lifesaving course or other certiﬁed lifesaving course.

5. Safety

a. Knowtheheavy-weatherprecautionstakenaboardbothpowerandsailing

vessels when dangerous weather approaches, and demonstrate these precau-

tions aboard the vessel used by your ship.

b. Knowthespecialprecautionsthatshouldbetakenwhenlimitedvisibilityis

encountered.

c. DrawtheInternationalCodeagsandpennantsfrommemoryandgivethe

single-lettermeanings(Alpha=Havediverdown,keepclear)oftheags.

Show how to use the book International Code of Signals.

6. Marlinspike Seamanship

a. Teach the Apprentice, Ordinary, and Able marlinspike seamanship require-

ments to a crew.

b. Makeaneyespliceindouble-braidedline.

7. Boat Handling

a. Take charge of the craft used by your ship and give all commands to the crew

for picking up a mooring buoy and properly mooring the vessel in several wind

and current situations.

b. Demonstrateandteachtheprinciplesofspringingintoandoutfromadock,

from both bow and stern, using an engine depending on the type of vessel

used by your ship.

c. Teach Ordinary and Able boat handling requirements to a crew.

8. Anchoring

a. Teach the Ordinary and Able anchoring requirements to a crew.

b. Knowthemethodsofbringingavesseltoanchorandamooringwithspecial

emphasis on wind and current with respect to the vessel’s course and speed.

c. Take charge of a vessel used by your ship and give all commands to the crew

for setting and weighing anchor in several wind and current situations.

9. Navigation Rules

Teach the Ordinary navigation rules requirements to a crew.

10. Piloting and Navigation

a. Teach the Ordinary and Able piloting requirements to a crew.

b. Knowthemethodsofxingaboat’spositioninlimitedvisibility.

58 Advancement and Recognition

11. Weather

a. Readandunderstandalocalweatherbulletin.Knowhowtoobtaincurrent

marine and weather reports from the National Weather Service in your area

by telephone, radio, or online.

b. Demonstrateyourabilitytoreadabarometer,thermometer,anemometer,

psychrometer, and weather vane. Be familiar with the Beaufort Wind

ForceScale.

c. Demonstrateyourknowledgeoftheweathersignsforyourlocalarea,includ-

ingcloudtypes.Preparea48-hourforecastandcompareyourforecastwith

the actual weather that occurred.

12. Environment

a. Discussthethreetypesofmarinesanitationdevicesandthelawsgoverning

sewage discharge.

b. Explain what gray water is and how it should be handled in your boating area.

c. Explain what aquatic nuisance species are and how you can help stop their spread.

d. Write a 500-word report on an aquatic environment (freshwater, coastal, estuary,

or sanctuary). Include in the report the location, habitat, history, animals and

plants that inhabit the area, its importance to man, current regulations, and what

boaters can do to help preserve it for future generations.

13. Electives—Do any four of the following.

a. Sailing: Knowtheprinciplesofhandlingaschooner,ketch,yawl,orother

suitable sailing vessel. Under competent direction, take charge of a crew and

demonstrate your ability to handle a suitable sailing vessel in all points of sail.

b. Engines:

i) Explain the principal features of steam turbine, turboelectric, direct reversing

diesel, diesel-electric, gas turbine, nuclear, gasoline, and diesel engines and the

relative advantages of each type.

ii) Explain the operation of spark ignition and compression ignition for

internal combustion engines used aboard small vessels.

iii) Demonstrateyourfamiliaritywiththeengineaboardthevesselusedby

your ship, including its principles of operation, fuel, lubrication, cooling

and electrical systems, and their component parts.

iv) Demonstrateyourabilitytolocateandcorrectminorenginetroubles

according to the engine manufacturer’s troubleshooting guide.

c. Vessel Maintenance: Take charge of reconditioning or overhauling at least

one of your ship’s vessels, or take charge of hauling out the principal vessel

used by your ship. In either case, lay out a plan of the work to be done in

advance, including an estimate of the materials, tools, cost, and time involved.

d. Electricity:

i) Knowanddemonstratethecorrectmethodofrescuingapersonin

contact with a live wire.

ii) Understandtheconstructionofsimplebatterycells.Demonstratethe

proper care of storage batteries.

iii) Explain the diﬀerence between direct current and alternating current and

the best uses for each.

iv) Demonstratethatyouknowhowtoreplacefuses,resetcircuitbreakers,

and properly splice shipboard electric cable.

v) Submit a diagram of the electrical system aboard the vessel used by

your ship.

Advancement and Recognition 59

vi) Explain wire tables, the current-carrying capacity of circuits, and the

hazards and prevention of electrical overloading.

vii) Explain electrolysis as applied to the deterioration of a boat’s underwater

ﬁttings by galvanic action and its prevention.

e. Navigation:

i) Explain how the sextant works. Show how to use it and demonstrate

measuring horizontal angles and altitudes.

ii) FindlatitudebythealtitudeofPolarisorbythesun’saltitudeatlocal

apparentnoon.Demonstratehowlongitudeisdetermined.

iii) Demonstratendingerrorintheboat’scompassbythesun’sazimuth.

f. Drill:Demonstrateyourabilitytohandletheship’scompanyinclose-order

drill.Doallrequiredmaneuvers.

g. Piloting: Under competent direction, assume the duties of navigator of your

ship’s vessel. Plot its projected course between two ports at least two hours

apart and cruise that course mooring to mooring handling all piloting duties.

e cruise should be made in daylight hours with good visibility.

h. Yacht Racing Crew: TakechargeofacrewinaraceusingcurrentISAF

racing rules.

i. Rigging: Demonstrateyourabilitytospliceandhandlewirerope,attachwire

rope ﬁttings, and complete a safety and tuning inspection of a ship vessel.

j. USPS: As an apprentice member of the United States Power Squadrons

complete the Advanced Piloting course.

k. U.S. Coast Guard Auxiliary: JoinalocalCoastGuardAuxiliaryotillaasa

Basic Qualiﬁed member and qualify for any Operational Auxiliary Program

(AUXOP)orTridentMarineSafetyspecialtyrating.

60 Advancement and Recognition

Sea Scout __________________________________

of Ship No. ________________________ is in good

standing and is recommended for the rank of

ABLE.

Signed _____________________________________

Crew leader

Signed _____________________________________

Skipper

Approved by ship’s petty ofﬁcers at a quarter-

deck meeting for certiﬁcate and badge.

Signed _____________________________________

Boatswain

Date _______________________________________

ABLE

SEA SCOUT

SCOREBOARD

Name _____________________________________

Ship _______________________________________

District ____________________________________

Council ___________________________________

BOY SCOUTS OF AMERICA

Sea Scout __________________________________

of Ship No. ________________________ is in good

standing and is recommended for the rank of

APPRENTICE.

Signed _____________________________________

Crew leader

Signed _____________________________________

Skipper

Approved by ship’s petty ofﬁcers at a quarter-

deck meeting for certiﬁcate and badge.

Signed _____________________________________

Boatswain

Date _______________________________________

APPRENTICE

SEA SCOUT

SCOREBOARD

Name _____________________________________

Ship _______________________________________

District ____________________________________

Council ___________________________________

BOY SCOUTS OF AMERICA

Sea Scout __________________________________

of Ship No. ________________________ is in good

standing and is recommended for the rank of

QUARTERMASTER.

Signed _____________________________________

Crew leader

Signed _____________________________________

Skipper

Approved by ship’s petty ofﬁcers at a quarter-

deck meeting for certiﬁcate and badge.

Signed _____________________________________

Boatswain

Date _______________________________________

QUARTERMASTER

SEA SCOUT

SCOREBOARD

Name _____________________________________

Ship _______________________________________

District ____________________________________

Council ___________________________________

BOY SCOUTS OF AMERICA

Sea Scout __________________________________

of Ship No. ________________________ is in good

standing and is recommended for the rank of

ORDINARY.

Signed _____________________________________

Crew leader

Signed _____________________________________

Skipper

Approved by ship’s petty ofﬁcers at a quarter-

deck meeting for certiﬁcate and badge.

Signed _____________________________________

Boatswain

Date _______________________________________

ORDINARY

SEA SCOUT

SCOREBOARD

Name _____________________________________

Ship _______________________________________

District ____________________________________

Council ___________________________________

BOY SCOUTS OF AMERICA

Advancement and Recognition 61

APPRENTICE SCOREBOARD

Initial Date

1. Ideals _____ _____

2. ActiveMembership _____ _____

3. Leadership _____ _____

4. Swimming _____ _____

5. Safety _____ _____

6. MarlinspikeSeamanship _____ _____

7. BoatHandling _____ _____

8. Service _____ _____

ORDINARY SCOREBOARD

Initial Date

1. Ideals _____ _____

2. ActiveMembership _____ _____

3. Leadership _____ _____

4. Swimming _____ _____

5. Safety _____ _____

6. MarlinspikeSeamanship _____ _____

7. BoatHandling _____ _____

8. Anchoring _____ _____

9. NavigationRules _____ _____

10. Piloting and Navigation _____ _____

11. PracticalDeckSeamanship _____ _____

12. Environment _____ _____

13. Cruising _____ _____

14. Boating Safety Course _____ _____

15. Service _____ _____

16. Electives: ree are required. (Put initials and date.)

___/___Drill,___/___YachtRacing,___/___

Sailing,___/___OrnamentalRopework,___/___

Engines,___/___USPS,___/___BoatswainCall

ABLE SCOREBOARD

Initial Date

1. Ideals _____ _____

2. ActiveMembership _____ _____

3. Leadership _____ _____

4. Swimming _____ _____

5. Safety _____ _____

6. MarlinspikeSeamanship _____ _____

7. BoatHandling _____ _____

8. Anchoring _____ _____

9. NavigationRules _____ _____

10. Piloting and Navigation _____ _____

11. PracticalDeckSeamanship _____ _____

12. Environment _____ _____

13. Cruising _____ _____

14. Electives: ree are required. (Put initials and date.)

___/___Sailing,___/___Vessels,___/___Drill,

___/___Engines,___/___YachtRacing,

___/___MaritimeHistory,___/___Ornamental

Ropework,___/___FiberglassRepairandMaintenance,

___/___SpecialtyProciency,___/___USPS

QUARTERMASTER SCOREBOARD

Initial Date

1. Ideals _____ _____

2. ActiveMembership _____ _____

3. Leadership _____ _____

4. Swimming _____ _____

5. Safety _____ _____

6. MarlinspikeSeamanship _____ _____

7. BoatHandling _____ _____

8. Anchoring _____ _____

9. NavigationRules _____ _____

10. Piloting and Navigation _____ _____

11. Weather _____ _____

12. Environment _____ _____

13. Electives:Fourarerequired.(Put initials and date.)

___/___Sailing,___/___Engines,___/___Vessel

Maintenance,___/___Electricity,___/___Navigation,

___/___Drill,___/___Piloting,___/___Yacht

RacingCrew,___/___Rigging,___/___USPS

62 Advancement and Recognition

Other Recognition

SEAL Training

Sea Scout Advanced Leadership training, as the name implies, is a training course

designed to develop leadership skills in young adults. Seamanship is the foundation on

which this course is taught. Nautical skills are the means, not the end. is course uses

an at-sea experience where Sea Scouts are taught and immediately apply leadership

skills.Fewothermediaoertheopportunitytoyoungpeopletoactuallyputgroup

dynamic leadership skills into practice. ere is no playacting. All situations and tasks

are real, and bad decisions or team failure can produce real problems.

It is not possible to teach this course if students do not arrive with some nautical

skills; therefore, before taking the course, students must have attained the rank of

Ordinary, must possess a thorough knowledge of the contents of the seamanship and

boating safety section of the Sea Scout Manual,andmustnothavereachedtheir18th

birthday by the date of the course. Upon successful completion of this course, partici-

pants are authorized to wear the double dolphin SEAL insignia.

Several SEAL training courses are held each year in a variety of venues across the

UnitedStates.Applicationsmustbemailedto:NationalDirectorofSeaScouts,Boy

ScoutsofAmerica,1325WestWalnutHillLane,P.O.Box152079,Irving,TX75015-

2079nolaterthanMarch1eachyeartobeconsideredforsummertraining.

Sea Scout Safe Boating and Advanced Seamanship Training

eSmallBoatHandlerCourseandQualiedSeamanCoursearedesignedforSea

Scout ships whose members are not interested in following the advancement plan lead-

ing to Quartermaster, or they can serve as a training outline for traditional ships. e

entire membership of a ship can work as a group in the course led by the ship’s adult

ocersand/orqualiedinstructors.

Detailssupportingthecourseoutlinesarefoundinthetechnicalsectionsofthis

manual along with references to other publications listed in the bibliography.

Advancement and Recognition 63

The Small Boat Handler Course

Section One—Aids to Navigation and Rules

of the Road

1. Introduction to aids to navigation

2. Buoyage system

3. Chart symbols and letter designations

4. Primary shapes for buoys

5. Obstruction, mid-channel, and special types of buoys

6. Beacons and daybeacons

7. Ranges,rangemarkers

8. Intracoastalwaterways,lakes,andrivers

9. Classproject—Developbuoyrecognitiongameusingashcards

10. Reasonsforrulesoftheroad

11. e danger zone

12. Windward and leeward clearances

13. Stand-on and give-way vessels

14. Sailboat right of way

15. Sailboat rules

16. Lights required on boats

17. Emergencylights

18. Soundsignals

19. Safety equipment

20. Visual signaling devices

Section Two—Boating Safety

1. Boating safety and ﬁrst aid

2. Checking the hull

3. Motorsizecomparedwiththeboat

4. Fueling—dangers,precautions,andprocedures

5. Loading a small boat

6. When not to go out

7. Operating

8. Distresssignals

9. Equipment

10. Equipment—anchors, line, signaling, ﬁrst aid kit

11. Project—Haveclassdevelopachecklist.

12. Seamanship—Reviewseaterms(seeglossary).

13. Knots—Haveclasslearntotieoverhand,square,sheetbend,bowline,clove

hitch, two half hitches, and belaying to a cleat.

14. Classproject—Preparetocruise.Haveclassdemonstrateonanactualboat

the checklist, and procedures covered in items 1–12.

15. Types and uses of anchors

16. Wind and current

17. Conclusion—PresentSmallBoatHandler’sBar,No.04052,tothosesuccess-

fully completing the course.

Note:MostoftherequirementsforearningtheSmallBoatHandler’sBararemetby

each state’s National Association of State Boating Law Administrators boating safety

course. State agencies provide group instruction, as well as online instruction and

testing. NASBLA-approved boating safety courses are also taught by the U.S. Power

SquadronsandtheU.S.CoastGuardAuxiliary.

64 Advancement and Recognition

The Qualiﬁed Seamanship Course

Section One—Aids to Navigation

1. Aids to navigation

2. e buoyage system

3. Use of various buoys

4. Storm warnings—publications and charts

5. Other storm warnings

6. Daymarksonvessels

7. Dredges,mooredvessels,andtowing

8. Daymarks,beacons,minorlights,andranges

9. Intracoastal waterway markings, buoys, and aids

10. Lightships and lighthouses

11. Radiobeacons

12. Governmentpublications—tidetables,NoticetoMariners,etc.

Section Two—Rules of the Road

1. Purpose of rules of the road

2. Dangerzone,rightofway

3. Sound signals

4. Lights

5. Orders to the helmsman

Section ree—Seamanship

1. Lookout

2. Bearings, reporting

3. Taking soundings

4. Marlinspikeseamanship

5. Types and use of anchors

Section Four—Safety

1. Necessary equipment

2. Hazards

3. Hullinspection

4. Fireghting

5. Proper fueling

6. Life jackets

7. Charts

8. Weather

9. Manoverboarddrill—classproject

10. Grounding

11. Firstaid

Section Five—Piloting

1. e compass—description and use

2. Compass boxing contest

3. Operating by visual aids

4. Working a course

Section Six—Charts

1. Denitionofcharts

2. Orientation and dividers

3. Chart symbols

4. Speed, distance, and time

Advancement and Recognition 65

Section Seven—Safe Boating

1. Operation

2. Principles of sailing

3. Powerboat operation

Section Eight—Operating a Boat

1. Demonstrateproperoperationofasailboatorapowerboat.

a. Safety checklist

b. Emergency procedure

c. Handlinglines

d. Correct anchoring

e. Use a chart—lay out a course

f. Operate the boat in a proper manner and make a correct landing.

2. Conclusion—Present Qualiﬁed Seaman Bar, No. 04053, to those successfully

completing the course.

Long Cruise Badge

e Long Cruise badge may be earned by both youth and

adults registered in Sea Scouts. Once the individual has com-

pleted the requirements that follow, the Skipper submits an

advancement report to the Boy Scout local council service

center where the badges can be secured. It is recommended that

all Sea Scouts and adult leaders qualifying for the Long Cruise

Badge maintain a log of their cruising experiences. is log will

beusefulforScoutadvancement,U.S.CoastGuardlicensing,

US Sailing certiﬁcation, and chartering.

A Sea Scout must be Ordinary rank before he or she can start recording cruising

time for the Long Cruise badge. e Sea Scout must cruise for two weeks on any vessel

or boat provided by the local council or the ship, or their own vessel when authorized by

an adult leader in that Sea Scout ship. Each additional long cruise earned is marked by a

red arc above the badge, until ﬁve such cruises have been completed. en a single white

arc replaces them above the badge.

In the event that it is not possible to make a two-week cruise, a series of weekend

or overnight cruises on any boat or ship may be made, provided that the total number

equals 14 days. (Note: An overnight cruise lasts two days; a weekend cruise starting on

FridayandendingonSundaywillbecountedasthreedays.)

ere are no requirements regarding distance and number of miles. e Long Cruise

badge is an achievement, not a badge of rank; therefore, an adult leader may qualify for

the badge without qualifying for Ordinary rank.

The Venturing Recognition Program

Venturing Bronze Award

e Bronze Award is the ﬁrst step toward the Venturing Silver Award.

erearevedierentVenturingBronzeawards—ArtsandHobbies,

Outdoor,ReligiousandCommunityLife,SeaScout,andSports.All

ﬁve Bronze awards contain the common elements of experience,

learning a skill, and sharing your experiences and skills with others.

EarningatleastoneBronzeAwardisrequiredfortheVenturingGold

Award. To earn the Sea Scout Bronze Award, a Sea Scout must earn

the Ordinary rank.

66 Advancement and Recognition

Venturing Gold Award

eVenturingGoldAwardrecognizessignicantaccomplishmentand

outstanding performance in a broad spectrum of activities. ese

activities relate to Venturing’s six experience areas of leadership, citizen-

ship,social,outdoor,service,andtness.VenturingGoldAward

candidates must be active and registered for at least 12 months before

ﬁnal qualiﬁcation; serve in a leadership role within the 12 months before

ﬁnal qualiﬁcation; participate in a district, council, or national event or

activity; and they must also earn one Venturing Bronze Award.

Candidates must set and accomplish one personal goal related to each of

the six experience areas. ey must plan and lead at least two ship

activities built around the six experience areas. ey must recite the Sea

Promise. ree letters of recommendation from adults outside the ship are required,

andthecandidatemustpassashipbridgeofreview.Finally,theymustbeapprovedby

their ship committee. e award is a gold medal featuring the Venturing logo inside a

compass dial. e medal is suspended from a white ribbon worn above the left pocket.

Venturing Silver Award

e purpose of the Venturing Silver Award is to provide a pathway for

personal development; encourage learning, growth, and service; and

recognize a high level of achievement. Candidates must be proﬁcient in

emergencypreparedness(includingstandardrstaid,CPR,andSafe

SwimDefense);participateinEthicsinAction;completetheVenturing

LeadershipSkillsCourse;andearntheVenturingGoldAward.After

completion of all requirements, the Silver candidate will go through a

ship bridge of review. e Venturing Silver Award medal features an

eagle superimposed on a compass dial. It also has a red, white, and blue

background behind the eagle. e medal is worn suspended from a

green and white ribbon, which is suspended from a silver Venturing bar.

Aclothknot(No.05027)isalsoavailable.

Aquatics Awards

BSA Lifeguard

e BSA Lifeguard emblem is especially important in Sea Scouts.

It improves your ability to help others in all types of aquatics

activities.Completionofswimmingskills,SafeSwimDefense,

Safety Aﬂoat, ﬁrst aid, emergency action, lifesaving, rowing, and

canoeing requirements are some of the qualiﬁcations for BSA

Lifeguard. e Application for BSA Lifeguard, No. 34435, is

available from your BSA local council service center.

Boardsailing BSA

Boardsailing BSA was developed to introduce Scout- or

Venturing-age youth to basic boardsailing skills, equipment, and

safety precautions; to encourage the development of skills that

promote ﬁtness and safe aquatic recreation; and to lay a founda-

tion of skill and knowledge for those who will participate later in

moreadvancedanddemandingactivitiesonthewater.Geta

Boardsailing, BSA Award Application, No. 19-935, from your

local council service center or download it from www.scouting.org. See also Start

WindsurngRight,aUSSailingpublication.

Advancement and Recognition 67

Snorkeling, BSA

Snorkeling, BSA requirements were developed by the

NationalHealthandSafetyServicetointroduceBoyScout–,

Sea Scout–, and Venturing–age youth to the special skills,

equipment, and safety precautions associated with snorkeling,

to encourage the development of aquatic skills that promote

ﬁtness and recreation, and to lay a solid skill and knowledge

foundation for those who will later participate in more

advanced underwater activity. Secure a Snorkeling, BSA,

Application,No.19-176,fromyourcouncilservicecenterordownloadonefrom

www.scouting.org.

Mile Swim BSA

eMileSwimBSAemblemisearnedbyswimminga

continuous mile under safe conditions in the presence of a

special counselor approved by your council.

Other Awards

Historic Trails Award

ere are numerous historic sites and trails across

America.eHistoricTrailsAwardwasestablishedto

facilitate cooperation between historical societies and

the BSA. is cooperation makes many exciting trips

and treks possible for you. Information on the require-

ments for this award is found in the BSA’s Tours and

Expeditions.eHistoricTrailsAwardapplication,

which must be ﬁlled out and sent to the local council service center, is available online at

www.scouting.org.

50-Miler Award

e50-MilerAwardispresentedtoeachindividualofa

Sea Scout ship for satisfactory participation on a cruise

or wilderness trek that meets the award requirements.

Information including the rules, award requirements,

and the application can be found in the BSA’s To u r s

and Expeditions.

Religious Emblems

Religiousemblemsareprovidedbytheauthoritiesofvariousfaithstostimulatethe

spiritual growth of Sea Scouts in those faiths. e requirements and procedures for

earning any one of the emblems are available at your local council service center.

68 Advancement and Recognition

Awards for Heroism

AwardsforheroismaremadetoSeaScoutsbytheNationalCourtofHonorofthe

Boy Scouts of America. Your Skipper and the local council service center must submit

an application on a regular form within six months of the deed of heroism.

eHonorMedalandtheHeroismAwardareforsavingalifeorattemptingtosavea

life at the risk of life.

eMedalofMeritandtheCerticateofMeritareforanoutstandingactofservice

not necessarily involving the risk of life.

Hornaday Award

eWilliamT.HornadayAwardisfordistinguishedserviceto

conservation, and is named for the conservationist and ﬁrst director

oftheNewYorkStateZoologicalSociety,WilliamT.Hornaday.

Suggestions that will help you qualify for this award are found on

the application, which is available at your local council service center

or www.scouting.org.

Safety and Seamanship 69

SAFETY

Sea Scouts vow to guard against water accidents in the ﬁrst phrase of the Sea

Promise. Skill, knowledge, and judgment are the principal ingredients of safety: skill

in handling the vessel under all conditions, knowledge of equipment and its proper

use, judgment that exercises caution in speed, bad weather, or rough seas. In spite of

preparation, some dangers in and on the water cannot be avoided. Sea Scouts and their

leaders must minimize danger with planning, neutralize danger with good decisions,

and overcome danger with wise actions.

Accident Prevention: Elements of

Safe Swim Defense and Safety Afloat

e primary emphasis of each plan is prevention. Qualiﬁed supervision and disci-

pline guard against unsafe activities and ensure that each point is properly implemented.

A personal health review addresses medical complications. Ability groups, swim-

ming ability, and skill proﬁciency match activities, areas, and equipment to abilities.

Safe swimming area; equipment, including life jackets; and planning concern safe

physical arrangements.

Each plan covers preparation, including recognition and response, should an accident

occur. e buddy system, lookouts, and response personnel provide eyes and ears

alert for trouble and ensure that someone is available to provide safe and eﬀective

assistance. ey are integral parts of emergency action plans.

Safe Swim Defense

BSAgroupsshalluseSafeSwimDefenseforallswimmingactivities.Adultleaders

supervisingaswimmingactivitymusthavecompletedSafeSwimDefensetraining

withintheprevioustwoyears.SafeSwimDefensestandardsapplyatbackyard,hotel,

apartment, and public pools; at established waterfront swim areas such as beaches at

state parks and Army Corps of Engineers lakes; and at all temporary swimming areas

such as a lake, river, or ocean.

SafeSwimDefensedoesnotapplytoboatingorwateractivitiessuchaswaterskiing

orswamped-boatdrillsthatarecoveredbySafetyAoatguidelines.SafeSwimDefense

applies to non-swimming activities whenever participants enter water over knee deep

or when submersion is likely, for example, when fording a stream, seining for bait, or

constructing a bridge as a pioneering project.

Snorkeling in open water requires each participant to have demonstrated knowledge

and skills equivalent to those for Snorkeling, BSA in addition to following Safe Swim

Defense.ScubaactivitiesmustbeconductedinaccordancewiththeBSAscubapolicy

found in the Guide to Safe Scouting.

Apprentice 4b.

Discuss the BSA Safe Swim

Defense plan and explain

how it is used to protect Sea

Scouts and other groups

during swimming activities.

70 Safety and Seamanship

SafeSwimDefensetrainingmaybeobtainedfromtheBSAonlinelearningcenter

at www.scouting.org, at council summer camps, and at other council and district train-

ing events. Conﬁrmation of training is required on local and national tour permits for

trips that involve swimming. Additional information on various swimming venues is

provided in the Aquatics Supervision guide, No. 34346, available from the National

DistributionCenter.

1. Qualiﬁed Supervision

All swimming activity must be supervised by a mature and conscientious adult

age 21 or older who understands and knowingly accepts responsibility for

the well-being and safety of those in his or her care, and who is trained in and

committedtocompliancewiththeeightpointsofBSASafeSwimDefense.

It is strongly recommended that all units have at least one adult or older

youthmembercurrentlytrainedinBSASwimming&WaterRescueorBSA

Lifeguard to assist in the planning and conduct of all swimming activities.

2. Personal Health Review

A complete health history is required of all participants as evidence of ﬁtness

forswimmingactivities.Formsforminorsmustbesignedbyaparentorlegal

guardian. Participants should be asked to relate any recent incidents of illness or

injury just prior to the activity. Supervision and protection should be adjusted

to anticipate any potential risks associated with individual health conditions.

Forsignicanthealthconditions,theadultsupervisorshouldrequireanexami-

nation by a physician and consult with the parent, guardian, or caregiver for

appropriate precautions.

3. Safe Area

All swimming areas must be carefully inspected and prepared for safety prior

to each activity. Water depth, quality, temperature, movement, and clarity are

importantconsiderations.Hazardsmustbeeliminatedorisolatedbyconspicu-

ous markings and discussed with participants.

• Controlled Access: ere must be safe areas for all participating ability

groups to enter and leave the water. Swimming areas of appropriate depth

must be deﬁned for each ability group. e entire area must be within easy

reach of designated rescue personnel. e area must be clear of boat traﬃc,

surﬁng, or other non-swimming activities.

• Bottom Conditions and Depth: e bottom must be clear of trees and

debris. Abrupt changes in depth are not allowed in the nonswimmer area.

Isolatedunderwaterhazardsshouldbemarkedwithoats.Rescuepersonnel

mustbeabletoeasilyreachthebottom.Maximumrecommendedwaterdepth

inclearwateris12feet.Maximumwaterdepthinturbidwateriseightfeet.

• Visibility: Underwater swimming and diving are prohibited in turbid water.

Turbid water exists when a swimmer treading water cannot see his feet.

Swimming at night is only allowed in areas with water clarity and lighting

suﬃcient for good visibility both above and below the surface.

• Diving and elevated entry:Divingispermittedonlyintoclear,unob-

structed water from heights no greater than 40 inches. Water depth must

beatleast7feet.Bottomdepthcontoursbelowdivingboardsandelevated

surfaces require greater water depths and must conform to state regulations.

Persons should not jump into water from heights greater than they are tall,

and only into water chest deep or greater with minimal risk from contact

with the bottom. No elevated entry is permitted where the person must clear

any obstacle, including land.

Safety and Seamanship 71

• Water temperature:Comfortablewatertemperatureforswimmingisnear80

degreesFahrenheit.Activityinwaterat70degreesFahrenheitorlessshouldbe

of limited duration and closely monitored for negative eﬀects of chilling.

• Water quality: Bodies of stagnant, foul water; areas with signiﬁcant algae

or foam; and areas polluted by livestock or waterfowl should be avoided.

Comply with any signs posted by local health authorities. Swimming is not

allowed in swimming pools with green, murky, or cloudy water.

• Moving water: Participants should be able to easily regain and maintain

their footing in currents or waves. Areas with large waves, swiftly ﬂowing

currents, or moderate currents that ﬂow toward the open sea or into areas of

danger should be avoided.

• Weather: Participants should be moved from the water to a position of

safety whenever lightning or thunder threatens. Wait at least 30 minutes

after the last lightning ﬂash or thunder before leaving shelter. Take precau-

tions to prevent sunburn, dehydration, and hypothermia.

• Life jacket use: Swimming in clear water over 12 feet deep, in turbid water

over eight feet deep, or in ﬂowing water may be allowed if all participants

wear properly ﬁtted life jackets and the supervisor determines that swimming

with life jackets is safe under the circumstances.

4. Response Personnel (Lifeguards)

Every swimming activity must be closely and continuously monitored by a

trained rescue team on the alert for and ready to respond during emergencies.

Professionally trained lifeguards satisfy this need when provided by a regulated

facility or tour operator. When lifeguards are not provided by others, the adult

supervisor must assign at least two rescue personnel, with additional numbers

to maintain a ratio to participants of 1-to-10. e supervisor must provide

instruction and rescue equipment and assign areas of responsibility, as outlined

in the publication Aquatics Supervision, No. 34346. e qualiﬁed supervisor,

the designated response personnel, and the lookout work together as a safety

team. A simple emergency action plan should be formulated and shared with

participants as appropriate.

5. Lookout

e lookout continuously monitors the conduct of the swim, identiﬁes any

departuresfromSafeSwimDefenseguidelines,alertsresponsepersonnelas

needed, and monitors the weather and environment. e lookout should have a

clear view of the entire area but be close enough for easy verbal communication.

elookoutmusthaveasoundunderstandingofSafeSwimDefensebutisnot

required to perform rescues. e adult supervisor may serve simultaneously as

the lookout but must assign the task to someone else if engaged in activities that

preclude focused observation.

6. Ability Groups

All youth and adult participants are designated as swimmers, beginners, or

nonswimmers based on swimming ability conﬁrmed by standardized BSA

swim classiﬁcation tests. Each group is assigned a speciﬁc swimming area with

depths consistent with those abilities. e classiﬁcation tests should be renewed

annually, preferably at the beginning of the season.

• Swimmers must pass this test: Jump feetﬁrst into water over the head in

depth.Leveloandswim75yardsinastrongmannerusingoneormoreof

the following strokes: sidestroke, breaststroke, trudgen, or crawl; then swim

25 yards using an easy resting backstroke. e 100 yards must be completed

72 Safety and Seamanship

in one swim without stops and must include at least one sharp turn. After

completing the swim, rest by ﬂoating.

• Beginners must pass this test: Jump feetﬁrst into water over the head in

depth, level oﬀ, and swim 25 feet on the surface. Stop, turn sharply, and

resume swimming, returning to the starting place.

• Anyonewhohasnotcompletedeitherthebeginnerorswimmertestsis

classiﬁed as a nonswimmer.

• enonswimmerareashouldbenomorethanwaist-tochest-deepand

should be enclosed by physical boundaries such as the shore, a pier, or lines.

e enclosed beginner area should contain water of standing depth and may

extend to depths just over the head. e swimmer area may be up to 12 feet

in depth and should be deﬁned by ﬂoats or other markers.

7. Buddy System

Every participant is paired with another. Buddies stay together, monitor each

other, and alert the safety team if either needs assistance or is missing.

• Buddiescheckintoandoutoftheareatogether.Buddiesarenormallyinthe

same ability group and remain in their assigned area. If they are not of the

same ability group, then they swim in the area assigned to the buddy with

the lesser ability.

• Abuddycheckremindsparticipantsoftheirobligationtomonitortheirbud-

dies and indicates how closely the buddies are keeping track of one another.

Roughlyevery10minutes,orasneededtokeepthebuddiestogether,the

lookout, or other person designated by the supervisor, gives an audible signal,

such as a single whistle blast, and a call for buddies. Buddies are expected

to raise each other’s hand before completion of a slow, audible count to 10.

Buddies who take longer to ﬁnd one another should be reminded of their

responsibility for the other’s safety.

• Onceeveryonehasabuddy,acountismadebyareaandcomparedwiththe

total number known to be in the water. After the count is conﬁrmed, a signal

is given to resume swimming.

8. Discipline

Rulesareeectiveonlywhenfollowed.Allparticipantsshouldknow,understand,

and respect the rules and procedures for safe swimming provided by Safe Swim

Defenseguidelines.Applicablerulesshouldbediscussedpriortotheoutingand

reviewed for all participants at the water’s edge just before the swimming activity

begins. People are more likely to follow directions when they know the reasons for

rules and procedures. Consistent, impartially applied rules supported by skill and

good judgment provide stepping stones to a safe, enjoyable outing.

Safety Aﬂoat

BSA groups shall use Safety Aﬂoat for all boating activities. Adult leaders supervising

activities aﬂoat must have completed Safety Aﬂoat training within the previous two

years. Safety Aﬂoat standards apply to the use of canoes, kayaks, rowboats, rafts, ﬂoating

tubes, sailboats, motorboats, including waterskiing, and other small craft, but do not

apply to transportation on large commercial vessels such as ferries and cruise ships.

Parasailing (being towed airborne behind a boat using a parachute), kitesurﬁng (using

a wakeboard towed by a kite), and recreational use of personal watercraft (small sit-on-

top motorboats propelled by water jets) are not authorized BSA activities.

Safety Aﬂoat training may be obtained from the BSA online learning center through

www.scouting.org, at council summer camps, and at other council and district training

events. Conﬁrmation of training is required on local and national tour permits for trips

Ordinary 5a.

Discuss BSA Safety Aﬂoat

with an adult leader.

Safety and Seamanship 73

that involve boating. Additional guidance on appropriate skill levels and training resources

is provided in Aquatics Supervision,availablefromtheNationalDistributionCenter.

1. Qualiﬁed Supervision

All activity aﬂoat must be supervised by a mature and conscientious adult age

21 or older who understands and knowingly accepts responsibility for the well-

being and safety of those in his or her care and who is trained in and committed

to compliance with the nine points of BSA Safety Aﬂoat. at supervisor must

be skilled in the safe operation of the craft for the speciﬁc activity, knowledge-

able in accident prevention, and prepared for emergency situations. If the adult

with Safety Aﬂoat training lacks the necessary boat operating and safety skills,

then he or she may serve as the supervisor only if assisted by other adults, camp

staﬀ personnel, or professional tour guides who have the appropriate skills.

Additional leadership is provided in ratios of one trained adult, staﬀ member, or

guide per 10 participants. At least one leader must be trained in ﬁrst aid includ-

ingCPR.Anyswimmingdoneinconjunctionwiththeactivityaoatmustbe

supervisedinaccordancewithBSASafeSwimDefensestandards.Itisstrongly

recommended that all units have at least one adult or older youth member cur-

rently trained in BSA Paddle Craft Safety to assist in the planning and conduct

of all activities aﬂoat.

2. Personal Health Review

A complete health history is required of all participants as evidence of ﬁtness

forboatingactivities.Formsforminorsmustbesignedbyaparentorlegal

guardian. Participants should be asked to relate any recent incidents of illness

or injury just prior to the activity. All supervision, discipline, and protection

should be adjusted to anticipate any potential risks associated with individual

healthconditions.Forsignicanthealthconditions,theadultsupervisorshould

require an examination by a physician and consult with parent, guardian, or

caregiver for appropriate precautions.

3. Swimming Ability

Operation of any boat on a ﬂoat trip is limited to youth and adults who have

completed the BSA swimmer classiﬁcation test. Swimmers must complete the

following test, which should be administered annually:

Jumpfeetrstintowaterovertheheadindepth.Leveloandswim75yardsin

a strong manner using one or more of the following strokes: sidestroke, breast-

stroke, trudgen, or crawl; then swim 25 yards using an easy, resting backstroke.

e 100 yards must be completed in one swim without stops and must include

at least one sharp turn. After completing swim, rest by ﬂoating.

Foractivityaoat,thosenotclassiedasaswimmerarelimitedtomultiperson

craft during outings or ﬂoat trips on calm water with little likelihood of capsiz-

ing or falling overboard. ey may operate a ﬁxed-seat rowboat or pedal boat

accompanied by a buddy who is a swimmer. ey may ride in a canoe or other

paddle craft with an adult swimmer skilled in that craft as a buddy. ey may

ride as part of a group on a motorboat or sailboat operated by a skilled adult.

4. Personal Flotation Equipment

ProperlyttedU.S.CoastGuard–approvedlifejacketsmustbewornbyall

persons engaged in boating activity (rowing, canoeing, sailing, boardsailing,

motorboating, waterskiing, rafting, tubing, and kayaking). Type III life jackets

arerecommendedforgeneralrecreationaluse.Forvesselsover20feetin

length, life jackets need not be worn when participants are below deck or on

deck when the qualiﬁed supervisor aboard the vessel determines that it is

74 Safety and Seamanship

prudent to abide by less restrictive state and federal regulations concerning

the use and storage of life jackets, for example, when a cruising vessel with

safety rails is at anchor. All participants not classiﬁed as swimmers must wear

a life jacket when on deck underway.

LifejacketsneednotbewornwhenanactivityfallsunderSafeSwimDefense

guidelines, for example when an inﬂated raft is used in a pool or when snorkeling

from an anchored craft.

Life vests and ﬂotation devices are designed to save your life, and the United

StatesCoastGuardrequiresthatallrecreationalboatsmustcarryonewearable

life jacket for every person aboard. e Guide to Safe Scouting requires that,

“OnlyU.S.CoastGuard–approvedequipment(TypeI,II,orIII)isacceptable

for use in Scouting aquatics.” Sea Scouts and adult leaders must know which

type is appropriate for every circumstance, make sure it is in good and service-

able condition, and properly ﬁts the intended user. Life jackets, regardless of

type, must be readily accessible and every passenger must be able to put them

on in a reasonable amount of time in an emergency.

Ty p e I oﬀshore life jackets are designed to provide protection and ﬂota-

tion for extended periods in the sea. ey must be carried on all vessels

going oﬀshore. Type I’s have ﬂotation collars around the neck and head,

are adjustable to ﬁt various sizes, and can have several kinds of survival

gear attached.

Type II life jackets are the near shore “buoyant vests” that are sold in most

boating shops. ey are useful on lakes and bays. ey have less ﬂotation

thano-shoretypeIs.CoastGuard–approvedTypeIandIIlifesaving

jackets are required to ﬂoat a person in an upright, slightly backward

position to keep his or her face out of the water if unconscious.

Type III life vests are ﬂotation aids. Some are “trimmed down” back and

chest, and some are inﬂatable. e vest type covers your chest, but has no

neck support. Some inﬂatables inﬂate automatically when a person goes

into the water, but others must be manually inﬂated. While inﬂatables are

much more comfortable to wear, they must be worn to count toward the

number of life jackets on board. Inﬂatables are expensive to buy and must

be serviced at about half the original cost if they are used.

rowable Type IV ﬂoatable devices must be carried on boats over 16 feet

in length. ere are many kinds ranging from the classic life ring or ring

buoy to cockpit cushions designed to do double duty as a life preserver. A

Type IV should be kept at hand when on the water just in case someone

goes overboard.

Ty p e V life jackets are special-use jackets designed for speciﬁc water

activities. ey can be used instead of other types of life jackets only if

they are used according to the approved condition listed on the label. is

type of life jacket includes deck suits, work vests, board-sailing vests, and

inﬂatable vests. Remember,onlyU.S.CoastGuard–approvedequipment

(Types I, II, or III) is acceptable in Scouting aquatics.

5. Buddy System

All participants in an activity aﬂoat are paired as buddies who are always aware

of each other’s situation and prepared to sound an alarm and lend assistance

immediately when needed. When several craft are used on a ﬂoat trip, each boat

on the water should have a “buddy boat.” All buddy pairs must be accounted for

Apprentice 5a.

Explain the uses, advan-

tages, and disadvantages

of the ﬁve types of Coast

Guard–approved life jackets.

Demonstrate the proper

use and care of life jackets

used by your ship.

Type I

Type II

Type III

Safety and Seamanship 75

at regular intervals during the activity and checked oﬀ the water by the qualiﬁed

supervisor at the conclusion of the activity. Buddies either ride in the same boat

or stay near one another in single-person craft.

6. Skill Proﬁciency

Everyone in an activity aﬂoat must have suﬃcient knowledge and skill to

participate safely. Passengers should know how their movement aﬀects boat

stability and have a basic understanding of self-rescue. Boat operators must

meet government requirements, be able to maintain control of their craft, know

how changes in the environment inﬂuence that control, and only undertake

activities within personal and group capabilities.

• Contentoftrainingexercisesshouldbeappropriatefortheage,size,andexperi-

ence of the participants and should cover basic skills on calm water of limited

extent before proceeding to advanced skills involving current, waves, high

winds, or extended distance. At a minimum, instructors for canoes and kayaks

should be able to demonstrate the handling and rescue skills required for BSA

Paddle Craft Safety. All instructors must have at least one assistant who can

recognize and respond appropriately if the instructor’s safety is compromised.

• Anyoneengagedinrecreationalboatingusinghuman-poweredcrafton

ﬂat-water ponds or controlled lake areas free of other activities should be

instructed in basic safety procedures prior to launch, and allowed to proceed

once they have demonstrated the ability to control the boat adequately to

return to shore at will.

• Forrecreationalsailing,atleastonepersonaboardshouldbeabletodem-

onstrate basic sailing proﬁciency (tacking, reaching, and running) suﬃcient

to return the boat to the launch point. Extended cruising on a large sailboat

requires either a professional captain or an adult leader with suﬃcient experi-

ence to qualify as a bareboat skipper.

• Motorboatsmaybeoperatedbyyouth,subjecttostaterequirements,only

when accompanied in the boat by an experienced leader or camp staﬀ

member who meets state requirements for motorboat operation. Extended

cruising on a large powerboat requires either a professional captain or an

adult leader with similar qualiﬁcations.

• Beforeaunitusinghuman-poweredcraftcontrolledbyyouthembarkson

a ﬂoat trip or excursion that covers an extended distance or lasts longer

than four hours, each participant should receive a minimum of three hours’

training and supervised practice or demonstrate proﬁciency in maneuvering

the craft eﬀectively over a 100-yard course and recovering from a capsize.

• UnittripsonwhitewateraboveClassIImustbedonewitheitheraprofes-

sional guide in each craft or after all participants have received American

Canoe Association or equivalent training for the class of water and type of

craft involved.

7. Planning

Proper planning is necessary to ensure a safe, enjoyable exercise aﬂoat. All plans

should include a scheduled itinerary, notiﬁcation of appropriate parties, com-

munication arrangements, contingencies in case of foul weather or equipment

failure, and emergency response options.

• Preparation. Any boating activity requires access to the proper equipment

andtransportationofgearandparticipantstothesite.Determinewhatstate

andlocalregulationsareapplicable.Getpermissiontouseorcrossprivate

property.Determinewhetherpersonalresourceswillbeusedorwhether

outﬁtters will supply equipment, food, and shuttle services. Lists of group

76 Safety and Seamanship

and personal equipment and supplies must be compiled and checked. Even

short trips require selecting a route, checking water levels, and determining

alternative pull-out locations. Changes in water level, especially on moving

water, may pose signiﬁcant, variable safety concerns. Obtain current charts

and information about the waterway and consult those who have traveled the

route recently.

• Float Plan. Complete the preparation by writing a detailed itinerary, or ﬂoat

plan, noting put-in and pull-out locations and waypoints, along with the

approximate time the group should arrive at each. Travel time should be

estimated generously.

• Notiﬁcation. Filetheoatplanwithparents,thelocalcounciloceiftravel-

ing on running water, and local authorities if appropriate. Assign a member

of the unit committee to alert authorities if prearranged check-ins are

overdue.Makesureeveryoneispromptlynotiedwhenthetripisconcluded.

• Weather. Check the weather forecast just before setting out, and keep an

alert weather eye. Anticipate changes and bring all craft ashore when rough

weather threatens. Wait at least 30 minutes before resuming activities after

the last incidence of thunder or lightning.

• Contingencies. Planning must identify possible emergencies and other

circumstancesthatcouldforceachangeofplans.Developalternativeplansfor

eachsituation.IdentifylocalemergencyresourcessuchasEMSsystems,sheri

departments, or ranger stations. Check your primary communication system

and identify backups, such as the nearest residence to a campsite. Cell phones

and radios may lose coverage, run out of power, or suﬀer water damage.

8. Equipment

All craft must be suitable for the activity, seaworthy, and capable of ﬂoating if

capsized. All craft and equipment must meet regulatory standards, be properly

sized, and be in good repair. Spares, repair materials, and emergency gear must

be carried as appropriate. Life jackets and paddles must be sized to the partici-

pants. Properly designed and ﬁtted helmets must be worn when running rapids

rated above Class II. Emergency equipment such as throw bags, signal devices,

ﬂashlights, heat sources, ﬁrst aid kits, radios, and maps must be ready for use.

Spare equipment, repair materials, extra food and water, and dry clothes should

be appropriate for the activity. All gear should be stowed to prevent loss and

waterdamage.Foroattripswithmultiplecraft,thenumberofcraftshouldbe

suﬃcient to carry the party if a boat is disabled, and critical supplies should be

divided among the craft.

9. Discipline

Rulesareeectiveonlywhenfollowed.Allparticipantsshouldknow,understand,

and respect the rules and procedures for safe boating activities provided by Safety

Aﬂoat guidelines. Applicable rules should be discussed prior to the outing, and

reviewed for all participants near the boarding area just before the activity aﬂoat

begins. People are more likely to follow directions when they know the reasons for

rules and procedures. Consistent, impartially applied rules supported by skill and

good judgment provide stepping stones to a safe, enjoyable outing.

Safety and Seamanship 77

Safety Equipment

e law requires that boaters carry speciﬁc safety equipment, and bigger boats

requiremoreequipment.Federalrequirementsforallboats,includingthosepoweredby

oars, paddle, and sail only are:

• OnereadilyaccessibleTypeI,II,orIII,orVwearableoatationdeviceforeach

person on board. (e BSA does not allow Type V.)

Forpowerboatsunder16feetandsailboats14feetto16feet:

• Certicateofnumber(stateregistration)mustbeonboardwhenvesselisinuse.

• Currentstateregistrationnumbersnotlessthanthreeinchesinheightxedon

each side of the forward half of the vessel with the state validation sticker aﬃxed

within six inches of the registration number

• OneB-1reextinguisher(ifthereisanenclosedenginecompartment)

• Ameansofmakingan“ecient”soundsignal(e.g.,handheldairhorn,athletic

whistle). e human voice is not acceptable.

• Allgasoline-poweredinboard/outboardorinboardsmustbeequippedwithan

approved backﬁre ﬂame control device.

• BoatsbuiltafterAugust1,1980,withgasolineenginesinclosedcompartments

musthaveapoweredventilationsystem.IfbuiltafterAugust1,1978,theboat

with a closed fuel tank compartment has to display a “certiﬁcate of compliance.” If

the boat was built before either date, it must have natural or power ventilation in

the fuel tank compartment.

• Navigationallightsaretobedisplayedfromsunsettosunriseandinornearareas

of limited visibility

• Ifatoiletisinstalled,itmustbeaCoastGuardapproveddevice.Overboard

discharge outlets must be capable of being sealed.

Boats over 16 feet must add:

• ATypeIVthrowableotationdevice

• (1)Oneorangedistressagandoneelectricdistresslight,or(2)threehandheldor

ﬂoating orange smoke signals and one electric distress light, or (3) three combina-

tion red ﬂares (handheld, meteor, or parachute type)

Boats over 26 feet add:

• OneB-2ortwoB-1reextinguishers.AxedsystemequalsoneB-1.

• Asound-signalingappliancecapableofproducinganecientsoundsignal,

audible for one-half mile with a four- to six-second duration

• Oilpollutionplacardatleast5-by-8inchesplacedinthemachineryspaceoratthe

bilge station

• Garbageplacardatleast4-by-9inchesmadeofdurablematerialdisplayedina

conspicuous place reminding all on board of discharge restrictions

Boats 39.4 feet or greater add:

• CopyoftheNavigation Rules (inland only)

• Abellwithaclapper(bellsizenotlessthan7.9inchesindiameteratthemouth)

Along with federal requirements, the BSA requires additional safety equipment.

Cruisingboatsmustcarryarstaidkit,appropriatechartsandamarineVHFradio.

Sea Scout vessels must also have an annual Vessel Safety Check.

While not required, there are other items that need to be on board when Sea Scouts

are on the water. An anchor and a spare, a boat hook, charts, compass, spare parts, hard-

ware, tools, extra line, dewatering device (pump or bailer), fuel, and alternate propulsion

(paddles)areabsolutes.Forthesafetyandcomfortofyourcrewandpassengers,always

carry plenty of water, extra food, extra clothing, extra hats, and plenty of sunscreen.

Ordinary 5b.

Describe the safety

equipment required

by law for your ship’s

primary vessel.

78 Safety and Seamanship

ManyvesselscarryanEmergencyPosition-IndicatingRadioBeacontosignalmari-

time distress. is tracking transmitter interfaces with the international satellite system

forsearchandrescue(oftenshortenedto“SAR”).Whenactivated,anEPIRBsendsout

a distress signal that can be uniquely identiﬁed. It gives the identiﬁcation and location of

the registered user. By using the initial position given via the satellite system, search and

rescue aircraft, and ground search parties can quickly target the distress signals from the

beacons and render aid to the boater in need.

Vessel Safety Check

To develop a safety checklist for any boat, the easiest place to start is with the list

usedbytheU.S.CoastGuardAuxiliaryortheUnitedStatesPowerSquadronsfor

vessel safety checks.

An annual Vessel Safety Check is required by the BSA for all Sea Scout vessels.

e VSC is a free bow-to-stern inspection of a boat by a qualiﬁed member of the U.S.

CoastGuardAuxiliaryortheUnitedStatesPowerSquadrons.isisoneofthebest

ways to learn about potential problems that might violate state or federal laws or create a

danger when out on the water.

VSCs are customized for the variety of watercraft recreational boaters use. e list

includes all the safety equipment required by law. e list also includes recommended

itemssuchasmarineVHFradio,dewateringdeviceandbackup,anchoranddocklines,

etc. e VSC examiner will check to see that the decks are free of hazards, the bilge

is clean, and the visible hull is generally sound. e electrical system will be examined

to be sure it is in good working order with wiring in good condition and batteries

securedwithterminalscovered.Fuelsystemswillbecheckedforcorrosionandproper

ventilation.Discussionwiththeexaminerwillalsoincludetopicssuchasresponsibility

for accident reporting, oﬀshore operations, survival and ﬁrst aid tips, fueling, and safe

boating classes.

e VSC examiner usually takes about 20 minutes and concludes the visit by

giving you a copy of the VSC form and a VSC decal if the vessel successfully meets

all the requirements.

Sea Scouts across the nation use an assortment of vessels to ply a variety of waters.

BeginwiththedownloadablelistusedbytheU.S.CoastGuardAuxiliaryandUnited

States Power Squadrons (http://nws.cgaux.org, www.usps.org) to develop a vessel safety

checklist for your ship. Add safety items that are unique to your vessel, your state law,

and your waters. Each time the ship prepares to get underway, every item on the ship’s

customized VSC should be examined.

Visual Marine Distress Signals

FederallawandtheNavigationRulesrequiremarinerstocarryspecicequipment

and signaling devices to attract attention if there is an emergency. Note:Distresssignals

should never be used in jest. eir use can trigger a series of events that can cost others

time, eﬀort, and even physical risk. By law, distress signals may only be displayed when a

life is in danger.

Recreationalboatslessthan16feetinlength;opensailboatslessthan26feetin

length without a motor; manually propelled boats; and boats participating in organized

events such as races, regattas, or parades are not required to carry day signals. If they are

operating between sunset and sunrise, however, they must carry night signals.

PyrotechnicvisualdistresssignalsmustbeCoastGuardapproved,inserviceable

condition and readily available. Approved devices include red ﬂares (hand-held or

aerial), orange smoke (hand-held or ﬂoating), and aerial red meteor or parachute ﬂares.

Able 5a.

Develop and use a

customized vessel safety

checklist for a boat used

by your ship.

Apprentice 5b.

Identify visual day and

night marine distress

signals, and know their

location and the proper use

for your ship’s vessel(s).

Safety and Seamanship 79

CoastGuard–approvednon-pyrotechnicdevicesincludetheorangedistressagfor

day and the electric distress light that automatically ﬂashes the international SOS signal

(. . . — — — . . .) for night.

All distress signals have advantages and disadvantages. Pyrotechnic devices work well

to get the attention of nearby vessels, but they must be kept dry, they expire, and they

do not last very long. ey also can cause harm to a vessel or the person discharging

them. An orange ﬂag may seem like a lot of trouble, but long after the last ﬂare is used, a

3-by-3 foot orange ﬂag with a black disk and square on it will still be visible when waved

on a paddle or boat hook or ﬂown from the mast.

Other recognized visual distress signals include the code ﬂags “N” over “C”; a ball

over or under a square hanging from the halyard; waving the arms; a signal ﬁre; the

ﬂash from a mirror; a continuous horn, bell, or whistle; the national ensign ﬂying upside

down; or a gun ﬁred at one-minute intervals.

It is hoped the distress signals on your boat will never be used, but to be prepared,

store them in a watertight container that is clearly marked and accessible.

STANDARD MARINE DISTRESS SIGNALS

Search and Rescue

RADIO

RADIOTELEPHONE

CALL: Mayday

GIVE: Name and position

USE:

156.8 MHz—Channel 16;

2182 kHz; or

use alarm signal

CB: Ch 9

GMDSS

(General Marine Distress

Signaling System)

Emergency position

indicating radio beacon

FLARES

TYPE A:

Parachute rocket

TYPE B:

Multistar rocket

TYPE C:

Hand-held

TYPE D:

Buoyant or

hand-held orange

smoke

CODE FLAGS

OVER

DISTRESS

CLOTH

FLASHLIGHT

(SOS) . . . __ __ __ . . .

SHAPES

BALL

over or under

SQUARE

ARM SIGNAL

Do not use near helicopter

(different meaning)

SOUND

SIGNALS

Continuous:

Foghorn, bell, whistle

One-minute Intervals:

Gun or any explosive

FLAME ON VESSEL

As from burning tar, oil in

barrel, etc.

DYE MARKER

80 Safety and Seamanship

Fire Prevention

One of the ﬁrst lessons we learn in school is what to do if there is a ﬁre. We are

trained to evacuate a building quickly and safely, and we get out of the way so trained

ﬁreﬁghters can deal with the ﬁre.

When we are out on the water in a boat, the professionals are not nearby. An

onboard ﬁre is such an extreme hazard that every step to prevent it should be taken,

andeverytechniquetoextinguishitshouldbethoroughlyunderstood.Remember,

most ﬁres are preventable.

Galley

According to insurance statistics, the galley is where most boat ﬁres start. If your gal-

ley stove is fueled by alcohol, follow the directions for proper use in lighting the stove or

burners. Alcohol ﬂames are diﬃcult to see, so it is possible for a ﬁre to be deadly before

it is detected.

Propane stoves have thermocouples and igniters designed to prevent ﬂare-ups. If a

burner begins to ignite with a pop and a ﬂare, the stove needs to be serviced immediately.

As in any kitchen, a grease ﬁre is always a risk. ere should never be anything near

the stove that is readily ﬂammable—towels, curtains, loose clothing—and the cook

should be able to reach a ﬁre extinguisher from either side of the stove. If a ﬁre of any

kind starts, turn oﬀ the burner to stop the ﬂow of fuel, and then extinguish the ﬁre.

Remember,thebestpreventionforagalleyreisvigilanceonthepartofthecook.

Electrical System

e second most common ﬁre on a boat is electrical, and it is a more diﬃcult ﬁre to

immediately detect. Wire should be the correct size to carry the load, should be properly

insulated,andhavetightconnections.Regularlyinspectthewireconnectorsonboard.If

you see any signs of corrosion, replace them.

All circuits must have fuses or circuit breakers, and switches should be sparkproof.

Batteries need to be secured in battery boxes to prevent shifting, and make sure paper

products, cloth, plastics, fuel, or other ﬂammable materials are not lying against wiring

or connectors.

Engines

Fortunately,inboardgasolineengineshavenotbeeninstalledinproductionsailboats

since1980.Unfortunately,manyofourSeaScoutboatsaredonationsthatwerebuilt

when gasoline engines were the standard. By law, carburetors must have a backﬁre

control device installed. is ﬂame arrester prevents an open ﬂame from entering the

vessel’s engine compartment and igniting any accumulated gasoline vapors.

Dieselenginesrarelystartare,butawornfuellinecancausetrouble.Makesurefuel

linesarenotatriskofrubbingagainstanything.Regardlessofthefuelyourengineuses,

the engine area should be kept clean and well ventilated with leakproof fuel tanks and

tight fuel lines and ﬁttings at fuel injection points.

Before cranking the engine, open the hatches and sniﬀ the bilge for fumes. Leave the

hatches open, run ventilation blowers for a full ﬁve minutes, and then start the engine.

Fueling

Before:

• Extinguishallames.

• Engineandallelectronicsmustbeo.

• Sincefuelvaporsareheavierthanairandwillsinktothelowestpartoftheboat,

close hatches, ports, and doors.

• Sendpassengerstoshore.

• Putportabletanksonthedocktoll.

Able 5b.

Demonstrate your

understanding of ﬁre

prevention on vessels.

Safety and Seamanship 81

During:

• Haveabsorbentmaterialonhandincaseofspills.

• Makesureyouareputtingthefuelintheproperllentry.

• Maintaincontactbetweenthenozzleandthellpipetopreventanysparking.

• Goslowlyandlistenforachangeinpitchasthetanknearscapacitytoavoidspills.

After:

• Cleanupanyspillsanddisposeofcleaningmaterialsproperly.

• Openports,hatches,anddoorstoventilate.

• Snitheenginecompartmentandbilgesforfumes.

• Operatetheblowerforveminutesbeforestartingtheengine.

Lockers

Gasolineshouldnotbestoredinaninteriorlocker.Asafepropanelockerisisolated

from the interior of the boat and drains overboard but not near any opening that would

allow the gas to enter the interior of the hull. Before using the propane, check the lines

for fracture or wear. Even charcoal can spontaneously combust if it gets damp. If char-

coal is aboard, store it in plastic bags to keep it dry.

In general, lockers should be kept clean and orderly. Never stow oily rags in them, and

if possible, avoid the stowage of paint, varnish, solvents, grease, and oil. A well-ventilated

metal-lined locker is safest if ﬂammables must be carried.

Classes of Fire

If ﬁre does break out, it must be quickly and properly suppressed. ere is a universal

system to describe diﬀerent types of ﬁres that incorporates the use of letters to help

usersselectanextinguishersuitableforthetypeofmaterialinvolvedinthere.Fire

extinguishers are classiﬁed by a letter and number symbol. e letter indicates the type

ﬁre the unit is designed to extinguish. (Type B, for example, is designed to extinguish

ﬂammable liquids.) e number indicates the size of the extinguisher. e higher the

number, the larger the extinguisher.

• Class A ﬁres involve ordinary combustibles such as wood, fabric, paper, rubber,

and other common materials that burn easily.

• Class B ﬁres involve ﬂammable liquids such as gasoline, oil, grease, tar, oil-based

paint, lacquer, and ﬂammable gas.

• Class C ﬁres are electrical ﬁres involving wiring, fuse boxes, circuit breakers,

machinery, and appliances.

• Youarenotlikelytoencounteraclass D ﬁre while on a boat. is type ﬁre

involves combustible metals such as magnesium, aluminum, lithium, and other

metals or metal dust.

Extinguishing a Fire

Fireneedsfuel,oxygen,andheattoburn.Fireextinguishersremoveoneofthese

elements by applying an agent that either cools the burning fuel, or removes or displaces

the surrounding oxygen.

• Water (A). On a boat, water is all around you, and it is the best medium for

putting out a class A ﬁre. Water drowns a ﬁre by cooling it below combustion

temperature; however, it is limited to ﬁghting class A ﬁres. Never use water to

ghtaclassBorCre.Flammableliquidsoatonwater,andwaterwillcausethe

ﬁre to spread. Water conducts electricity, so water added to a class C ﬁre creates a

new deadly hazard for the person ﬁghting the ﬁre.

• Dry chemical extinguishers (B, C).Drychemicalextinguishersarelledwith

either foam or powder, usually sodium bicarbonate (baking soda) or potassium

bicarbonate, and are pressurized with nitrogen. Baking soda is eﬀective because

Able 5c.

Know the classes of ﬁres

and the substances that will

extinguish each type of ﬁre.

82 Safety and Seamanship

itdecomposesat158degreesFahrenheitandreleasescarbondioxide,which

smotherstheoxygenthatisfeedingthere.Drychemicalextinguishersinterrupt

the chemical reaction of the ﬁre by coating the fuel with a thin layer of powder or

foam that separates the fuel from the surrounding oxygen. Caution: When used

indoors, these extinguishers produce a thick cloud of dust that can obscure vision

and cause choking.

• Carbon dioxide (CO2) extinguishers (B, C). CO2 extinguishers contain carbon

dioxide, a non-ﬂammable gas, and are highly pressurized. e pressure is so great

that it is not uncommon for bits of dry ice to shoot out of the extinguisher. CO2

is heavier than oxygen so these extinguishers work by displacing or taking oxygen

away from the surrounding area. CO2 is also very cold, so it cools the fuel, as well.

• Halotron (A, B, C).Halotronisavaporizingliquidthatisozonefriendlyand

leaves no residue.

• Foam (A, B).Foamoatsonammableliquidstotameareandpreventreashes.

Using a Hand-Held Fire Extinguisher

A portable ﬁre extinguisher is not designed to ﬁght a large or spreading ﬁre. Even

ﬁghting a small ﬁre, they are only useful if they are large enough for the ﬁre at hand, are

in working order, and are fully charged. e person using the ﬁre extinguisher must

know how it operates. ere is no time to stop and read directions once a ﬁre has begun.

If you can remember the acronym P-A-S-S, then you can remember how to use a

ﬁre extinguisher.

P—Pull the pin at the top of the extinguisher. is will release the handle.

A—Aim at the base of the ﬁre, not at the ﬂames in the middle. In order to

put out the ﬁre, you must neutralize the fuel at the edge of the ﬁre.

S—Squeeze the handle to release the extinguishing agent. To stop the

discharge, let go of the handle.

S—Sweep from side to side at the base of the ﬁre until it is out. Operate the

extinguisher from a safe distance, and move toward the ﬁre once it begins to

diminish. When the ﬁre is out, watch for remaining smoldering hot spots or

possible reﬂash of ﬂammable liquids.

Emergencies Underway

Safety aboard has been a concern since man ﬁrst went to sea. Safety drills are

requiredbylawoncommercialvessels,andtheyarerequiredofus,too.Drillsshould

be held frequently in anticipation of any emergency so if a situation develops, it can be

dealt with skillfully and quickly without confusion. On vessels large or small, everyone

should know where he or she should be and what action is expected in an emergency.

Station duties must be clear.

A station bill is a set of assigned duties for each crew member in the event of an

emergency. e vessel’s oﬃcer of the deck is the person in charge of vessel opera-

tionswhileunderway.Inallemergencies,theOODtakeschargeoftheemergency

response. e helmsman always steers the vessel; the lookout warns of other dangers,

reports, and tracks a man overboard; the navigator notes position and generally is the

person who makes the proper emergency call. Each station on the vessel should have a

list of duties posted where it can be easily read and executed. A station bill should be

prepared and posted for your ship’s vessels for man overboard, ﬁre, abandon ship, and

other emergency situations.

Able 5d.

In a safe place, under adult

supervision, demonstrate

your ability to extinguish

a class A and a class B

ﬁre with an approved

ﬁre extinguisher. See that

the ﬁre extinguisher

used is properly recharged

or replaced.

Ordinary 5c.

Develop a ship’s station

bill for your ship and review

it with an adult leader.

Safety and Seamanship 83

Man Overboard

A man overboard situation requires quick, eﬃcient, and coordinated action by

everyone onboard.

1. e ﬁrst person that sees or becomes aware of a person overboard should

immediatelyshout,“Manoverboard!”toalertallonboard.Itishelpfultogive

a direction—port, starboard, etc.

2. e ﬁrst one to spot the person in the water should stand and extend their

arm to point at the person in the water. e spotter must not take their eyes

oﬀ the person or quit pointing regardless of which way the boat turns.

3. When the alarm is raised, start throwing a debris trail of life jackets, ﬂotation

devices, cushions, etc. e person in the water needs the ﬂotation, and the

trail will help the spotter.

4. When the navigator hears the alarm, he or she must immediately mark the posi-

tion.PushtheMOB(manoverboard)buttonontheGPSifoneisavailable.

5. ehelmsman,followingtheordersgivenbytheOOD,willstarttherecov-

ery maneuvers. Conditions determine how each situation should be handled,

but even though procedures may vary from boat to boat, all have the same

objective—the safe recovery of the person overboard.

Gettingthepersonbackonboardcanbedicult.Ifthevictimisabletohelp,abath-

ing platform or boarding ladder can be used. If the victim is unconscious, exhausted, or

injured, lifting gear may need to be improvised. A dinghy provides another option for

recovery. Be prepared to render aid or send an assistance call via radio if necessary.

If you are the person who goes overboard:

• Don’tpanic.

• Swimawayfromtheboattokeepclearofthepropeller.

• Inroughconditions,turnyourbacktothewavestokeepyourmouthandnose

clear of spray.

• Whateveryoursituation,conserveyourbodyheat.egreatestthreattoyour

survivalisfromthecold.AssumetheHELP(heatescapelesseningposture)and

oat.Restrictyourmovementstokeepfromushingcoldwaterunderyourcloth-

ing by holding your arms and knees close to your chest.

Ordinary 5d.

Plan and practice the

following drills:

man overboard, ﬁre,

and abandon ship.

Sample Small-Craft Station Bill

Position Man-Overboard Duties Fire Duties Collision Duties

OOD In command In command In command

Helmsman Begin recovery maneuvers

under the direction of

the OOD.

Reduce speed, put ﬁre on the

lee side under the direction of

the OOD.

Follow commands of the OOD.

Navigator Mark position, prepare to

make the appropriate

emergency call.

Mark position, prepare to make

the appropriate emergency call,

have abandon-ship

bag ready.

Mark position, prepare to make

the appropriate emergency call,

have abandon-ship

bag ready.

Lookout Point to person in water, do

not lose sight of them.

Keep watch. Keep watch.

Deckhands Throw ﬂotation into

the water.

Be quick to follow all

instructions regarding

sails, etc.

Prepare to assist in recovery.

Pinpoint location, type, size

of ﬁre.

Shut off fuel supply—engine,

stove valves.

Attack with the appropriate ﬁre

extinguisher.

Continually update the OOD.

Check for injuries, report to

the OOD.

Get into life jackets.

Check for damage, report to

the OOD.

If needed, rig collision mats.

84 Safety and Seamanship

Fire

A shipboard ﬁre requires prompt, careful action to save the vessel and prevent an

abandon ship situation. Some things will occur almost simultaneously.

1. Sound the alarm and pass the word.

2. Pinpoint the location, the type, and size of the ﬁre.

3. e ﬁre’s fuel source should be cut oﬀ—ignition keys shut oﬀ the engine fuel

pump, stoves have shutoﬀ valves, etc.

4. e helmsman needs to reduce speed or stop and turn the vessel to put the

ﬁre on the lee side to minimize the wind eﬀect.

5. e navigator needs to mark the position and prepare to make the appropri-

ate emergency call.

6. While these things are occurring, the ﬁre should be attacked with extin-

guishingequipment.eOODneedsconstantupdates—“undercontrol,”

“holding,”“spreading,”“outofcontrol,”or“explosiondanger!”

7. Ifnecessary,thecrewneedstobepreparedtoabandonship.

Discussthespecicsofreemergencyproceduresforyourship’svesselswithyour

adult leaders.

Collision

Sea Scouts promise to guard against water accidents, but sometimes things do not go

as planned. If a collision occurs, you must check for injuries to the crew and the vessel.

1. e alarm must be sounded, and the word passed.

2. CheckforinjuriesanddamageandreporttotheOOD.

3. e navigator needs to mark the position and be prepared to make the

appropriate emergency calls.

4. Getallhandsondeckandinlifejackets.

5. Rigacollisionmatifneeded,orusecanvasormaterialsathandtostopinow

of water.

6. If you collided with another vessel and you are not in danger of sinking, stand

by to render assistance to the other vessel.

7. Ifyourvesselisindangerofsinking,preparetoabandonher.

Heavy Weather

“e wise sailor avoids the storm he cannot weather, and weathers the storm he

cannot avoid.”

Before leaving the dock, you should know the limits of your vessel, your crew, and

yourself, and what the predictions are for your day on the water. Sometimes, in spite of

the forecast, unexpected bad weather develops, and precautions must be taken. If it can be

done, seek a sheltered harbor, put out the proper ground tackle and ride the storm out.

If you are caught in an exposed position, to prepare for heavy weather:

1. Makesurethecrewknowsthelocationanduseofallsafetygear.

2. MakesuretheVHFradioisonandworking,andeveryoneonboardknows

how to make an emergency call.

3. Geteveryoneintheirfoulweathergearandlifejackets.

4. Assign tasks to the crew based on ability and experience.

5. e navigator should record the ship’s position in the log and check the chart

for nearby hazards.

6. Clear any unnecessary items from the cockpit and deck, and secure all gear

and equipment below decks.

7. Rigjacklinesfrombowtosternonportandstarboard.Everyoneondeck

needs to be in a harness and attached to a jackline.

Quartermaster 5a.

Know the heavy-weather

precautions taken aboard

both power and sailing

vessels when dangerous

weather approaches, and

demonstrate these precau-

tions aboard the vessel

used by your ship.

Safety and Seamanship 85

8. Reduceyourspeedtosteeragewayandturntowardthewindifyouareina

powerboat. If you are in a sailboat, reduce the sail to the minimum needed to

maintain steerage and keep the ship’s head into the waves. Approach waves at

about 45 degrees.

Fog

1. Knowwhereyouare.Takexesregularlytodetermineifyouarestillona

safe course.

2. Avoid collisions. Take every action to be seen and to see other vessels and hazards.

3. e speed of a vessel should be reduced to the point where it maintains full

maneuverability and can stay on course.

4. Audible signals should be sounded to announce the vessel’s presence. Vary

the rhythm of your signals occasionally in case your signals are in sync with a

nearby vessel.

5. Post multiple lookouts. A lookout is required by the Navigation Rules, but two

lookouts on the bow must watch for aids to navigation, other vessels, or hazards.

ey must listen for sound signals. A lookout aft needs to watch for overtaking

vessels.Keepingsilenceonboardisrecommendedsoallcanlisten.Foghasthe

unnerving capacity to distort sound in terms of both volume and direction.

6. Use radar and radar reﬂectors. Even if your boat doesn’t have radar, hoist a

passive radar reﬂector as high as possible to increase your chances of being seen.

7. Ifworstcomestoworst,anddepthofwaterandotherconditionsallow,then

anchor or lay to. Sound the proper fog signals, keep lookouts posted, and

watch and listen for other vessels and hazards.

Running Aground

ere are three kinds of boaters. Some have run aground, the rest will run aground,

and some will lie. Sea Scouts use a variety of vessels on every kind of water, so there is

no hard and fast set of rules for grounding. Each grounding is situational with a wide

range of possible variables—bottom type, whether under sail or power, current, tide, and

where you are and what the chart says.

erstmomentsaftergroundingarecritical.Donotpanic,andassessthesituation.

• Checkforinjurytopassengersanddamagetothevessel.

• Ifthereisdamagetothevessel,youmayneedtostaywhereyouareandcallthe

CoastGuard.

If there is no damage to the vessel, a ﬁrst instinct is to throw the engine into reverse

and use the throttle to try to back out. is is a dangerous choice before fully assessing

the situation. Prop wash can cause all manner of muck and mire to be sucked into the

raw water intake with the potential to clog strainers and shred impellers. Safer alterna-

tives are not limited to, but do include:

• Setananchortokeepfrombeingpushedharderaground.

• Dropthesailstokeepfrombeingpushedharderaground,orbackwindthesailsto

try to push you oﬀ.

• Ifyouhaveacenterboard,raiseit.

• Assessthewaterdepthinfront,behind,andtothesidesoftheboat.

• Checkwind,currentconditions,andacharttoseewheredeeperwaterislocated.

• Checkthetidetable.enexthightidemayfreetheboat.

• Kedge.Setananchorbehindyou;useawinchtopulltheboattowardtheanchor

and freedom.

• Reduceyourdraft.Emptywatertanksandputheavygearinadinghy.

Quartermaster 5b.

Know the special

precautions that should

be taken when limited

visibility is encountered.

86 Safety and Seamanship

• Decreasetheboat’sdraftbyheelingher.Movethecrewasfartoleewardaspossible.

• Putonshoesandalifejacketifthewaterisshallow.Makesureyoucangetback

on the boat, then get oﬀ and give her a good push.

• Ifyoutrytobackoandaresuccessful,monitoryourtemperaturegaugescarefully

until you are sure you have not fouled the engine intake.

• AgoodSamaritanmayoeratow.Beverycareful.Seriousinjuriescanresultif

ﬁttings or lines fail.

• Callforaprofessionaltow.

Abandon Ship

Abandon ship is the ﬁnal escape for a ship’s crew.

1. When the alarm is raised, the word is passed, and everyone gets on deck in a

life jacket.

2. enavigatormakesanalMaydaycallincludingtheship’slocationandintentions.

3. Lifeboats or rafts need to be launched, temporarily tethered to the vessel, and

loaded with survival equipment, passengers, and crew.

4. If there is no lifeboat, the crew needs to get oﬀ the vessel with available

survival equipment. ey need to link up so they do not lose contact.

5. Remember,staywithyourcraftunlessitissinkingorthereisanuncontrol-

lable ﬁre or danger of an explosion.

Abandon Ship Bag

In the middle of an emergency, you may only have moments to assess the situation and

abandontheboat.Meremomentsdonotgiveyouthetimetothinkaboutorassemble

what you will need. Abandon ship or “ditch bags” should be prepared in advance with the

appropriate tools and materials necessary to survive and signal for rescue.

Ataminimum,thewaterproofbagshouldcontainaportableVHFradio,compass,

ﬂares, waterproof charts, signal mirror, knife, ﬁshing equipment, ﬁrst aid kit, sunscreen,

and a waterproof ﬂashlight. e bag should be stored in an easily assessable location.

Sample Crisis-at-Sea Emergency Drills

e following exercises are suggested for practice by all adult leaders, oﬃcers, and

ship members. Emergency drills are extremely important, and new mem bers should

betrainedassoonafterjoiningaspossible.Frequentunannouncedpracticeshouldbe

standardprotocol.Remember,safetyatseaisahighpriorityinSeaScouts.eterm

“oﬃcer of the deck” as it relates to these drills refers to the person in charge of the vessel’s

operationswhileunderway.eOODmaybetheSkipper,theboatswain,oranother

qualiﬁed individual.

Man Overboard Drill

Tie together two milk bottles that have been half-ﬁlled with water. In open water,

tossthemilkbottlesintothewaterandannounce,“isisadrill.Manoverboard.”

Sailing Vessels

1. Oﬃcer of the deck’s duties:

A. eOODimmediatelygivesthecommand,“Right(orleft)fullrudder.”e

vessel is turned so the bow turns toward the side where the victim entered the

water (e.g., if the victim fell oﬀ the starboard side, the command would be for

right full rudder).

B. eOODordersthevessel’senginestartedimmediately.Hethengives

thecommand,“Manyourrescuestations.”Ifthevesselhasapublicaddress

system,thealert,“isisadrill.Manoverboard;manyourrescuestations!”

should be repeated on the PA system.

Safety and Seamanship 87

C. Whenthevesselisexactly60degreesfromitsoriginalcourse,theOODgives

the command, “Left (or right) full rudder,” and turns the vessel left (or right)

untilthevesselreachestheexactreciprocaloftheoriginalcourse.eOOD

then orders, “Steady up on course _____.” Example: If the vessel is heading

north(000degrees),theOODwouldturnthevesselrightto060degrees,

thenleftto180degrees.

D. ejibsheetisnotimmediatelyreleased.Atthepointwherethevesselis

abouttobeamreachonthereciprocalcourse,theOODorders,“Releasethe

mainsheet,” and allows the mainsail to luﬀ.

E. Onceonareciprocalcourse,asthevesselapproachesthevictim,theOOD

orders the rudder right or left full again, as though he were trying to turn the

vessel back through the wind. Approach the victim to windward. is pro-

cedure causes the vessel to “heave to” or stop. e turn is called a Williamson

turn and, if properly executed, will return the vessel to the spot where the

victim entered the water.

2. Lookout’s duties:

A. e lookout will immediately locate the victim in the water and will not take

his eyes oﬀ the victim. e lookout will point a ﬁnger at the location of the

victim in the water and give verbal location of the victim relative to the vessel’s

position.

B. As the vessel approaches the victim, the lookout will give continuous updates

as to the victim’s location. Some vessels have electronic ship communications

systems that make this operation easier.

3. Navigator’s duties:

A. e navigator will immediately determine exactly where the victim fell into

thewaterbywhatevermeansareavailable.IfthevesselhasGPS,writethe

exactlatitudeandlongitudeofthepositiononthelog.SomeGPSshavea

man-overboard feature that allows the device to retain the exact position of

thevictimbysimplypushingabutton.Readtheinstructionscarefullyon

theGPS.

B. If the crew cannot immediately spot the victim, the navigator determines the

current position and continuously plots a course to the presumed location of

thevictim.enavigatorisusuallyneartheVHFradioandshouldcallthe

U.S.CoastGuardifthevictimisnotimmediatelyfound.

4. Helmsman’s duties:

A. ehelmsmanmustfollowtheexactinstructionsoftheOOD.Hemustbe

familiar with what is about to happen. e helmsman must also fully under-

stand the Williamson turn and how to heave to.

5. General crew’s duties:

A. row some ﬂoating object overboard immediately to mark the site and

to give the victim something to grasp for added buoyancy. Some vessels

are equipped with a man-overboard pole that can be released by a crew

member. At night, point a light on the victim and hold it there to help guide

the helmsman.

B. Crew members will put on their life jackets as soon as practical. e lookout

should always be wearing his life jacket if he is standing on the bow. It may

be necessary to put a swimmer in the water, but do not put a member of the

crew into the water immediately unless the victim is a small child or an elderly

or disabled adult. One member of the crew should be preparing a line to be

attached to the swimmer if necessary. A ﬁrst aid kit should be brought on

deck as well as blankets, if conditions dictate.

88 Safety and Seamanship

C. e procedure for getting the victim back on board varies with the vessel. If

the victim cannot help himself, it may be necessary to rig a sling suspended

fromablockconnectedtothesailorcargoboom.Generally,loweringaladder

will work. Smaller ves sels are more stable if the victim boards over the stern.

Experiment with this procedure in a safe area with the vessel at anchor.

D. Ifthevesselbeginsanextendedsearchforthevictim,theinternationalsignal

ﬂag “Oscar” should be hoisted on the port side of the vessel.

Power Vessels

e procedure for power vessels is the same as under sail except for sail-

handling procedures.

Fire Drill

1. OOD’s duties:

A. eOODgivestheorder“Allstop”ifthevesselisunderpower.

B. eOODsendsacrewmemberforwardtonotetheexactoriginofthere.

If there is breathing equipment on board, the crew member should wear it.

While moving forward to locate the ﬁre, the crew member should carry a ﬁre

extinguisher. If the vessel has a public address system, the alert “is is a drill.

Fireintheforwardpaintlocker;allhandsmanyourreghtingstations!”

should be broadcast.

C. eOODordersanothercrewmembertocollectallotherreextinguishers

and carry them to the ﬁre’s location.

D. eOODwillpreparethecrewtoabandonship.

2. Navigator’s duties:

A. e navigator will immediately ﬁx the exact location of the vessel.

B. enavigatorwillsimulateacalltotheCoastGuardgivingthevessel’s

position and description, the number of people on board, and the nature of

the emergency.

3. Crew’s duties:

A. Crew members will put on their life jackets.

B. No unnecessary talking.

C. Bring the ﬁrst aid kit topside.

D. Preparetoabandonship.

4. Advanced training:

A. Be sure all crew members know general ﬁreﬁghting techniques. In a safe area

ashore, light a ﬁre in a container using charcoal lighter ﬂuid and have crew

members extinguish the ﬁre using extinguishers.

B. Be sure all crew members know the types and classes of ﬁre extinguishers, and

understand the ABCs of ﬁre chemistry (i.e., fuel + oxygen + heat).

C. Be sure all crew members understand the damage that smoke and heat cause

when inhaled.

D. PlanatriptoarestationoraCoastGuardstation,andarrangefora

lectureonreghting.eCoastGuardandNavyhavesimulatorsto

practice ﬁreﬁghting.

Safety and Seamanship 89

Damage Control Drill

Your ship must establish a damage control procedure for each vessel it uses. is

procedurewillvarywidelyfromvesseltovessel.Herearesomebasicsfordamage

control drills:

• Requirethateachshipmemberknowthelocationandproperoperationofall

through-hull ﬁttings. To practice, blindfold ship members one by one and require

them to ﬁnd and secure certain through-hull ﬁttings.

• Knowthelocationandoperationofallbilgepumps.Havethecrewmanthe

pumps and make them operational. Practice bilge pump replacement in case a

pump fails.

• Simulateaholeinthehullataparticularpointandaskcrewmemberswhatthey

would do. Ensure that you have damage control materials on board (plywood,

underwater mastic, etc.). Large vessels should have damage control lockers.

• Asyoubegindamagecontrol,haveacrewmembersimulateacalltotheCoast

Guard,givingthemthesameinformationasinaredrill.

• Preparetoabandonship.

• Don’ttakechanceswithyourcrew.Ifthesituationisgraveorlife-threatening,aban-

donship.Rememberthatyouarebetterooatingonthevesselthaninaliferaftor

lifejacket.Knowledgeandpracticewillensureasuccessfuloutcomeinemergencies.

Abandon Ship Drill

Inasafeareawhileridingatanchor,theOODgivesthecommand,“isisadrill.

Preparetoabandonship!”

1. Preparation:

A. An abandon ship bag should be prepared ahead.

B. All crew members must be briefed on the abandon ship proce dure and know

their duties and stations.

C. EveryonemustknowhowtooperateaVHFmarineradio.

2. OOD’s duties:

A. Order the ship to abandon ship stations.

B. Havetheabandonshipbagplacedinaliferaftorassignashipmembertobe

responsible for it.

C. Directthenavigatortodeterminethevessel’spositionandsimulatearadio

calltotheCoastGuard,givingthevessel’spositionanddescriptionand

detailed information about the emergency.

D. Conrmthatallhandsarewearinglifejackets.enlaunchtheliferaft.

E. Directacrewmembertoplacefoodandwaterintheliferaft.Ifthereisa

portable water maker, be sure it works and is placed in the life raft.

F. Conrmthatallcrewmembersareothevessel.eOODandtheskipper

are the last to leave.

3. Crew’s duties:

A. All crew members will put on their life jackets and other gear needed for

weather or sea conditions.

B. Each crew member will man his or her assigned abandon ship station.

90 Safety and Seamanship

Communication

Radiotelephone Aboard Ship

ree types of radiotelephone equipment are common for marine use. e ﬁrst is

single sideband and covers long-range communication requirements from 150 to 10,000

miles. is equipment usually is found on oceangoing ships, is relatively expensive,

and not normally used aboard Sea Scout vessels. SSB use requires both a station and

operator’s license.

A more practical type of radiotelephone for Sea Scout use is very high frequency-

frequencymodulated(VHF-FM).eVHFradiotelephonehasaline-of-sightrange

and is practical to 20 miles—farther with a tall antenna. Neither a station license nor

operator’spermitisrequiredforVHF-FMradioswhileinU.S.inlandwaters.

e third type of radiotelephone is citizens’ band. Its range is short, discipline is

almost nonexistent in its use, and it is not monitored on a regular basis by the U.S.

CoastGuardorotheragencies.Whileunitsareinexpensive,theyarenotrecommended

for Sea Scout use.

Radiotelephone Procedures

eVHFisthetoolmostboatersusetocommunicatewithotherboaters,theCoast

Guard,barges,drawbridgetenders,etc.erearealsomarineweatherchannels,andat

least one covers your area.

CarefuldisciplineistobemaintainedwhenusingSSBorVHFmarineequip-

ment.“Handles,”“10codes,”CBjargon,andidlechitchathavenoplaceinmarine

radiotelephonecommunication.eFederalCommunicationsCommissionmonitors

transmissions and will issue citations for repeated violations of the rules. A marine

radiotelephone is not a plaything. It can—and has—saved many lives.

Prowords

Marineradiotelephoneconversationsareterse,ecient,andtothepoint.Anumber

of procedure words, or “prowords,” have become common usage:

Over. It is your turn to talk.

Out. I have ﬁnished talking and no reply is expected.

Roger. I understand.

Wilco. I will comply.

Say again. Please repeat your last transmission.

I spell. I am spelling in phonetic words.

ere are other prowords, but these are the most common.

e Alphabet

Lettersofthealphabetoftensoundalike.B,C,D,E,G,P,T,V,andZcaneasilybe

confused.ereisnodoubt,however,whenonehearsBravo,Charlie,Delta,Echo,Golf,

Papa,Tango,Victor,andZulu.Soalllettersofthealphabetaretransmittedbyvoice

using the following words:

A—Alpha

B—Bravo

C—Charlie

D—Delta

E—Echo

F—Foxtrot

G—Golf

H—Hotel

I—India

J—Juliet

K—Kilo

L—Lima

M—Mike

N—November

O—Oscar

P—Papa

Q—Quebec

R—Romeo

S—Sierra

T—Ta n g o

U—Uniform

V—Victor

W—Whiskey

X—X-Ray

Y—Yan k e e

Z—Zulu

Ordinary 5e.

Describe three types

of equipment used in

marine communications.

Safety and Seamanship 91

A radiotelephone call sign WLB 4321 is stated on the air as Whiskey Lima Bravo

4321. To spell the name of the vessel Scout, the radiotelephone operator would say, “I

spell: Sierra, Charlie, Oscar, Uniform, Tango.”

Using the Radiotelephone

Speciﬁc frequencies have been set aside for calling and emergency traﬃc on SSB and

VHFradiotelephones.eseare2182kHzonSSBandchannel16onVHF.Each

vessel is required by law to monitor the emergency and calling channel unless actively

speakingonanotherchanneldesignatedforthetypeoftransmissionbeingsent.VHF

has many channels, but just a few are for pleasure boaters:

06 Safety messages, ship to ship

09 Primary hail (call), and monitor (listen)

13 Hailcommercialvesselsanddrawbridgetendersonlowpower

16 Emergency(Mayday)hail;hailCoastGuard

22 CoastGuardworkingchannel

24,25,26,27,28 Hailmarineoperator;phonecalls

68,69,71,72,78 Pleasureboatworkingchannels

ere is a prescribed format used to initiate a call on a marine radiotelephone. All

callsaremadeonchannel16whenVHFisused,2182kHzforSSB.Oncecontactis

established,bothstationsshifttoaworkingfrequencytotransacttheirbusiness.Here’s

an example of the procedure:

Check to be sure that the calling and desired working channels are free of traﬃc.

Place the call, being sure to identify who you are calling and who is making the call:

“Scout, Scout, Scout. is is Invincible,KiloMike5502.Over.”

If not immediately answered, the call may be repeated. If there is no answer

within 30 seconds, two minutes must elapse before calling again.

e vessel being called answers:

“Invincible, this is Scout,KiloDelta1996.Over.”

e two stations agree on the working channel:

“Scout, Invincible; shift and answer six eight.”

“Six eight; wilco.”

Bothstationsnowshifttochannel68.

e called station speaks next:

“Invincible. Scout,KiloDelta1996.Over.”

isidentiesthestationsnowonchannel68.

e vessel that originated the call now identiﬁes itself and the conversation proceeds:

“Scout. Invincible,KiloMike5502.”(emessagenowfollows.)

Each vessel’s radio operator takes turn speaking. Each message ends with “over” to let

the other party know that a reply is desired.

When the business has been concluded, both stations sign oﬀ and shift back to

channel 16:

“Scout,KiloDelta1996,out.”

“Invincible,KiloMike5502,out.”

e most misused prowords are “over” and “out.” “Over” means, “It’s your turn to talk.”

“Out” means, “I’ve ﬁnished this transmission.” If you say “Over and out,” you’re saying,

“It’s your turn to talk, but I’m not listening.”

Marineradiotelephonemessagesshouldbebrief,clear,andconcise.Eachtransmis-

sion may last no more than ﬁve minutes. Each station spends as little time as possible on

channel 16, clearing it for emergency and other use.

Ordinary 5f.

Demonstrate your

knowledge of correct

maritime communications

procedures by making

at least three calls to

another vessel, marinas,

bridges, or locks.

92 Safety and Seamanship

Apprentice 5c.

Use the Distress

Communications Form

to demonstrate the

procedure to send the

following VHF emergency

messages: Mayday,

Pan Pan, and Security.

Marine Distress Communications Form

Instructions: Complete this form now (except for items 6 through 9) and post near

yourradiotelephoneforuseifyouareinDISTRESS.

SPEAK: SLOWLY–CLEARLY–CALMLY

1. Makesureyourradiotelephoneison.

2. SelecteitherVHFchannel16(156.8MHz)or2182kHz.

3. Pressmicrophonebuttonandsay:“MAYDAY–MAYDAY–MAYDAY.”

4. SAY: “THISIS _________________ ______________ _____________ .

Yourcallsign/boatnamerepeatedthreetimes

5. SAY:“ MAYDAY _______________ .”

Your boat name

6. Tell where you are (What navigational aids or landmarks are near?).

7. State the nature of your distress.

8. Givenumberofpersonsaboardandconditionsofanyinjured.

9. Estimate present seaworthiness of your boat.

10. Brieﬂy describe your boat: ______feet: ______________; __________ hull;

Type Color

__________ trim; ___________ masts; _________________________

Color Number Anything else you think will help rescuers ﬁnd you

11. Say:“IWILLBELISTENINGONCHANNEL 16/2182.”

Cross out one which does not apply

12. End message by saying: THISIS __________________ OVER .”

Your boat name and call sign

13. Release microphone button and listen; someone should answer.

IFTHEYDONOT,REPEATCALL,BEGINNINGATITEMNO.3ABOVE.

If there is still no answer, switch to another channel and begin again.

RADIOTELEPHONE REMINDERS

• Post station license and have operator license available.

• Whenever the radio is turned on, keep the receiver tuned to the distress frequency

(2182kHzor156.8MHz).

• Use2182kHzand156.8MHzforcalling,distress,urgency,orsafetyonly.

• Listen before transmitting on any frequency to avoid interfering with other

communications.

• IfyouhearaMAYDAY,talkonlyifyoucanhelp.Bepreparedtorenderassistance

or relay the distress message if necessary.

• Identify by call sign at the beginning and end of each communication.

• Keepallcommunicationsasbriefaspossible.

• Keepyourradioequipmentshipshape.Haveitcheckedperiodicallybyaqualied,

licensed technician.

• Falsedistresssignalsareprohibited.

• Radiocommunicationsareprivate,anddivulgenceofcontentwithoutpermission

is prohibited.

• Don’tuseprofaneorindecentlanguage.

Safety and Seamanship 93

Emergency Messages

e principal purpose of the marine radiotelephone is to handle emergencies. ree

typesofemergencymessagesareusedandallaretransmittedonchannel16or2182kHz:

Mayday: Distress—Lossoflife,seriousillnessorinjury,orlossofthevesselis

possible.

Pan Pan (pronounced pahn): Urgent—Safety of the vessel or person is in

jeopardy. Loss of life or property is not likely, but help is needed.

Security (pronounced say-curitay): Safety message—Used to report hazard to

navigation, buoy oﬀ station, extreme weather, etc.

AssoonasaMayday,PanPan,orSecuritymessageisheard,allothertracon

channel 16 must stop. If someone tries to transmit on any other subject, the command

“Seelonce”(silence)maybegiven.NormallytheentireMaydayorPanPansituation

is handled on channel 16. If another channel is to be used, this will be ordered by the

searchandrescueauthority,usuallytheCoastGuard.

Since Security messages do not involve a threat to life or property, all traﬃc beyond

the initial call shifts to a working channel. If a situation is spotted, boaters are usually

advisedtoreportittotheCoastGuardandletthemevaluatethesituationandissuethe

Security message. eir taller antenna will give better coverage.

Ifyourvesselisindistress,placeaMaydayorPanPancall.Remember,these

messages must be used only in the event of a real emergency.

eU.S.CoastGuardiscurrentlymodernizingitsoutdatednationaldistresscom-

munications system. e new system, Rescue 21, will be the primary maritime emergency

systemfortheUnitedStates.Rescue21willimprovetheU.S.CoastGuard’sabilityto

detectMaydaycalls,pinpointthelocationofthecall,andcoordinaterescueoperations.

Communications Signaling

Signalingiscarriedoutatseainseveralways.Someofthemethodsareradio,Global

MarineDistressSignalingSystem,InternationalCodeags,signalags,andblinkerlights.

94 Safety and Seamanship

The International Morse Code

Untilrecently,Morsecodewasthestandardsignalingmeansthroughouttheworld.

Itisstillfrequentlyusedinnon-telegraphysignaling.ItispossibletosendMorsecode

by several diﬀerent methods: it is easily simulated by a simple electric buzzer; it may be

signaled by the ship’s whistle, siren, or foghorn; or it may be transmitted by signal ﬂag

when the ﬂag is held erect for a long interval for dashes and a short one for dots, or more

commonly, swung to the sender’s right for a dash and to the sender’s left for a dot.

It is also sent with a blinker system. is method can be improvised in many ways,

and every seaman should know them. A pocket ﬂashlight, a lantern covered and uncov-

ered by a piece of clothing or any opaque object, a porthole opened and closed, or any of

the standard ship’s lights can be adapted.

Practice Blinker/Buzzer

Wiring Diagram

Blinker

Landship

Mast Bulb and

Socket

Small Jar

Cover

Batteries

Switch

Doorbell

Buzzer

Key

Safety and Seamanship 95

Semaphore

is method of signaling is an old favorite of the Navy and has much to recommend

it. It is the fastest way of sending messages by ﬂags. It can be used only in the daytime

andatshortdistances.Formthelettersbyplacingtwoagsatcertainanglestoeach

other.Holdeachsothestaisacontinuationofyourforearm.Keepyourarmssti.

A B C D E F G H

I J K L M N O P

Q R S T U V W

X Y Z ATTENTION INTERVAL NUMERAL

Semaphore Signaling

Whenever you cross a ﬂag in front of you to make a letter, twist your body slightly in

the same direction.

To send a semaphore message, get the receiver’s attention with the attention signal,

made by waving both ﬂags repeatedly overhead in a scissorlike motion. When the

receiversendstheletterK,youcangoahead.

Send the letters of each word by going directly from the position of one letter,

without stopping, into the position of the next, pausing in each. If you have to think of

the next letter, hold the letter you are making until the next one comes to mind.

To indicate the end of a word, give the front signal by bringing the ﬂags down in

front of you, with the staﬀs crossing each other.

Whenever double letters appear in a word, use the front signal to separate them.

Maketherstletter,thenfront,andimmediately,withoutpause,bringtheagsagainin

the position of the letter.

ereceiveracknowledgeseachwordbysendingC.IfheorshesuddenlysendsIMI,

itmeansheorshedidnotcatchyourlastword.Repeatitandcontinuefromthere.If

you have made an error yourself, send eight E’s and start again from the beginning of

thatword.FinishthemessagewithARandwaitforthereceivertomaketheletterR.

is means the receiver has your message.

96 Safety and Seamanship

International Code Flags

Any extensive use of International Code ﬂags will call for the use of International

Code of Signals, published by the U.S. Naval Oceanographic Oﬃce. A few of the

principal signals and the general method of making and answering signals are given here.

eagsareshownincoloronthe“InternationalFlagsandPennants”pagein

the appendix.

How to Make a Signal

If you want to make a signal, hoist your ensign with the code ﬂag under it. If more

than one vessel or signal station is in sight and your signal is intended for a particular

vessel or signal station, indicate which vessel or signal station you are addressing by

making the distinguishing signal (i.e., the signal letters) of the vessel or station with

which you want to communicate. If you don’t know the distinguishing signal, observe

that ships will answer with their distinguishing signal hoists or answering pennant.

When you have been answered by the vessel you are addressing, proceed with your sig-

nal, ﬁrst hauling down your code ﬂag. It may be required for making or answering signals.

Signals should always be hoisted where they can be best seen, not necessarily at the

masthead. Each hoist should be kept ﬂying until the other ship hoists her answering

pennant close up. When ﬁnished signaling, haul down your ensign.

How to Answer a Signal

On seeing a signal made by another ship, hoist your answering pennant at the dip.

(A ﬂag is at the dip when it is hoisted about three-quarters up its halyard.)

Always hoist the answering pennant where it can be seen best.

When the hoist has been recognized and is understood, hoist your answering

pennant close up, and keep it there until the other ship hauls her hoist down. en haul

your answering pennant down to the dip and wait for the next hoist.

If the other ship’s ﬂags cannot be made out or the signal is not understood, keep your

answering pennant at the dip, and make a signal to that eﬀect. When she has repeated

or clariﬁed her signal, hoist your answering pennant close up.

e code ﬂags come in various sizes. e square ﬂags, 3 by 3 feet, are handy for

Sea Scouts.

e best method of practice is to rig up two widely separated masts or halyard hauls.

en have your instructor give a set of signals to one group, noting the time, speed, and

accuracy in which they are transmitted. en have the second group send some signals.

Signal ﬂags should be properly bent, either with a sheet or signal halyard bend, or

with snap hooks. e best way to stow and use ﬂags for quick work is to have a signal

rackandasignalbagmadeofcanvas.Flagsshouldneverbestowedwetandshouldbe

kept in repair.

First Aid

A working knowledge of ﬁrst aid is absolutely essential to the safe operation of a Sea

Scout ship. Normally, medical assistance is not immediately available—particularly on a

small boat.

Quartermaster 5c.

Draw the International

Code ﬂags and pennants

from memory and give

the single letter meanings

(Alpha = Have diver down,

keep clear) of the ﬂags.

Show how to use the book

International Code of Signals.

Safety and Seamanship 97

First Aid Kit

A complete ﬁrst aid kit is necessary. It should contain the following:

Wo u n d Care

Sterile absorbent cotton

Small adhesive bandages

Sterile gauze squares, various sizes

Elastic bandages, various widths

Waterproof adhesive tape

Gauzerollerbandages

Cotton-tipped swabs

Sterile eye pads

Alcohol swabs

Medication

Antiseasickness pills

Antihistamine pills

Pain-relieving tablets

Toothache remedy (oil of cloves)

Laxative (mild)

Bicarbonate of soda

roat lozenges

roat spray

Antidiarrheal

Hydrogenperoxide

Meattenderizer

Ointments and Lotions

Sunscreen(8–15range)

Sunburn lotion

Zincoxideointment

Liquid soap

Burn ointment or petroleum jelly

Aromatic spirit of ammonia

Tube of boric acid ophthalmic ointment

To o l s

Safety pins, assorted

Small scissors

Tongue depressors

Clinical thermometer

Rust-resistantneedles

Tweezers or thumb forceps

Snakebite kit (inland)

Instant ice bags

Small ﬂashlight

Disposablelatexglovesorplasticwrap

Mouth-barrierdevice

Plastic safety goggles

Hurry Rescue Cases

All ship members should know how to deal with the following emergencies when

fast action means the diﬀerence between life and death.

Severe Bleeding

Severebleedingcancauseshockordeath.First,stopthebleeding.ebestwayto

control bleeding is with direct pressure over the site of the wound.

1. Useapadofsterilegauze,ifavailable,oracleanhandkerchief.Forprotection

against blood-borne diseases, wear latex gloves or cover hands with several

sterile dressings or a piece of plastic wrap.

2. Use the ﬂat part of the hand.

3. Applyrm,steady,directpressureforveto15minutes.Mostbleedingwill

stop within a few minutes.

4. If bleeding is from a foot, hand, leg, or arm, use gravity to help slow the ﬂow

of blood. Elevate the limb so it is higher than the victim’s heart.

5. After bleeding is stopped, put bandages or cloths against the wound and tie

them in place with another cloth or wide tape.

6. SendsomeoneelsetocallEMSoranambulance.

7. Treatthevictimforshockassoonasyoutakecareofthebleeding.

8. Donotapplypressuretoheadorneckwoundswheretheremaybeafracture.

98 Safety and Seamanship

Rescue Breathing

A drowning person is pulled out of the water . . . a man is dragged out of a burning

building . . . an auto mechanic is dragged from under a car with its motor running . . .

a child is pulled away from an electric wire. In each of these cases, breathing may have

stopped. Yet, the victim’s life may be saved.

If you come upon an emergency, check to see if the victim is breathing. Look at the

chest, and listen with an ear to the mouth. If not breathing, begin rescue breathing.

In rescue breathing you breathe your own breath into the victim’s lungs. e air in

yourbreathhasenoughoxygeninittosavealife.Foranadultyoubreathethroughthe

victim’smouth.Forachildyoubreatheintobothnoseandmouth.

First Aid. Place the victim face up. Tilt his head far back, chin pointing up. Lift

with the ﬁngers of one hand under the chin. Press down with the other hand on the

forehead. Pinch the nostrils shut with thumb and foreﬁnger of this hand.

en take a deep breath and give rescue breathing:

1. Openyourmouthwideandsealitoverthevictim’smouth.(Forprotection

from airborne infectious diseases, use a mouth-barrier device.) Blow into the

mouth to ﬁll up the lungs. Look to see that the chest rises.

2. Removeyourmouth.Takeadeepbreath.Looktoseethatthevictim’schest

falls as the air escapes.

Repeatsteps1and2everyvesecondsforanadultoreverythreesecondsforachild

(1to8yearsofage).

When the victim’s breathing starts, time your eﬀorts to ﬁt his eﬀorts to breathe for

himself. en care for shock.

If no air is getting into the victim’s lungs, move speedily to open the airways:

1. Place one of your hands on your other hand and press the victim’s abdomen

with upward thrusts.

2. Probe the victim’s mouth with two ﬁngers for obstructions. en quickly resume

rescuebreathing.Don’tgiveup.Continueuntilaphysiciantellsyoutostop.

Stopped Breathing—No Pulse

If the victim has stopped breathing and there is no pulse, his heart has stopped.

Cardiopulmonary resuscitation is the approved method to start the heart again.

CPRrequiresatrainedperson.PropertrainingbylocalRedCrosschaptersor

AmericanHeartAssociationaliatesisessentialbecauseCPRcancausedamage,even

when done correctly.

Heimlich Maneuver

If someone is choking but conscious and cannot breathe or speak, something has

blocked the airway. Encourage the victim to cough, and if that does not dislodge what-

ever is blocking the airway, then administer some ﬁrm back slaps with the heel of your

hand on the victim’s upper back. If the airway remains blocked, you will need to perform

theHeimlichmaneuver.

1. If the victim is sitting, ask them to stand.

2. Put your arms around the victim at the waist.

3. Makeastwithonehandandplaceyourthumbtowardthevictimjustabove

the navel.

4. Grabyourstwithyourotherhandandgivefourtoveupwardsqueeze-

thruststothevictim’sabdomen.Makethesqueezetightenoughtodislodge

the foreign body. (Your thrusts are forcing the diaphragm to move air out of

the victim’s lungs to create an artiﬁcial cough.)

5. Repeatthemaneuveruntiltheobjectisdislodged.

Caution: If the person is coughing, wheezing, and breathing in some way, do not use

theHeimlichmaneuver.

Able 5h.

Demonstrate the Heimlich

maneuver and tell

when it is used.

Safety and Seamanship 99

Hypothermia

A deadly hazard to persons on or about outdoor waters is hypothermia.

Hypothermiaoccurswhenthebodylosesheatfasterthanitcanproduceheatbecause

of exposure to cold temperatures. When this occurs, the heart, the nervous system, and

the body’s normal functions slow and cease.

Prevention

Wear appropriate clothing when it is cold. Cotton is a poor choice because it retains

water if it gets wet. Synthetic and wool ﬁbers are better insulation and dry more quickly.

Carry an extra change of clothing when boating. You may need it if the weather gets

rough, or you may want to put on another layer if the cold becomes more extreme. e

U.S.CoastGuardpromotesusinglifejacketsasamethodofprotectionagainsthypo-

thermiathroughthe50/50/50rule:Ifsomeoneisin50degreesFahrenheitwaterfor50

minutes, he or she has a 50 percent better chance of survival.

Symptoms

Watch for “umbles”—stumbles, mumbles, fumbles, and grumbles. ere are three

stages of hypothermia, and treating it in the earlier stages is far easier and safer than

waiting until the situation is dire.

• Stage1:Mildtostrongshivering,goosebumps,breathingisquickandshallow,

victim is unable to perform complex tasks with hands.

• Stage2:Violentshivering;apparentlackofmusclecoordination;movementis

slow and labored; mild confusion; victim is pale with blue lips, ears, ﬁngers, and

toes.

• Stage3:Shiveringstops,dicultyspeakingandthinking,stumbling,inabilityto

use hands, pulse and respiration rates decrease, major organs fail, clinical death

occurs.

Treatment

Conserve the heat the victim has and replace the heat they have lost.

• Mildtomoderatehypothermia:

—Removeallwetclothesandshelterthevictimfromwindandweather.

—Givewarmuidsifthevictimisabletodrink.Donotgivecaeineoralcohol.

—Cover the person’s body with blankets and put them in a sleeping bag.

• Severehypothermia:

—Crawl into the sleeping bag with the victim.

—Donotadministeruids.

—Monitorbreathingandpulse.

—Ifbreathingstops,performrescuebreathingandCPRuntilmedicalhelparrives.

Note: With hypothermia, a person cannot be considered dead until he or she has

been adequately warmed.

Heat Exhaustion

Normally, our bodies cool by sweating, but there are factors that can interrupt or

impede this process. Children under 5, the aged, people on certain medications, folks who

are not used to extreme heat and humidity, and those who are not properly hydrated are

the most at risk. When we sweat, our body loses a combination of ﬂuids and salts. If these

are not replaced with an adequate intake of ﬂuids, then heat exhaustion occurs.

Prevention

• Ifworkingorplayinginextremeheat,drinkplentyofuidsbefore,duringand

after the activity.

• Drinkmorethanusual.

100 Safety and Seamanship

• Avoidcaeineandsugar.

• Wearlooseandlightweightclothing.

Symptoms

Heatexhaustion’ssymptomsaresimilartothesymptomsofshock:

• Heavysweating

• Feelingfaintornauseous

• Pale,clammyskin

• Extremethirst

• Headache

• Extremefatigue

• Cramps

• Dark-coloredurine

Treatment

• Getoutofthesunandintotheshade.Air-conditioningisevenbetter.

• Drinkcooluids.

• Coolthebodybysprayingorspongingwithwater.Fantheskin.

• Loosenclothing.

• Rest,liedown,andelevatelegsandfeet.

If the victim’s fever is greater than 102 degrees, they faint, are confused, or have a

seizure,makeaMaydayor911call.

General Safety

Vessel and equipment safety rules that apply to a ship vary across the nation; how-

ever, there are some general rules that have broad application. Basically, each individual

needs to exercise care and common sense around boats.

Vessel Safety

1. Before you even get on the boat, don’t forget to ﬁle a ﬂoat plan; and before you

leave the dock, make sure you have all the safety equipment required by law

on board.

2. Makesureyouhaveenoughfuel,oil,water,food,andsunscreen.

3. Stoweverythingproperly.Makesuretherearenotrippinghazardsondeck

and down below.

4. Wearyourlifejacket!

5. Keephands,feet,looseclothing,longhair,andjewelryawayfromwinches.

Braid the hair or tuck it under a hat, and leave the jewelry at home.

6. Operate the boat at safe speeds.

7. Stayawayfrombeachesandpeople.Propellerscancauseseriousinjuries.

8. Haveadesignatedlookout.

9. Becourteoustoothersonandaroundthewater.Knowandpracticetherules

oftheroad(NavigationRules).

10. Knowwhereyouareandwhereyouaregoing.Payattentiontopostedsigns

and markers, and keep an eye on the weather.

11. Pack out what you pack in, and leave the water better than you found it.

Tool Safety

1. Wear safety glasses with most hand and power tools.

2. Wear the appropriate protective equipment for the tool being used—gloves,

helmets, shoes, aprons, etc.

3. Inspect all tools before using. Check for wear, cracks, breaks, etc.

Apprentice 5d.

Know the safety rules that

apply to vessels and

equipment used by your

ship, and safety standards

in the use of power tools,

machinery, lifting heavy

objects, and other safety

devices used by your ship.

Safety and Seamanship 101

4. Makesureallpowertoolshieldsareinplaceandsafetyinterconnectsareworking.

5. e work area should be well lit, clean, dry, and free of obstructions.

6. Avoid loose clothing and secure long hair.

7. Usetherighttoolforthejob.

8. Donotusepowertoolsunlessyouhavebeenproperlytrained,andonlyuse

them with adult permission and supervision.

9. Disconnectpowerwhenchangingbladesorbitsandduringcleaning

or maintenance.

10. Ifliftingisnecessary,planbeforeyoulift.Knowwhereyouaretakingthe

objectandclearapath.Gethelpwithbulkyloads,andusetheappropriate

equipment for loads too heavy to carry safely.

11. Ifyouaretired,stop.Ifyouaredistracted,stop.Fatigueandinattentioncause

accidents and injuries.

Galley

Stoves aboard ship are a potential source of ﬁre and explosion. ey must be kept in

good repair. Always shut oﬀ the fuel source at the tank when the stove is not in use, and

have a ﬁre extinguisher within arm’s length of the cook in the galley.

Propane

Various types of stoves are used aboard ships. Each type has unique characteristics.

Propane stoves use compressed gas that is heavier than air. While propane is relatively

inexpensive, a leak could let the heavy gas sink into the bilge or engine area and cause an

explosion. e stove must have both an electrical and manual shutoﬀ. e stove should

be thermocoupled, meaning that if a ﬂame is blown out, the gas automatically turns oﬀ.

Pressurized Alcohol

Pressurized alcohol fuel stoves have a complex lighting sequence. e bowl under the

burner must be ﬁlled with fuel and the stove valve turned oﬀ. e bowl is then ignited

and more fuel added a little at a time until the fuel vaporizes when it reaches the hot

burner. No liquid fuel should be visible in the bowl when the burner valve is opened. If

an alcohol ﬁre begins, remember, it can be put out with water.

Compressed Natural Gas

Compressed natural gas is lighter than air and for that reason is safer. is fuel

unfortunately is diﬃcult to ﬁnd and does not last as long as propane. A compressed

natural gas stove works like a home gas stove.

Charcoal

Your ship may carry a charcoal grill for shore use. Charcoal produces carbon

monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can accumulate to toxic levels in a closed

environment. Charcoal should never be used inside, even if ventilation is provided.

Charcoal continues to produce carbon monoxide until it is completely extinguished.

Itisrecommendedthatyouwait48hoursbeforedisposingofashes;however,ifyou

need to dispose of ashes before they are completely cooled, soak them completely in

water, wrap in heavy duty foil and dispose of them in a non-combustible container.

When using charcoal that is not “ready to light,” arrange the briquettes in a pyramid

and douse with lighter ﬂuid. While waiting for the ﬂuid to soak into the briquettes, stow

the ﬂuid a safe distance from the grill. Caution: Never add lighter ﬂuid to coals that are

already hot or warm. When using instant light briquettes, do not add lighter ﬂuid.

Ordinary 5g.ii.

Explain the use of charcoal,

pressurized alcohol, and

propane. Include the safety

precautions for each.

102 Safety and Seamanship

Food Safety

ousands of bacteria are naturally present in our environment—some beneﬁcial,

some deadly. Bacteria in foods can cause nausea, vomiting, diarrhea, fever, and worse,

but foodborne illness can be prevented. Proper storage, processing, and cooking of food

reduces and destroys bacteria.

1. Wash your hands and clean all surfaces often. Clean and sanitize everything

used in food preparation prior to its use.

2. When purchasing and storing food, separate raw meats, poultry, and seafood

fromotherfoods.esamegoesforfoodpreparation.Donotprocess

vegetables on the same cutting board you used for meat unless it has been

thoroughly washed.

3. Bacteriamultiplyrapidlyfrom40°F–140°F,somakesurefoodsarestored

quickly and at the correct temperatures.

4. Cook foods, especially meats, to the proper temperatures.

5. Wash all fruits and vegetables that are to be eaten raw.

6. Pure drinking water is essential. It should be available in clean, tightly covered

containers. You must also be sure that it is dispensed in a sanitary manner—

each person drinking from his or her own cup if paper cups are not available.

Overloading or Improper Loading and Boating Accidents

UnitedStatesCoastGuardstatisticsshowthemostcommoncauseofboating

accidentsisoverloadingandimproperloadingofsmallboats.Mostfatalaccidents

caused by a loading error involved boats under 26 feet in length, and half of these vessels

had 10 horsepower or less.

e number of seats is not indicative of the number of passengers a boat can carry

safely. A safe load capacity depends on the boat’s construction and characteristics.

Weather and sea conditions must also be considered.

ereareseveralthingstokeepinmindbeforeleavingthedock.First,whenloading

aboat,distributetheloadevenly.Keeptheloadlow.Don’tletanyonestandupinasmall

boat. A boat under 26 feet can be very unstable with just one person moving around.

Ifmovingisnecessary,stoporslowtheboat.Keeplowandtowardthecenterlineof

the boat. Above all, don’t overload your boat. An overloaded boat will easily swamp or

capsize because it cannot react to waves and other actions properly.

Manufacturersinstallaplateontheirboatsshowingtherecommendedweightcapacity

(a capacity plate may not be installed on older boats). is usually indicates the number of

persons the boat can carry as well as the number of pounds for persons, motor, fuel, and

gear. e recommendations on the capacity plate are for fair weather, however, and do not

relieve the operator of the responsibility for exercising his or her judgment. If weather and

water conditions are adverse, the load should be reduced accordingly.

Low Head Dams

Low head dams are deﬁned as those dams whose overﬂow, or spillway, discharges

water of a foot or more depth measured at the lip of the outfall in normal weather.

e downstream portions of such dams should be treated with the greatest respect. A

swimmer or boater caught in the boil, backwash, or eddy currents on such downstream

side is in dire peril. Not only are they unable to swim out of such boils, falling water has

such force they may be pitchpoled under water, like a shirt in a clothes dryer, until they

drown.Rescueisalmostimpossible.

If you plan to cruise rivers and canals in unfamiliar territory, your wisest investment

isatopographicalchart.Knowwhereyourportagesare,andgoashoreatleast100yards

upstream from any low head dam.

Ordinary 5e.iv.

Demonstrate appropriate

sanitation techniques

for food preparation and

meal cleanup.

Safety and Seamanship 103

MARLINSPIKE SEAMANSHIP

Marlinspikeseamanshipisthecare,handling,knotting,splicing,anduseofberand

wire rope. A marlinspike is a pointed metal tool (or its wooden equivalent, the ﬁd) used

in marling or in separating rope strands for splicing.

In the days when sailing vessels ruled the seas, every sailor had to be an expert in this

ﬁeld. ey developed marlinspike seamanship into a leisure-time art that produced

hundreds of knots, hitches, bends, and splices. Today, however, only about a dozen are

of any regular use to the sailor of small boats.

Rope

Ropeisperhapsoneoftheoldestandmostusefultoolsofman.Insmallboats,itis

used for mooring, anchoring, towing, and general utility. Sailboats, in particular, have

manyusesforrope,includingstandingrigging(wire),halyards(wireand/orrope),

sheets, etc. All rope aboard a vessel is referred to as line unless it has a speciﬁc name such

as a halyard, sheet, etc.

Generallyspeaking,ropeismadefromthreetypesofmaterial—vegetablebers,

synthetic materials, and wire. In the early days, rope was made from whatever material was

available, such as vines or strips of animal hides, but these crude materials were gradually

replaced by stronger ﬁbers like ﬂax, cotton, and ramie. ese products were replaced by

jute,sisal,andManilahemp.elasttwoarestillwidelyusedforcertainapplications.

DuringWorldWarII,thescarcityofsisalandManilahemppromptedscientiststo

develop a substitute. As a result, many synthetic rope-making materials were produced.

Some of these new products proved superior to the vegetable ﬁbers used for so many years.

Dacronandnylonhaveprovedparticularlyeective,andpolyethyleneandpolypro-

pylene have many uses in rope manufacture. Sometimes two synthetic materials are

usedtogethersuchasapolyethylenecoveroveraDacroncenter.Althoughbraided

synthetic lines are proving to be increasingly popular, laid rope of either a natural or

synthetic ﬁber is still most widely used. It is made in diameters from 3⁄16 to four inches.

e manufacture of laid rope involves four principal steps:

1. Clean ﬁbers, lubricated to withstand internal friction, are laid parallel and drawn

into continuous “slivers.” (is ﬁrst step is not necessary with synthetic ﬁbers.)

2. e slivers are spun into yarns of uniform size, twisted in one direction.

Synthetic ﬁbers are spun directly into yarns.

3. e yarns are twisted in opposite directions to form strands.

Ordinary 6a.

Name the various

materials used to

manufacture rope,

the advantages and

disadvantages of each,

and the characteristics of

laid and braided rope.

Discuss the meaning of

lay, thread, strand, and

hawser. Explain how rope

is sized and measured.

104 Safety and Seamanship

4. e strands are laid, again in opposite directions, to form ﬁnished rope.

Reversingthedirectionofthetwisttwicemakesthethreeelementswork

againsteachother;otherwisetheropewouldcomeapartquiteeasily.Ropeis

laid normally with three strands but sometimes with four. Except for several

special purpose ropes, it is laid right-handed, i.e., spiraling upward to the right

if the rope is held vertically.

The Various Lays

Plain-laid rope is three-stranded, right or left. e most common lay is

right-handed.

Plain-laid

Cable-laid rope consists of three ropes, laid together into a larger rope. In laying any

rope, plain or cable, the component strands or ropes are given an extra twist, or a fore

turn as rope makers call it. is is taken out when the rope is laid, the back turn of the

laying counterbalances the fore turn of the forming.

Cable-laid

Four-strandedropeisplain-laid,butconsistsoffourstrands.Asfourstrandswill

not lie together without a hole in the center, this center space is ﬁlled in by a small rope

known as the heart. erefore, four-stranded rope is stronger than three-stranded rope

of the same size.

Four-stranded,

plain-laid with heart

A hawser is any rope ﬁve inches or more in circumference. Such ropes are used for

towing vessels, making fast alongside wharves, warping, etc.

A coil is the standard method of preparing rope for shipment. It is usually 200

fathomsinlength(1,200feet).Greatcaremustbeexercisedintakingropeoutofacoil.

First,determinethelay,whetherrightorleft.Ifright-laid,proceedasfollows:

• Loosenthecover,laythecoilontheatsidewiththeinsideendnearestthedeck.

• Reachdownthroughthecenterofthecoilanddrawtheinsideupandoutofthe

coil. Never uncoil from the outside since extra turns are put into the rope and

kinks are liable to form.

• Coildownloosely,right-handed,orclockwise.

As you coil a line, place a slight twist in the line to ﬂatten the coils. Wrap the last of

thelinethreeormoretimesnearthetopofthecoils.Formaloopintheendoftheline

and pass it through the coils. You can either hand the coiled line from the loop or pass

the loop over the top of the coil so the line can be stored in a compartment.

One way to keep kinks from forming is to ﬂake the line. To ﬂake a line, start at the

free end, remove all twists from the rope, and lay the rope out in overlapping ﬁgure-eight

layers so it will run out freely without tangling.

Line ﬂaked down, ready to run out rapidly.

Coils in practice would lie closer together.

Safety and Seamanship 105

Suppose a rope becomes full of turns and kinks are forming. You may get the order,

“oroughfootthatrope!”Tothoroughfoot,rstdetermineifthetwistsaretotheleft

or the right. If the turns are left-handed, the rope should be coiled down left-handed

and then dip the end through the coil. If the turns are right-handed, the rope is coiled

down right-handed before dipping the end through the coil.

A ﬂemish coil is made by taking the end of a line and spiraling it into a ﬂat coil on

the deck. It is a way to tidy up loose ends and reduce tripping hazards.

Sizing Rope

Ropesizesaresometimesmeasuredbycircumference,butthediameterismorecom-

monly used. e strength of rope is measured by the load that it will support without

breaking.Dierentkindsofropesvaryconsiderablyintheirstrengthcharacteristics.

In any strenuous boating use, the minimum safe tensile strength under normal

conditions is ﬁve times the weight of the object attached to the rope. us, a water-skier

weighing175poundsneedsatowinglineofabout875-poundtensilestrength.is

5-to-1 safety factor allows for sudden strains and for normal deterioration.

esizeofropeisproportionaltoitsstrength,otherthingsbeingequal.However,thebest

rope for a given purpose is not always the size indicated by the tensile strength speciﬁcation.

Another important factor is the use of the rope. is is particularly important in rope

used to run through blocks. If the diameter is too small, the rope will tend to slip and

roll in the sheave, wearing out quickly. A rope that is too large for a particular block will

chafe against the sides of the block and also wear out before it should.

e stretching quality or elasticity is an important consideration in choosing rope. Two

elements are involved in determining this—permanent elongation and working elasticity.

Permanent elongation refers to the permanent increase in length the ﬁrst time a load

isputonarope.Undernormalconditions,Manilastretchesapproximately1.5percent;

Dacron,0.5percent;andnylon,4percent.

Working elasticity measures the amount that rope can be stretched and recover while

in use. is quality varies considerably in types of rope materials as well as the load

applied and how long the rope might be free of strain between uses. Under a normal (20

percent)loadandrelaxationperiod,workingelasticityvariesfrom7percentinManila

to9percentinDacronto22percentinnylon.

ese stretching qualities make nylon well suited to mooring and anchor lines, where

it can act as a shock absorber. On the other hand, nylon is much too elastic for use on

sailboathalyardsorsheets.DacronorManilaropeisbestforthis.

106 Safety and Seamanship

SEAMANSHIP AND BOATING SAFETY

127

SEA SCOUT MANUAL

The size of rope is proportional to its strength, other things being equal.

However, the best rope for a given purpose is not always the size indicated by

the tensile strength speciﬁcation.

Another important factor is the use of the rope. This is particularly important

in rope used to run through blocks. If the diameter is too small, the rope will

tend to slip and roll in the sheave, wearing out quickly. A rope that is too large

for a particular block will chafe against the sides of the block and also wear out

before it should.

The stretching quality or elasticity is an important consideration in choosing

rope. Two elements are involved in determining this—permanent elongation

and working elasticity.

Permanent elongation refers to the permanent increase in length the ﬁrst

time a load is put on a rope. Under normal conditions, Manila stretches approx-

imately 1.5 percent; Dacron, 0.5 percent; and nylon, 4 percent.

Working elasticity measures the amount that rope can be stretched and

recover while in use. This quality varies considerably in types of rope materials

Rope Weight and Strength Speciﬁcations

Tensile Strength in Pounds

Nominal Size in Inches Federal Spec.

Minimum Approximate Average

Cir. Dia. Manila Polyethylene Dacron Nylon

600 1,200 1,750 1,950

1,000 1,750 2,650 2,950

1,350 2,500 3,600 4,200

1,750 3,400 4,800 5,500

2,650 4,100 6,100 7,200

4,400 5,700 9,000 11,000

5,400 7,800 12,500 15,300

7,70011,000 16,000 21,000

319,000 13,300 20,000 26,500

Weight in Pounds per 100 Feet

Nominal Size in Inches Federal Spec.

Minimum Approximate Average

Cir. Dia. Manila Polyethylene Dacron Nylon

1.96 1.25 2.45 1.74

2.84 1.88 3.60 2.65

4.02 2.94 5.00 3.85

5.15 4.00 6.60 5.25

7.35 5.00 8.40 6.95

13.10 8.10 12.80 10.60

16.30 11.50 18.00 15.50

22.00 16.20 23.50 20.80

26.50 19.60 30.00 27.50

33239.06.CHAP4.kg Page 127 Thursday, December 12, 2002 2:56 PM

Working elasticity measures the amount that rope can be stretched and recover while in use.

is quality varies considerably in types of rope materials.

The Care of Rope

Always dry rope out well before stowing it after use. In salt water, wet it down with

freshwaterbeforedryingandstowing.Keepropefreefromsandandgritandavoidany

contact with acids.

To examine rope, open up the lay and look at the inside strands. If the rope is pow-

dery, ﬁbers broken, use it with care. e inside yarns of a rope break ﬁrst. Sometimes,

when a rope has been overstressed, many of the inside yarns are broken while the cover

yarns appear good and sound. It may break with a small load.

Synthetic rope ﬁbers are not attacked by the fungi that cause rot and mildew to

Manilarope.Syntheticropeabsorbslittlewater,soitdoesnotneedtobedriedafteruse,

likeManila.

Safety and Seamanship 107

Helpful Knot Terminology

Old-time seamen made quite a distinction between a knot, a hitch, and a bend. A

knot is used to close or stopper something (reef knot, overhand knot, etc.) A hitch is

used to attach a line to an object (clove hitch, rolling hitch, etc.) A bend is used to con-

nect two pieces of rope (sheet bend, carrick bend, etc.) Over the years these deﬁnitions

have become blurred and the general term “knot” is commonly used today.

e end of a rope is what you work with in tying a knot. (If passing through a block,

it is called the fall.)

e standing part is the long unused or belayed end of a rope.

e bight is the loop or half loop formed by turning the rope back on itself.

Standing Part

End

Bight

An overhand loop is made by crossing the end over the standing part.

Overhand Loop

An underhand loop is made by crossing the end under the standing part.

Underhand Loop

A turn is one loop around an object such as a pile. A round turn is two loops around

an object.

Turn

Round Turn

ere are three additional points to remember in knot tying:

1. Every knot requires passing rope either over or under itself or both. If this is

not done carefully, the wrong knot, or no knot at all, will result.

2. A knot must be tightened slowly and evenly with all elements of the knot in

proper relationship. If this is not done, an embarrassing snarl may result.

3. In joining two lengths of rope, you can reduce the rope’s strength up to

50 percent by using a knot. A well-made splice, however, retains about 90

percent of the rope’s strength. erefore, a carefully made splice is preferable

to a knot, when strength is important.

108 Safety and Seamanship

Knots

Overhand Knot

e overhand knot is the smallest and

simplest of knots and the start of bigger

ones. It can be an eﬀective stopper, but

will jam when pulled too tight. To make

an overhand knot, make an overhand

loop and pass the end under and up

through the loop.

Reef or Square Knot

is knot is used to tie the reef points when reeﬁng a sail. e knot is often tied as a

slipped hitch to permit a rapid release. Never use this knot to join two lines. It would be

unreliable. Unless this knot is tied carefully, you will come up with a worthless granny knot.

Figure Eight Knot

is knot is easily untied and gentle to ﬁber. It is the best knot for keeping a rope end

from running through a fairlead or block. To make this knot, make an underhand loop;

then bring the end around and over the standing part, under and up through the loop.

Apprentice 6.

Using both large and small

lines, tie and explain the

use of the following knots:

overhand, square, ﬁgure

eight, bowline, two half

hitches, clove hitch, sheet

bend, and cleat hitch.

Ordinary 6b.

Using both large and small

lines, tie and explain the

use of the following knots:

stevedore’s knot, French

(double) bowline, bowline

on a bight, timber hitch,

rolling hitch, midshipman’s

(taut-line) hitch, and

marline hitch.

Safety and Seamanship 109

Stevedore’s Knot

e stevedore’s knot is used to prevent the end of a fall from running through the

largeswallowofacargoblock.Makeabightintheendoftheropeandthenwrapthe

workingendoncearoundthestandingpart.Makeahalfturnandtakeitbackuptothe

top of the knot. Tuck the end up through the top loop, and tighten the knot.

Bowline

is has been called the king of knots. Nothing can jam it. It will never slip if prop-

erly made. It can be tied in the hand and dropped over a cleat, bitt, or piling or formed

around a mooring ring. To tie a bowline, make an overhand loop with the end held

toward you, pass the end under and up through the loop, then behind the standing part

and down through the loop again, adjust the bight carefully, and draw tight. is is a

knot you can both trust and be proud of. By the way, the bowline as a knot has no par-

ticular connection with the bow line used to tie up the bow of your boat. e bowline

was ﬁrst described by omas Bowling. In use, “Bowling’s knot” became the “bowline.”

Running Bowline

e running bowline is simply a bowline with the loop ﬁrst passed about the stand-

ing part before the bowline is formed. e illustration shows the result, but it is more

easily understood when you see it tied.

110 Safety and Seamanship

French (Double) Bowline

eFrenchbowlineprovidestwononsliploopsusedforhoisting,lowering,etc.Totie

this knot, start with an overhand loop as on a regular bowline, but pass the end through

twice to form two larger loops; ﬁnish as on a regular bowline by passing the line behind

the standing part and down through the original loop.

Bowline on a Bight

e bowline on a bight increases the strength of a bowline and makes several loops for

various purposes. It is formed in the same way as a bowline using the bight instead of the end,

the parts being double. When the bight is brought up through the gooseneck, it is passed

down around the loop and up behind the standing part. e illustration shows this.

123

456

Slipknot

is knot with a sliding noose is useful for various purposes. When pulled tight, it

may be hard to break free. To tie, make an overhand knot around the standing part.

Fisherman’s Knot

is is an excellent way to join lengths of small line

together, such as a ﬁshing line. Lay end portions of two lines

side by side. Tie overhand knots around opposite strands and

pull the knots together. When drawn tight, this will not slip.

Safety and Seamanship 111

Hitches

Half Hitch

is is the smallest and simplest of all hitches and the start of others. It may be used to

fasten to an object with only a right-hand pull, but quickly slips if not reinforced. To tie,

pass the end of the rope around the object and tie an overhand knot to the standing part.

Two Half Hitches

is is a quick and very reliable knot employed when making lines fast at a mooring.

To tie, make a half hitch and then add another next to it. Additional half hitches will

add strength.

Clove Hitch

e clove hitch is a simple, handy way to fasten a rope temporarily around a pile or

spar. To tie a clove hitch, take a turn around the object, bringing the end of the rope over

itself from below; then, take a second turn with the end under itself. is knot consists

of two half hitches in opposite directions.

Timber Hitch

e timber hitch is useful when lowering or hoisting a spar or pole. To tie, pass the

rope around the spar and take a turn on the standing part; twist the end back on itself

for at least three turns, following the lay of the rope. Adding a half hitch enables one to

tow a spar end ﬁrst on a straight course.

112 Safety and Seamanship

Rolling Hitch

is is a very eﬀective hitch when a pull is to be resisted along the length of a spar.

However,itisonlyeectiveforasteadypull.Slackingandjerkingareliabletoloosenit.

Midshipman’s (Taut-Line) Hitch

is hitch is used to keep a line taut. It is similar to two half hitches with the ﬁrst

halfhitchdoubled.Itiseasytountieifthesecondhalfhitchisslippery.Frequentlyused

for tent guy lines.

Marline Hitch

is is a very simple hitch, used in lashing hammocks, marling down canvas chaﬁng

gear on large ropes, etc. It is often made wrong. e ends of the rope, coming out of the

hitch, should always come out from underneath.

Cleat Hitch

is hitch is a turn secured to a cleat with ﬁgure eights and is locked in place with a

half hitch.

Safety and Seamanship 113

Bends

Sheet (Becket) Bend

is is used for securing a small rope to the bight of a larger rope. It is very much like

the bowline, but uses two ropes rather than one. To tie a sheet bend, make an overhand

loop with the end of one rope; pass the end of the other rope under and up through this

loop, behind the ﬁrst loop’s standing part and down through the loop again.

Carrick Bend

e carrick bend and double carrick bend are used in bending together hawsers, as in

towing. e last gives an easy connection, distributing the stress along the ﬁbers of the rope.

Carrick

Double Carrick

114 Safety and Seamanship

Whipping

All ropes should be whipped or heat-sealed to prevent the ends from unraveling. On

Manilaandlargerrope,whippingisdonewithsmallstu(marline,spunyarn,etc.),and

waxed cord is used for smaller rope.

Heat-Sealing Synthetic Rope

Synthetic rope ends can be sealed by melting with a special heat tool for the purpose

of cutting and sealing or by melting over a ﬂame to fuse the ﬁbers. Tape wound around

the ends can provide a temporary whip.

Common Whipping

1. Place the end of the yarn at the end of the rope, and lay a loop of it along the rope.

2. Wind the yarn tightly around both rope and loop for a distance about equal

to the rope’s diameter.

3. To ﬁnish, put the winding end through the loop and pull the original end

to draw the loop under the whipping. Trim both ends. is method is also

recommended for synthetic rope.

Palm-and-Needle Whipping

e advantage of this method over a common whipping is that the end turns never

become unwound.

e whipping should be started “inboard” and wound to the end of the rope. en,

put on the binding turns in the lay, as shown. If you were to start the binding from the

end of the rope and work in, your last binding turn would come “outboard” and the

whole thing would loosen.

Double twine passed

under one strand.

End of twine tucked

back under whipping.

Bring twine under

a strand and follow

“lay” of rope back and

under strand on other

side of whipping.

Having followed the three

lays back and forth over the

whipping, ﬁnish by bringing

twine up through the center

of strand.

Able 6a.

Complete a back splice,

eye splice, short splice, long

splice, and a palm-and-

needle whipping.

Ordinary 6d.

Demonstrate how to cut

and heat-seal a synthetic

line and whip the end of

plain-laid line using waxed

cord or similar material.

Safety and Seamanship 115

Splicing

Splicing is the sailor’s art of joining any two parts of rope together permanently. e

mostimportantstepinsplicingisthestart.Marrythestrandscorrectly,andtheremain-

ing steps follow easily.

To prepare a rope for splicing, unlay the end adequately and whip each strand with

a temporary whipping of small stuﬀ or tape. Extra care is needed with nylon as the

strands do not retain their set and will quickly frizz.

Splicing requires several tools. e ﬁrst is a knife. e second is a ﬁd. A rigging knife

is also handy, since it combines a blade and a small marlinspike in one tool.

Fid

A ﬁd is a tool used in ropework for tasks such as unlaying rope for splicing and unty-

ing knots. A ﬁd is a cone tapered to a rounded or ﬂattened point that is usually six to 10

inches long. e size of the rope being worked determines the size of the ﬁd required.

A marlinspike (for which the marlin ﬁsh was named) is a similar tool but is made from

metal while a ﬁd is typically made from wood or bone.

Tucks

Atuckoccurswhenyoupassanunlaidstrandunderaxedstrand.Fourtuckswill

hold any splice in normal ﬁber rope, providing they are full strands, i.e., not tapered oﬀ.

Tapering oﬀ is made after the fourth tuck and is done by reducing each of the strands

by one-third; tucking, reducing by another third; and ﬁnally, tucking and trimming oﬀ

close. Six tucks are advised for more slippery synthetic rope.

Eye Splice

e eye splice is the strongest type of rope loop and may be formed around a thimble.

Unlay the rope for a distance of about 12 times the rope’s diameter. If you are a beginner

in the art of splicing, it is a good idea to put on a temporary whipping at the point where

the strands begin to unlay or at the crotch. is whipping should be cut oﬀ after the

splice is formed.

Use a ﬁd or marlinspike to lift one strand of the standing part. Tuck one of the unlaid

strands under it and draw it taut (see ﬁg. 1). e other two strands are to lie on each

sideofthismiddlestrand.Havetheeyetowardyouandthestrandsandstandingpart

of the rope away from you.

en take the left strand, tuck it from right to left under the next strand of the rope,

andhaulrmlytaut(seeg.2).enthelaststrandistobetuckedtotheright.Giveit

an extra turn and tuck from right to left (see ﬁg. 3).

Makecertainthethreestrandsareproperlytaut(allequallyso)andeachunderits

proper strand of rope. Also, make certain that the eye thus formed is the required size,

and the eye itself is not distorted in any way.

116 Safety and Seamanship

Eye Splice

Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3

No. 1 No. 1

No. 2

No. 3

Repeatthetucksinthesameorderuntiltheendstrandsaretooshorttowork.You

can “fair” the splice to some extent by rolling it under your shoe or pounding it gently

with a wooden or rubber mallet.

Short Splice

e short splice joins two ropes or two ends of the same rope. It is the strongest of

splices, but because it increases the diameter, it cannot run through a correctly sized

block. Its bulk can be reduced by tapering the strands toward the end of the splice, but

this tends to weaken it somewhat.

Both ends should be unlaid for about a distance equal to 12 times the rope’s diameter.

Temporarily, whip the crotch at A and the ends of the strands of each rope. Bring the

two ends together as shown, alternating the strands, and pull them taut.

Temporarily, tie down the unlaid strands of the right-hand rope at B (in cut).

Removethelashingfromthatrope.Usingad,raiseonestrandofitasshownsothat

strand 1 from the left-hand rope can be tucked under it.

Pass strand 1 over the intervening strand and under the raised one. Tuck it against

the lay of the rope and pull it taut.

Raisethenextstrandandtuckleft-handstrand2underit.Dothesamewithstrand

3. is completes one full tuck. Continue tucking the strands in sequence until you have

at least four tucks.

RemovethetemporarytieBandthelashingAfromtheotherrope.Tuckthestrands

one after the other as with the ﬁrst rope.

Safety and Seamanship 117

To taper the splice, ﬁnish four complete tucks; then, remove the whipping from each

of the strands. With a sharp razor, cut about one-third of the yarn from each strand.

Retwisttheyarns,whipasbefore,andmakeanotherfulltuck.Again,untwistandslice

about half of the remaining yarn on each strand for the remaining tuck.

Forsyntheticrope,followthesamemethodsasmentionedabovebutallowtwo

additional tucks (with or without tapering).

Long Splice

Properly made, the splice is hard to detect and will run over the sheaves of a block

without trouble. It uses considerable rope, but does not aﬀect the rope’s strength to any

great extent, although it is not quite as strong as the short splice.

To begin, unlay the ends of each rope about 15 turns (six times the circumference)

and whip the ends of the strands. Bring the two ends together as shown in the illustra-

tion,withthestrandsalternating:A,D,B,E,C,F.

Startwithanyoppositepairofstrands,AandF,andunlayAenoughfarthersothat

Fcanbelaidinitsplace.Dothesamewithanotherpair,BandD,intheoppositedirec-

tion. Leave the third pair, C and E, protruding from between the strands, as shown.

Tieeachpairofstrandswithanoverhandknot,asshownwithBandD.Toreducethe

diameter of the ﬁnished splice, untwist the strands, separate them lengthwise into half

strands,retwistthem,andagainwhiportapebeforeknotting,asshownwithAandF.

is is a kind of compromise between splicing and tapering. It sacriﬁces some

strength, though less than tapering alone.

After knotting each pair of strands, tuck them under alternate strands as above. Two

tucksareenough.Finishbyrollingorpoundingthesplicewellandtrimmingtheendsof

the strands.

118 Safety and Seamanship

To produce a neat and strong splice requires patience and practice, but it is a job that

you can be proud of. It is an easy splice to make if you take your time about it and have

an understanding of the essential structure of rope.

Back Splice

is is merely a method of preventing the end of a rope from unlaying. e ends

are ﬁrst laid over each other or crowned. e drawing illustrates this. en the ends,

sticking out of the crown point back along the standing part of the rope, are tucked in a

short splice.

12 3

A neat whipping at the ends of the splice helps make it more durable. If the strands

are tucked back without tapering, it forms a bit of a knob on the end of the rope that

may be useful.

Splicing Braided Rope

Polyethylene and polypropylene braided rope is easy to splice since it seldom has a

core.Heattheendwithaameandshapeitintoapoint.Becarefulnottoburnyour

ngers.Formaloopandopenthebraidatthedesiredpointby“pushing”therope.Work

the pointed end down into the opened braid 5 or 6 inches. Now pull the rope and the

braid will close around the end. A whipping at the base of the loop will keep the braid

from opening and releasing the end.

Eye-Spice in Double-Braided Rope

SplicingnylonorDacrondouble-braidedropeisacomplexprocessthatrequiresa

speciald.Splicingkitsareavailableforavarietyofsizesofdouble-braidedrope.Follow

the instructions packed with the kit.

Quartermaster 6b.

Make an eye splice in

double-braided line.

Safety and Seamanship 119

Wire Rope

Ropethatisformedfromwirestrandsratherthanberyarniswire

rope. As with ﬁber, the wires are twisted into strands and the strands

are then twisted the opposite way around a center strand to make

the ﬁnished wire rope.

ere are many variations that give wire rope great versatility.

Wires are made from a number of metals, including galvanized

iron, cast steel, plow steel, stainless steel, and sometimes copper,

bronze, or phosphor bronze.

e coppers are generally not as strong as iron wire of the same

diameter.Foryachtandsmallboatuse,long-lastingwireismadeof

stainless steel and other alloys that make it non-rusting and much

stronger than ordinary steel wire. Wire rope is almost universally

preferred for standing rigging and halyards on sailboats (sometimes

spliced to ﬁber rope).

It also is often used on both sailboats

and powerboats for tiller and steering cables, handrails, mooring pennants, and

similar applications.

Wire rope is often coated with plastic materials, usually nylon or vinyl, which make

it tough, ﬂexible, smooth running, and easier to handle. is coated rope is used for

steering lines or handrails.

Wire rope is made in diameters from 1⁄16 to 1 1⁄2 inches or larger and is designated

always by the diameter of the rope, not the circumference as sometimes with ﬁber rope.

Wire sizes above one inch are called cable. It is also classiﬁed by the number of strands.

Wire rope cannot be knotted like ﬁber rope but, if made of ﬂexible material, will run

through blocks, sheaves, or fairleads. In handling wire rope, use leather palm gloves to

protect your hands against frayed ends or splinters.

e ends of wire rope should be whipped with seizing or serving wire, just as ﬁber

rope should be whipped with small stuﬀ. Wire rope can also be spliced end to end using

a long splice, or to form an eye, either plain or around a thimble. In most cases a rigger’s

screw is used to hold the eye. en the strands are opened up with a steel marlinspike

for tucking.

Today, most eyes in wire are “swaged” by ﬁtting a metal sleeve, or ferrule, around the

standing part and the end of the wire just below the eye and squeezing with a hand or

power press. Wire rope requires special tools and equipment and is not easy to handle

by the inexperienced.

Seizings

ese are really small lashings that bind or fasten together two lines or a line to a

spar. ey are often of a permanent character and should be carefully made. e seizing

is made with small stuﬀ, such as marline or other tarred material, if it is to be exposed to

the elements.

Round Seizing Throat Seizing

Racking Seizing Rattling Down

120 Safety and Seamanship

Canvas Work and Sail Repair

e sewing of canvas is an art acquired by practice. Although any major repairs

should be left to a professional sailmaker, every sailor should be familiar with stitches

useful for construction and repair of sails. e ﬂat stitch is usually used at the seams of

a sail, where the round stitch is used for repairing tears or for constructing line covers.

Grommetsaremadetopasslinethrough,andtheymustbecarefullycraftedsothecloth

does not rip under stress.

Canvas-sewing equipment consists of the following:

Sail needles. Long spur needles, triangular in shape, rounded at the eye end for general

sewing. e No. 15, which is 2 1⁄2 inches long, is the needle most generally used.

Twine.Usecottontwineof4to8plyforgeneralcanvaswork,theheavierplyfor

heaviercanvas.Cottontwinecomesinahalf-poundball.Heavierropingisdonewith9-to

12-ply twine. Synthetic line equal to what is being sewn can also be used; nylon to nylon,

rayon to rayon, etc., will control shrinkage. is is also for added strength. Twine should be

threaded through the eye of the needle, doubled, and well waxed for extended life.

Palm. A heavy leather half-glove worn over the hand. e palm has a lead casting

sewn in, and this is used to push the needle through the canvas or rope. Palms are either

right- or left-handed.

Pricker. A long, sharp, steel-pointed tool used to puncture a needle hole through

several thicknesses of canvas.

Creasing stick. A tool, having a slot at one end, used to crease the seams in preparing

the sewing of seams.

Beeswax. A small cake of pure beeswax is used for waxing twine.

Canvas Seams

Round Seams

e round or overhand stitch is used for light sails and in repairing minor tears, one

to four inches long. If repairing a sail, gather the two sides of the rip, starting about an

inch above it. Secure the thread by passing it under the ﬁrst few stitches; then sew over

itandcontinueroundandroundendingaboutaninchbelowthetear.Finishothe

threadbypassingitbackunderthestitches.Donotuseknotstosecurethethread.ey

will rip out.

Roundseamsarealsousedtomakelinecovers,especiallyforplaceswherewearis

likely to occur. A covering will be more stable if the stitch is passed through the line.

Round Seam

Note: e only diﬀerence between the two types shown is the direction of the

needle thrust.

Flat Seams

Flatseamsarereallytwoseams.eyarecommonlyusedtojointwopiecesofcan-

vas. To sew a ﬂat seam, lay the two pieces of canvas on a ﬂat surface, only overlapping the

edges that you want to fasten together. You can mark the overlap with a pencil. Arrange

the two cloths with the raw edge toward you and the folded edge behind it. Sew away

from you. When ﬁnished, open and rub the seam ﬂat using a creasing stick.

Able 6b.

Sew a ﬂat seam, round

seam, and grommet eye

in canvas or sail material.

Describe how each is

used in the construction

of and care of sails.

Safety and Seamanship 121

Foldbackthesecondclothandsewtheedgetothedoubledpartofthesecondcloth.

Rubtheseamsmooth.Ifdoneright,itwilllieat.

Flat Seam

Sail Repair

Herringbone Stitch

is stitch is used for more serious repairs. Before placing the two sides of the rip

together, fold under a narrow margin on each and “iron” it like a pair of pants by gently

scraping the edge of the sailcloth with a creasing tool or a knife. en make alternate

long and short stitches to avoid an even line, starting about 1⁄4 inch from the end of the

tear, and ﬁnish 1⁄4 inch below it. Tuck the end of the twine under the ﬁnal few stitches

as in the round stitch, and cut.

Patch

Cut a patch, if possible, from the same weight and type of material as the damaged

sail.Allowabout1½inchesofmarginoneithersideofthetearandturnthepatch

under½inchallthewayround.“Iron”foldswithacreasingtoolorknifetokeepthem

manageable, especially heavier weight cloths. Try to get the weave of the patching cloth

torunidenticallywiththesailbeingrepaired.Measuringtheapproximateareaand

marking the patch material with pencil before cutting is recommended.

Tape

Spinnaker and white rigging tape can be pressed into service swiftly and eﬃciently

to help you ﬁnish—even win—a race, or perhaps withstand the wind in some cruising

crisis until you reach port.

In making the repair, separate the sticky part from its guard which comes as part of

the tape roll; then as you unroll the ready tape, press with your ﬁngers on both sides of

the rip or seam. It should hold until you can get to it with needle and thread or bring it

ashore to the sailmaker.

Grommets

esearesailttingsthatmustbecarefullymade.Makingaseagoinggrommeteye

takes practice. It is done as follows:

Cut a hole, somewhat smaller than that of the ﬁnished eye. is hole must be cut out

of the canvas and not punched by a spike. en, lay a brass or galvanized iron ring over

the edge of the hole or, if you have no ring and wish to make a good eyelet, form a strong

grommet of marline, and lay this over the hole. en take some stout roping twine, 9

or 10 ply, wax it well, and having hitched the end around the side of the grommet away

from the point of stress, work around the grommet and through the canvas, about 1⁄8

inch away from the grommet, making your stitches even and pulling them taut.

122 Safety and Seamanship

en follow around again, stitching a bit further away, and riding your turns between

thosestitchedrst.Followthisbyoneortwomoreringsofstitching,allevenlydisposed

andpulledtaut.Finishobyhitchingtheendsecurelyunderthegrommetringwitha

few cross-stitches.

Such a grommet eye, properly made, will not pull out or tear the canvas under any

reasonable stress.

Spliced Rope

Grommet Metal Grommet Ring

Toothed Metal

Grommet

Blocks and Tackles

Blocks

Score

Swallow

Shell

Sheave

Score

Breech Block

Shell

A block is a mechanical device made up of one or more

scored wheels called sheaves (pulleys) over which a rope

or ropes are worked. e sheaves are mounted in a shell

that is ﬁtted with a hookeye, shackle, or other means of

attaching it to an object. Blocks are used to change the

direction of an applied force and gain a mechanical

advantage. Blocks are single, double, treble, etc., accord-

ing to the number of sheaves. ey are also spoken of

as single, twofold, threefold, etc.

Snatch blocks are ﬁtted with an opening by which the bight of a line may be snatched

into the block without going to the trouble of reeving (passing the rope through the

block and over the sheave) through the end. ese particular blocks are very useful on

board ship for snatching boat falls (the part of the tackle made of rope, wire or ﬁber), to

give them a proper lead along the deck.

e block to which the standing part (the part of a fall to which the power is

applied) of a fall is made fast has a becket worked into its heel. A becket is an eye

designed to take the hook of a block.

Blocks are sized diﬀerently depending on the type of rope. e circumference of

natural or synthetic line is multiplied two times to determine sheave diameter, and three

timestodeterminetheblockshellsize.Forexample,half-inchdiameterlineis11⁄2-inch

circumference and requires a sheave 3 inches in diameter. Because wire rope should not

have a sharp bend, the sheave size should be at least 20 times the diameter of the rope.

In choosing a block, use the block manufacturer’s rating of the load the block will

carry safely. Of secondary importance is the rated strength of the rope being used, as

this is normally greater than that of the block.

Single Block Double Block Runner Block

Snatch Block

Able 6c.

Describe the parts of a

block and explain how

blocks are sized. Describe

the following types of

tackle: luﬀ, gun, double

purchase, single whip, and

runner. With the help of

another shipmate, reeve a

double purchase tackle.

Safety and Seamanship 123

Tackle

When a block or blocks and rope are combined to multiply power, it is called a tackle.

e following terms are used in connection with tackle:

• Hauling part—the end of the fall to which power is applied

• Round in—to bring the two blocks together

• Overhaul—to separate the two blocks

Tackle is a rope and block system. e rope transmits a linear motion force to a load

through one or more blocks for the purpose of pulling a load.

In a system using a single rope and blocks, when friction is not considered, the

mechanical advantage gained can be calculated by counting the number of rope lengths

or exerting force on the load. Since the tension in each rope length is equal to the force

exerted on the free end or hauling part of the rope, the mechanical advantage is simply

equal to the number of ropes pulling on the load. erefore, mechanical advantage is

increased by looping more rope around more pulleys.

On a vessel, a tackle consists of a certain ﬁxed block on some solid ﬁxture, like a mast,

and a movable block on the object to be moved. e power loss, due to friction, in a tackle

is variable, about one-fourth is normal. With well-designed blocks, wide swallows, and large

sheaves, the power loss will be less than when a heavy rope is rove through small blocks.

Types of Tackle

Single Whip

e single whip is simply a rope rove through a single block. If the

block is stationary, no power is gained. If the block is attached to the

object to be moved, the power gained is two.

Runner

e runner is simply the whip with the block at the movable

object. ese combinations of a single block and rope, whip, or run-

ner are found in many parts of the rigging of ships. In modern vessels,

the cargo whip is a good example of its use.

Gun Tackl e

In days of old, the gun tackle was attached to the gun carriages

of smoothbore cannon and helped to train the guns. e tackle is

made of two single blocks with the standing and hauling parts of the

fall leading from the same block. e diagram shows the method of

reeving the fall. e power gained is two or three, according to the

block attached to the movable object.

124 Safety and Seamanship

Luﬀ Ta c kl e

Luﬀ tackle consists of a single and double block. e standing

part of the fall is made fast to the becket of a single block and rove

back again through the second sheave of the double block. When the

double block is attached to the object to be moved, the power gained

is four times (disregarding friction). When the object to be moved is

attached to the single block, the power gained is three times the pull

(disregarding friction).

Hereweseetherule:Countthenumberofropepartsleading

from the movable block and you have the theoretical number of times

the power is increased.

e luﬀ tackle is one of the most useful tackles.

Twofold or Double Purchase Tackle

e twofold tackle consists of a tackle rove oﬀ with two double

blocks. e diagram shows that the power gained is either four or ﬁve,

depending on which is the movable block.

Reeving Tackle

Place the two blocks to be used on the deck, hooks up. Take the end of rope you

intend for the starting part, and enter it into the sheave you intend to lead the hauling

partoutof.Reeveothetacklefromrighttoleftorcounterclockwise.Whenyour

standing part comes to an end, use a thimble and splice or hitch it into the becket of the

block to which it is to be made fast.

To Make Up a Tackle

Place the blocks about three feet apart for an ordinary watch tackle, hooks pointing up,

coil the fall around the blocks clockwise. With the end of the fall, clove hitch about the coil

between the blocks. When ready to use, cast oﬀ the hitch, laying the tackle on the deck in

the same position as when being made up, lift the coil clear and then capsize it.

Take hold of the blocks, two people pulling them apart, and ﬂeet the tackle (ﬂeeting—

the pulling apart of the blocks, so they will be ready for use). When a tackle is in use and

the blocks come together, the tackle is said to be “two blocked.”

Mousing a Hook

Mousing Hooks

When tackles are to be used where there is a chance of unhooking,

the hooks should be moused.

Safety and Seamanship 125

BOAT HANDLING

Parts of a Boat

Just like other disciplines and sports, boating has its own vocabulary. If you do not

know the language, you cannot participate fully; and you may actually be a risk to

yourself and others.

Some words such as aboard and ahead have crossed over into general language, but

othercommonboatingtermshavenotmadeitintothelandlubber’svocabulary.For

example, chaﬁng gear is not lip gloss. It is a protective cover or tubing that protects your

line, and line is not something you use to get the attention of someone who interests

you. Line is actually the rope used for various purposes aboard a boat.

Some parts of a boat are universal. All boats have the following:

Bow. e front of the boat

Stern. e back of the boat

Port. e left side of the boat if you are looking toward the bow

Starboard. e right side of the boat if you are looking toward the bow

Hull. e boat’s main body or outer shell

Freeboard. e distance between the waterline and the main deck or gunwale

Draft. e depth of a hull from the waterline to the lowest part of the keel

Keel. e backbone of the boat, the basic support extending from bow to stern

Ordinary 7a.

Name the principal

parts of a typical sailboat

and a runabout.

126 Safety and Seamanship

e following diagrams will help you learn the parts of a typical sailboat

and a runabout.

Types of Sails

Ordinary 7b.

Name the principal parts

of the masts, booms, spars,

standing and running

rigging, and sails on a gaﬀ-

or Marconi-rigged sloop,

schooner, and ketch or yawl.

Parts of the Boat and Sails

Safety and Seamanship 127

Typical Outboard Boat and Equipment

Typical Sailboat

and Equipment

128 Safety and Seamanship

Types of Sailing Craft

Types of Rigs

ere is a vast range of makes and types of sailing craft, however, rigs fall into a few

basic types.

A Sunﬁsh, with its pole mast straight up in the bow, carries a single sail and is easily

handled by a single sailor.

e sloop is a single-masted vessel with the mast far enough aft to enable it to carry

one or more headsails—forestaysail, jib, or spinnaker.

Ordinary 7c.

Describe the identifying

characteristics of a sloop,

ketch, yawl, cutter,

and schooner.

Safety and Seamanship 129

A Cutter is a small, single-masted vessel that is fore and aft rigged with two or

more headsails. e mast is set further back than a sloop. e cutter carries a staysail

directly in front of the mast that is set from the forestay.

Cutter

e yawl has two masts. e shorter mast is stepped aft of the rudder post or wheel.

e smaller sail is called the mizzen or jigger and aids in sailing balance. In heavy weather

this boat can be sailed with a whole or reefed mainsail or do well under jib and jigger. e

sail area of the mizzen or jigger is about one-ﬁfth the area of the mainsail.

Yawl Carrying Spinnaker and Mizzen Staysail

130 Safety and Seamanship

e ketch is somewhat similar to the yawl except that her aftermast is somewhat

larger and is stepped forward of the rudderpost. is mast is also called the mizzen.

e area of the mizzensail is one-third to three-ﬁfths of the area of the main. It, too,

aids in sailing balance. Sail may be shortened to mizzen and a large headsail. Or, as in

a yawl, both may be taken oﬀ and the mainsail alone, whole or reefed, may be used.

Ketch Rig

e schooner is a fore-and-aft rigged sailing vessel having two to seven masts with

a foremast that is usually smaller than the other masts. Schooners can sail closer to

the wind than a square-rigged sailing ship, need a smaller crew, and are very fast.

Schooner Gaff-Headed Foresail and Jib-Headed Main

Safety and Seamanship 131

Sailing a Small Boat

Preparing to Sail

e following are recommended steps to take when you arrive at your vessel.

1. If she has a cover, remove it, fold it up, and stow it in a bag or up forward out

oftheway.Bailorspongeoutanywaterinthebilge.Dropthecenterboard

andattachtherudderandtiller.Removetheboomcrutchandstowit.

2. Check all gear: life jackets or cushions, bailer, oars or a paddle, anchor, lines,

compass, sailor’s knife, fenders, boathook, etc.

3. Check all halyards to make sure they are not fouled. Check the shrouds to

make sure they are set up correctly (barely tight is enough).

4. Removethesailsfromthesailbag.Bendonthemainsailrst.Attachthe

main halyard to the sail’s headboard. Attach slides to the track on the mast

andboom.Securethetack.Runthefootofthesailoutontheboomand

secure the clew with an outhaul tautly, but without too strenuous a pull.

5. Insert battens in the pockets in the mainsail. Put a loose furl in the main and

secure a line around it to keep it from bellying out or falling into the cockpit

while you turn your attention to the jib.

6. Attach the halyard to the head of the sail. Attach clips or hanks to the head-

stay. Secure the tack and rig the sheet.

7. Mostsmallsloopshaveadividedjibsheet.Checktoseeifitshouldbeledaft

outside of the shrouds through a fairlead, snatch block, or cam action device

both to port and starboard.

8. Now,hoistthemainsailrst,makingsuretheboatisheadingintothewind.

Set the halyard just hand tight. Belay the halyard on a cleat.

9. Hoistthejibandsetthehalyarduptight.eleadingedgeshouldbeper-

fectly smooth or it will interfere with the airﬂow in the sail. Coil and hang all

halyards.

10. Getunderway.

Getting Underway From a Mooring

1. Look carefully at the direction you plan to travel to be sure you have room to

maneuver. Cast the mooring from the deck ﬁtting and draw it aft to give the

boat some forward motion while putting the tiller over to get her clear.

Backing the Jib

Hold the jib against the

wind on the starboard

side to help push the

boat’s head off to port.

Wind

132 Safety and Seamanship

2. As the bow falls oﬀ, trim in the main and jib sheets until the sails ﬁll and the

boat begins to move with the breeze. It is also possible to cast the mooring oﬀ

and let the boat drop back. Point the end of the tiller in the direction opposite

the one you wish to go and the stern will swing, letting the bow fall oﬀ, or

have a crew member backwind the jib on the side opposite your proposed

heading. e bow will fall oﬀ. en trim the main and jib.

3. Be sure crew weight is properly distributed. Too much weight aft will cause

the boat to squat. Too much weight forward will cause her to plow. Also, and

most important, unless the breeze is very light, the crew weight should be on

the windward side. In very light air, the crew weight can be amidships or to

leeward to give her a slight heel, which helps keep the sail full. Experiment

with weight distribution under various conditions to keep the boat sailing on

her lines and properly balanced.

4. Makesuremainandjibsheetsareclear,notfouledonttingsorunderyourfeet.

5. Movethetillergentlyafewinchesfromsidetosideandnotetheeecton

the boat’s heading. You will see as you sit to windward, that pulling the tiller

toward you causes the boat to swing oﬀ or away from the direction of the

wind. Pushing the tiller away from you causes the boat to head up into the

direction of the wind.

6. Check the sails. ey should have a graceful curve to them caused by the

pressure of the wind. is curve acts as an airfoil and the airﬂow in this curve

exerts a forward pressure which causes the boat to move ahead. e correct

trim of the sails is essential to their eﬀectiveness and can be learned only by

actually adjusting the trim and noting the eﬀect.

7. Bytrimminginthejibandmainastightaspossible,wegetinclose-hauled

trim. Ease the tiller away from you (toward the sail) and bring the boat’s bow

more into the wind until the leading edge of the jib begins to lift or ﬂutter.

is is called luﬃng. e mainsail’s leading edge may also begin to luﬀ. Ease

the tiller toward you until the luﬃng stops, then keep her steady as she goes.

If the jib is not luﬃng but the mainsail is, try slacking the jib sheet a bit to

improve the airﬂow through the slot between jib and mainsail. Too tight a

trim on the jib can force the airﬂow oﬀ the jib to backwind the main, causing

it to luﬀ.

Close-Hauled—

Beating to Windward

Before the Wind

Jib and main trimmed on opposite

sides (wing and wing)

All boats except A are on

the port tack.

Off the wind

Across the wind

Still going to windward

Full and by–Still going to

windward

Wind

Centerboard Up

Starboard Tack

Port Tack

Close Reach

Beam Reach

Broad Reach

Running Off

Points of Sailing

Safety and Seamanship 133

Tacking

Since it is impossible for a sailboat to sail directly into the wind, progress is made

to windward in a series of tacks or zigzags, each tack being at about a 45-degree angle

to the wind. To change tacks, it is necessary to periodically come about. To do this, the

helmsmanalertsthecrewwiththecommandREADYABOUT.

ecrewchecksthejibsheetstobesuretheyareclear.AtthecommandHARD

ALEEthehelmsmaneasesthetillerawayfromhimorher.Heorsheswingsittoa

point where it is at about 45 degrees to the boat’s centerline.

Never slam the tiller hard over as it will cause the rudder to act as a brake or drag, slowing

the boat down and possibly putting her in irons as she fails to turn past the eye of the wind.

Now a crewman eases the jib sheet, and as the boat comes up into the wind, shifts his

orherweightamidships.Heorsheducksastheboomswingsovertheboatandthenas

the boat passes the eye of the wind trims in the other jib sheet as the boat sails away on

the new tack.

Movinghisorherweight

to windward as needed, the

helmsman also shifts sides as

the boat comes about, keeping

the mainsheet in his or her

hand since on the new tack the

mainsheet trim should be about

as it was on the previous tack.

Wind Arrow

Close-hauled on starboard tack. Adjust sheets to best

trim, crew weight to windward.

Filling away, trim jib and main, begin to ease

helm back to centerline.

In the eye of the wind, jib and main slatting,

helm still over, crew weight in center.

Hard alee, ease jib sheet, helm over about 45°.

Ready about, prepare to tack.

Close-hauled on

port tack

Coming About

Jibing

is maneuver involves

changing tacks while sailing oﬀ

or before the wind. It looks easy,

but it can cause real trouble if

not carefully controlled. It is the

chief reason that boats capsize.

It should be practiced in light air

until cause and eﬀect are clearly

understood.

Wind Arrow Ease helm up.

Bow begins to

swing off.

Port Tack

Trim main in snug to centerline.

Wind catches sails on opposite side. Boom

swings over. Ease sheet gradually.

Bear off a bit to ease sheets out

and ﬁll sails.

Bear up on new course.

Trim sheets Starboard tack

Jibing

134 Safety and Seamanship

AsajibeisplannedthecommandisSTANDBYTOJIBE.Checktobesureall

sheets are clear. e helmsman eases the helm toward him or her (away from the sail),

and the boat’s head begins to fall oﬀ. At the order JIBE-O the helmsman trims the main

in rapidly, while the jib sheet man moves his or her weight amidships and holds both jib

sheets in his or her hands. As the boat’s stern passes the eye of the wind, the mainsail

catches it on the opposite side. Ease the sheet out rapidly. Swing the tiller oﬀ (away from

the sail a bit to ease the strain). e helmsman shifts his or her weight to windward and

adjusts the mainsheet to the new course.

As the jibe is executed, the jib sheet man eases on one sheet and trims on the other

tokeepthejibfromyingoutaheadandfoulingontheforestay.Heorshethentrims

the working sheet as needed, adjusting his or her weight to windward as needed. If it is

a direct downwind jibe, the crew weight may be opposite that of the helmsman to keep

the boat balanced.

Beware the accidental jibe or a jibe in strong winds. e force of an uncontrolled

180-degreeswingofthemainsailandboomcantearoutdeckttings,ripthesail,snap

the rigging or the mast, and almost surely capsize the boat.

A Goosewing Jibe

Wind

In fresh breezes it is better to come into the wind, trimming sheets to maintain speed

until close-hauled, come about in the regular manner, and then bear oﬀ on the new

course. By all means avoid what is known as a goosewing jibe. is occurs when the

boom rises and the upper part of the sail wraps around one side of the upper portion of

the mast while the boom and lower sail remain on the other side. is can happen if you

are in a position to jibe and hold on too long. Using a boom vang can prevent this.

Safety and Seamanship 135

Running

Sailing on a close haul or broad reach poses no particular problems other than proper

trim of the sails and crew weight distribution. e boom should be at, or nearly at, a

right angle to the direction of the wind.

When running free (the most diﬃcult aspect

of sailing), many factors must be considered.

Carelessness on the helm or a sudden wind

shiftcouldcauseanaccidentaljibe.Keepa

sharp eye on sea and wind conditions and take

corrective action to meet any changes.

Wing and Wing

The Whisker Pole

Wind

A Few Pointers

Sailboatsaredesignedtosailontheirlines.Don’tpermitthemtoheeltoofarover.

In an open cockpit boat, putting her rail under may look exciting, but the margin of

safetyisveryslimandtheboat’sactualspeedisreduced.Keeptherailupbyhavingcrew

weight as far to windward as possible and well distributed fore and aft.

In fresh to strong breezes, tuck a reef in the mainsail or ease the mainsheet to let the

sail luﬀ and spill some of the wind.

Inroughwater,easethebowoabittomeetwavecrests.Headingupintothem

couldstopforwardprogressandmaketheboatsubjecttoaknockdown.Keepthejib

trimmed in ﬂat. It will help maintain forward motion and at the same time backwind

the mainsail. e jib sheet can be cleated with a couple of round turns but never the

mainsheet.Keepitinyourhand.Easeitoinheavygusts;thentrimitinenoughto

keep moving well.

Sooner or later, most small-boat sailors capsize or get knocked down. If it happens to

you, don’t panic. Stay with the boat.

Firstchecktobesureallpersonsareaccountedfor.Roundupandsecureallloosegear.

Loosenthesailsbyreleasingthehalyards.Drawthemdownintotheboatandlashthem.

Your boat can probably be righted by standing on the centerboard and pulling on the

coaming. Bail the water out until it’s safe to get aboard and ﬁnish the job. Otherwise,

stay with the boat until help comes.

The sailor on the far side

is getting the mainsail

off the mast while his

companion stands on the

centerboard preparing to

swing the boat upright.

136 Safety and Seamanship

The Rights of Others

ere are two main points involved here for small-boat sailors: (1) rules of the road,

which provide legal privileges and burdens, and (2) customs and courtesy, which have

their roots in common sense and consideration.

Rules of the Road for Boats Under Sail

BOATS ON DIFFERENT TACKS

Boat on port

tack, keep clear

(Give Way).

Wind

Boat on starboard

tack has right of way

(Stand On).

Boat on port tack

must keep clear

(Give Way).

Boat on starboard

tack has right of

way (Stand On).

Wind

BOATS ON SAME TACK

Wind

Windward boat, keep

clear (Give Way).

Leeward boat has right of

way (Stand On)

Rule: A vessel overtaking any other vessel (sail or power) shall keep clear of the overtaken vessel.

Statement: In obeying and construing these rules, any action taken should be positive, in ample time,

with due regard for good seamanship.

Small Boat Courtesy

ere are countless occasions when a sailboat has the right of way, but the rules of

judgment and consideration are paramount. In a narrow channel or crowded anchorage,

a small, easily maneuvered sailboat must keep clear of a larger one that is more diﬃcult

to handle. In fact, the rules of the road require small boats to keep clear of vessels 65 feet

and over in crowded anchorages and channels.

Keepwellclearofcommercialvesselsandtugswithunwieldytows.Alwayskeep

entirely clear of boats that are engaged in a race. Size up the other boat’s situation and

yield to him or her when it won’t endanger you.

Racing

Sooner or later you will ﬁnd sailboat racing an irresistible challenge. is is a broad

and complex sport involving rules, tactics, and advanced boat and sail handling. It

involves the use of spinnakers, split-second timing, superlative seamanship, courtesy, and

good judgment.

Become thoroughly familiar with the racing rules of the International Sailing

Federation,availablefromtheU.S.SailingAssociation.ereareabout70suchrules

that set conditions and deﬁne everyone’s rights and obligations.

Safety and Seamanship 137

e most famous sailboat race

is the America’s Cup. In this con-

test, another nation challenges the

current holder of the America’s

Cup. e United States success-

fully defended the cup since the

schooner America won the ﬁrst

racein1851,losingfortherst

timetoAustraliain1983.

Buddy Melges (left) and Bill Koch (right), winners of the

1992 America’s Cup and Sea Scout volunteers, along with

members of the winning crew.

Smaller Powerboats

ere are many sizes and shapes of powerboats, ranging from the canoe, which is

man-powered, to the supertanker. Each type of powerboat is designed and built for a

special purpose or to meet special conditions.

ere is an important relationship between where and how the boat is used, the

type of power, and the material of which the boat is constructed. Boats can be made of

wood, aluminum, plastic, cement, and ﬁberglass. Power choices include inboard engines,

outboard, and inboard-outboard motors—either jet or propeller type.

Some of the smaller powerboats Sea Scouts may use include the following:

Punts and skiﬀs are designed for smooth, sheltered water. e dory is designed to

meet conditions on the open sea.

Skiff

Punt

Dory

138 Safety and Seamanship

e pram and the dinghy are designed to carry people and gear from shore to larger

boats in sheltered anchorages. Light in weight, they can be carried on larger boats to

serve as tenders, or they can be lashed on top of a car for ﬁshing trips.

Dinghy

Pulling and powered surfboats are used for saving lives in heavy seas and surf.

Whaleboat–Pulling Boat

Underway in a Powerboat

Before getting underway from a mooring or dock or before launching the boat from

atrailer,makeacarefulcheckoftheboat,motor,andequipment.Removeandstowthe

boat’s cover, if she has one. Bail or sponge out any water that may have accumulated. Be

sure the drain plug is in place.

Check all equipment that is required by law and by common sense.

If it is necessary to install the motor, be sure the boat is secured to the dock or ﬂoat

with lines fore and aft. Check the mounting bracket to be sure the motor will slip easily

onto the transom.

While one person can easily swing a light motor aboard (being careful to keep the

weight centered in the boat), it will take two people to handle a large, heavy motor.

Makesurethetransombracketissetuptightandthatasafetychainiswellsecured.

Connect up all controls and fuel lines, if these are provided. Check the shaft angle of

the motor (it should be vertical to the surface of the water at normal operating speed

and trim). If the motor is already in place, release the tilt lock and drop the motor into

operating position.

Followthemanufacturer’sinstructionsforstartingandsettingthechoke,throttle,and

gearpositionsproperly.Runtheengineatlowspeedforaminuteortwotowarmitup.

It is important to acquire the feel of your boat as quickly as possible. Steering is the

same as for a car except—and this is important—the stern swings to bring the boat onto a

dierentheading.Keepthisinmindinclosequartersorwhenapproachingdocksoroats.

Able 7a.

Demonstrate your ability

to properly operate a

small boat equipped with

a motor. Included should

be fueling, starting, leaving

a dock, maneuvering, and

coming alongside.

Safety and Seamanship 139

Warning:Don’tcuttheforwardspeedtoorapidlyoryourwakemaycatchupwith

you and pour over the stern.

See how the boat handles in reverse. Practice maneuvering alongside an anchored

boat cushion to judge stopping distances, steering, stern swing, etc. Practice allowing for

the eﬀects of the wind and current.

Wharfs, Piers, Docks, and Slips

A wharf is a structure parallel to the shore (and usually attached to it) to which boats

and ships are tied. A pier is a structure perpendicular to the shore. Vessels can be tied

along either side. A dock is the space alongside a wharf or pier that the boat occupies.

You cannot tie a boat to a dock since the dock is the space the boat occupies. A slip is

the docking space between two piers. A marina usually contains many slips in a row. In

common usage the slip can include both the docking space, piers, and other structures.

Docking Orders to the Crew

On larger vessels there are speciﬁc orders used in connection with the handling of

lines at a dock.

Whendocking,theorderSTANDBYTODOCKputsthecrewatreadiness,each

standing by his or her station with his or her line coiled, ready to heave. If no one is

available at the dock to receive lines, other crew members stand ready to step ashore to

receive the lines.

AtthecommandHEAVETHEBOWLINE(orwhateverlineistobeused),the

deckhand assigned to this line heaves it to the dock.

TAKEINSLACKmeansthatdeckhandsaretopullintheslackandtakeaturnon

the cleat or bitt.

TAKEASTRAINmeansthatdeckhandsaretopullonthelinenamed,takinga

turn on the cleat or bitt but allowing it to slip.

EASEOFFmeansthatthelineistobeallowedtoslipomorefreely.

HOLDmeanstocheckthelinetemporarily.

SECURELINESmeanstomakefastpermanently,adjustingtoproperlength.

Onleavingadock,theorderSTANDBYTHELINEStellsthepeopleonthe

wharf or pier to be ready to cast oﬀ the lines and the people on the deck to be ready to

takethemin.isisfollowedbytheorderCASTOFFTHELINESatwhichtime

the dock men clear the lines from the bollards and toss them to the deck men, keeping

them clear of the water if possible.

Onasmallboat,theproceduresexplainedabovearegreatlysimplied.Dockingmay

involve one person stepping ashore for the bow and stern lines with simple instructions

from the skipper.

Warning: Never allow docking lines, or any other lines, to go over the side where

they can be sucked down into the propeller and wrapped around the shaft.

Mooring to a Pier

When making fast to a wharf or pier, suﬃcient and proper lines must be run out,

fenders placed, and provisions made to protect the ship in case of change of tide or

wind, or against the wash of passing vessels.

Forashortstay,bowandsternlinesareadequate,andsomeoneshouldremainon

board to fend oﬀ if necessary. e sketch shows the proper way to moor for a long stay.

Note the diagonal lines. ese are to gradually check slight movements of the vessel

away from the wharf so that sudden strain will not snap the lines. ey also prevent any

motion ahead or astern.

Able 7b.

Know the names and func-

tions of lines used to secure

a vessel to a wharf or pier.

Understand and execute

docking commands used

in handling lines on your

ship’s primary vessel.

Quartermaster 7a.

Take charge of the craft

used by your ship and give

all commands to the crew

for picking up a mooring

buoy and properly mooring

the vessel in several wind

and current situations.

140 Safety and Seamanship

Mooring to a Pier

1. Bowline 3. Breast Line 5. Spring Line 7. Stern Line

2. Bowline 4. Spring Line 6. Breast Line 8. Stern Line

A good way to moor to a pier, especially when there is considerable current, is to set an

anchor astern, leaving plenty of extra line coiled up on the after deck. en pass a bow line

to the pier. By slacking oﬀ on the stern line and hauling in on the bow line, the vessel can

be brought to the pier. Of course, this is only practical on a small boat, up to 40 feet.

Sometimes the vessel can be laid between bow and stern anchors, oﬀ the wharf or

pier, and a gangplank rigged for passage between ship and shore. A sailboat will some-

times lay to a pier with a single line and the mizzen set or the mainsail sheeted in ﬂat.

e wind, of course, must be oﬀshore to do this.

Mooring a Powerboat

In bringing a powerboat to a dock, take careful notice of wind and tide direction.

Rememberalsothatapowerboatsteersbythestern.Herpointofpivotingisnear

midships, on a center line. When the bow is directed to the right, the stern will swing to

the left. is must be allowed for in any close maneuvering.

Note stern swinging in opposite direction

from the bow. A turning vessel pivots near

center, not at the stern.

Tide or Wind

Pier

Safety and Seamanship 141

Mooring a Sailboat

Bringing a sailboat to a dock is a ticklish job. With wind in the right direction, of

course, the boat is simply luﬀed, that is pointed directly into the wind so the sails slat

idly, and a line is passed to the pier. Under other conditions, however, much practice and

a thorough understanding of the art of sailing and the boat itself are necessary.

Never Approach

from Windward

Wind

Let Sheets Run!

Fendersarehungoverthesidebutareneverallowedtorubagainstthewharforpier,

which is usually tarred and in no time would streak up the topsides. A timber is hung

outboard from the fenders as indicated.

Using Fenders Properly

Long Plank Rope or Cork Fenders

Maneuvering at a Dock

e possibilities of maneuvering a boat around docks and moorings are almost

inﬁnite in number. e boat’s characteristics, the wind and tide, and types of rudders

and propellers are all considerations. You should think out the maneuver in advance,

stepbystep,tokeeptheboatundercontrolatalltimes.Hereareafewsituationsthat

may confront you.

Approaching the Wind: Turn to face the

wind or tide, get a bow line out ﬁrst, and

let the stern drift alongside.

Wind or Tide

142 Safety and Seamanship

Approaching Against the Wind:

Maneuveralongsidethepier,getabowline

out ﬁrst, and let the stern drift alongside.

Wind or Tide

Approaching the Windward Side: Stop

alongside and parallel, drift into the pier.

e bow will probably touch ﬁrst. Wind

Tide

Drift

Approaching the Leeward Side

(Springing In): Touch with the bow, put

abowspringlineout.Goforwardunder

power with the rudder away from the pier

to swing the stern in.

Wind

Tide

To Reverse Heading While at Pier:

Put out double bow lines, swing the

rudder toward the pier, and go forward

under engine power. When halfway

around, stop the engine, reverse; then, as

the bow strains against the opposite line,

proceed as before.

To Warp From a Pierhead to

Alongside: Put out the stern spring

line, rudder toward pier and reverse on

the engine, tending the bow line. As the

boat swings alongside, slack and tend the

spring line.

To Warp From Alongside to a

Pierhead: Putoutabowspringline.Go

forward with the rudder amidships, until

pivot point is beyond the pier head. en

put the rudder toward the pier and, as

the boat comes around, put the rudder

away from the pier.

Quartermaster 7b.

Demonstrate and teach

the principles of springing

into and out from a dock,

from both bow and stern,

using an engine depending

on the type of vessel

used by your ship.

Safety and Seamanship 143

Right and Wrong Manner to Leave a

Pier: Goforwardwiththerudderamid-

ships and, as speed is picked up, move

away from the pier slightly, increasing

the angle as the boat slowly clears

the pier. To set the rudder sharply away

from the pier, as the boat leaves, will

swing the stern into the wharf with force

that may damage the boat.

Wrong Right

Clearing a Pier When Between Two

Boats (Springing Out): Put out a bow

spring line and, with the rudder toward

the wharf or pier, go forward on the

engine. When clear, cast oﬀ and reverse;

then go forward.

Heaving a Line

A few preparations and practice will give you the ability to handle a line properly.

ere are four things to remember.

1. e line must be considerably longer than the distance it is to be thrown or it

will probably fall short of the target.

2. e line must be coiled carefully and evenly with the draw of the loops toward

the free end; the loops should be smaller than those made for other purposes.

3. Holdtheshipboardendofthelineinonehandandthecoiltobethrownin

the other.

4. e coil must be thrown properly—in an underhand motion with a strong,

swingingmotion.Releaseitwhenthearmiswellabovetheshouldersandat

not too great a distance. Always aim at the head and shoulders of the person

receiving it. Otherwise, the throw is apt to be low. If necessary, a weight can be

used to help carry the line a greater distance, but in small-boat handling this

is seldom necessary.

Water-Skiing

Boatmen are infuriated when water-skiers violate the rules of common sense.

• Neverwater-skiinananchorageorchannel,ornearaswimmingbeachor

anchored boats.

• Pickanopenareawhereyouwillnotinterferewithanyone.

• eremustalwaysbetwopeopleinthetowingboat—onetooperatetheboat,the

other to observe the skier and tend the towline. Some states require a rearview mirror.

• Skiersshouldwearalifejacketeveniftheyareverystrongswimmers.Awipeout

at high speed can stun and disorient the most experienced skier.

• Learnthestandardsignalsforwater-skiingandobservethem.Havefun,butuse

good judgment.

Apprentice 7.

Demonstrate the ability to

use a heaving line.

144 Safety and Seamanship

Standard Hand Signals for Water-Skiers

Speed Up

Slow Down

Everything OK

Turn

Go Back to Pier Stop

Cut Your Motor

Trailering Your Boat

One of the great advantages of small boats is their mobility. A stout car hitch that is

well secured is essential, and the trailer itself should be adequate for the load. Become

familiar with the laws of your state regarding trailers, licenses, insurance, equipment,

lights, safety chains, and restrictions on the overhang distance for masts, etc.

Be sure your boat is positioned properly on the trailer and that it is well supported at

all contact points.

Proper balance is important. One person should be able to lift the loaded trailer easily

to attach it to the car hitch. Always be sure the boat is tied down properly and secured

againstfore-and-aftslippage.Mosttrailersareequippedwithloadingwinches,and

many have tilting arrangements to facilitate loading and launching.

When ready to put your boat in the water, look for an established launching ramp.

Otherwise, pick a gentle slope with a surface ﬁrm enough to support the wheels.

Be sure there is suﬃcient water depth to ﬂoat your boat. Back down to the water at

right angles. Avoid, if possible, backing the trailer in deeper than the wheel’s hubcaps.

Water—especiallysaltwater—canruinthewheelbearinglubricant.Donotlaunch

while wheel bearings are hot.

Safety and Seamanship 145

Before launching, release all tiedowns, lock the motor in tilt position, release the

bow winch, and rig a line to draw the boat back in when it ﬂoats free of the trailer.

Disconnectthetrailerlightstoavoidburningoutabulbwhenyouusethebrakes.

When all is ready, push the boat oﬀ the trailer or tilt the trailer so the boat rolls oﬀ.

Removethecarandtrailertoaparkingspotanddrawtheboatuptothebeachuntil

you are ready to get underway.

Travel Tips

Before starting a trailer trip, check the security of the boat on the trailer. If you load

gearintotheboat,distributetheloadevenlytomaintainbalance.Donotexceedtheload

capacity of the trailer. Be sure all state requirements are observed.

Check the wheel bearing lubricant, tire air pressure, lights, and the hitch and safety

chains (allow enough chain slack to make sharp turns.) Be sure the boat’s motor is

secure on the transom.

If you have a sailboat, place the mast so there is a minimum overhang, and attach a

red cloth to the end of the mast. Check all points of boat and gear contact, and pad, if

necessary, to avoid chaﬁng. Be sure the trailer tilt and winch locks are in place.

Itisrecommendedthatfueltanksbeemptywhentraveling.Fillthematyourdestination.

Rowing

Rowingisaskillacquiredbypractice.However,afewhintsmaybeofhelp.Before

startingtorow,becertaintheoarsaretherightlength.Goodoarsmengenerallyprefer

to have the ends of the oar handles touch each other or overlap slightly, since this gives

more power to the stroke.

e complete stroke is made up of four distinct movements:

1. Catch: placing the blades in the water ready to pull.

2. Pull: sweeping the blades aft to give headway.

3. Feather:raisingthebladesandturningthemat.

4. Recover:swingingtheoarstothepositionofcatch.

To give the stroke full power, keep the upper edge of the blades at the surface of the

water, your hands as level as possible. ey should move fore and aft in a smooth motion.

As the stroke is ﬁnished, give your wrists a smart ﬂip so the blades come out of the

wateratabouta45-degreeangle.Keepyourelbowsclosetothebodyandyourback

straight, chin up and in, and your feet against the stretcher or otherwise well braced.

Your weight should be centered slightly abaft.

e pin-type rowlock will not permit proper rowing technique. is kind of oarlock

is used principally on lakes for trolling where the oars are often trailed. A ring rowlock is

better, and a preventer inboard of the oar is used so the oar will not move overboard.

In rowing, learn to set a course making due allowance for tide or wind. Once your

course has been determined, steer by the wake or by taking a range over some point oﬀ the

quarter. It is tiresome to be turning continually after every few strokes to look forward.

Ordinary 7d.

Demonstrate your ability

to handle a rowboat by

doing the following: row in

a straight line for a quarter

mile, stop, make a pivot

turn, return to the starting

point and backwater in a

straight line for 50 yards/

meters. Make a turn and

return to the starting point.

146 Safety and Seamanship

1. Catch

2. Pull

3. Feather

4. Recover

Rowing

Safety and Seamanship 147

GROUND TACKLE

Groundtackleisageneraltermfortheanchors,cables,warps,springs,etc.,usedfor

securing a vessel at anchor.

Anchor Parts

Consider the parts of the old-fashioned anchor or its very close relative, the yachts-

man’s stock anchor in general use today. e shank, which is the main stem of the

anchor, is its most important part. e arms, branching oﬀ from the bottom of the

shank, form the holding element. ey are slightly curved and branch upward at an

angle. e arms join the shank at the crown. At the upper side, on either side of the

shank, is the throat. When a buoy rope is hitched about an anchor, it is attached here.

e arms are tipped by the ﬂukes or palms and these in turn by the bill or pee. e

metal shod boards on the bow of ships are called billboards, where the bill of the anchor

touches the side when hoisted inboard.

e outside of the palm, where the ﬂuke tapers down and acts as a support, is called

the blade.

e stock is the part that turns the anchor into an attitude that enables the ﬂukes to dig

into the bottom. Just above the stock, the upper end of the shank carries a large eye where

the anchor shackle is attached. is is where the anchor cable is joined to the anchor.

Danforth Anchor

Shank Stock

Crown

Fluke

Ordinary 8a.

Name the parts of a

stock anchor and a

stockless anchor.

BLADE

148 Safety and Seamanship

Types of Anchors

Yachtsman’s or Old-Fashioned

e yachtsman’s anchor is very similar to the anchor used for centuries that had a

wooden stock. In suitable weight, it has excellent holding power. e stock, running

across the shank, is designed to make the anchor lie on the bottom so that when a

horizontal pull comes from the boat, the ﬂuke digs into the bottom.

e yachtsman’s anchor in general use today is constructed so the stock slides

through the shank and folds down alongside it for convenience in stowage. e one

disadvantage of the yachtsman’s anchor is that it can easily be fouled by the protruding

ﬂuke as the boat swings or “walks” while anchored.

Navy Anchor

e stockless or navy anchor, sometimes called patent, has no stock and, therefore,

is free of the danger of fouling the cable. Its eﬀectiveness depends on its weight and the

bottom conditions that enable the ﬂukes and heavy crown to dig in.

e crown is pivoted on the end of the shank and this allows the ﬂukes to turn down

into the bottom. is type of anchor is used on large ships that can handle and stow it

eﬃciently. e navy anchor is not eﬀective for small craft.

Lightweight Anchors

e most widely used anchors for small craft today are the lightweight type.

DevelopedbyR.S.Danforthin1939,thisdesignproducesstrongholdingpower

because of thin large ﬂukes that heavy strains bury deeply. Instead of a stock through the

headoftheanchor,theDanforthhasaroundrodthroughthecrownthatpreventsthe

anchor from rolling. is type of anchor has the unique feature of being equally adapt-

able to large or small craft.

Another comparable model is the Northill. is anchor is light and relatively

eﬃcient. e Northill has a stock at the crown instead of at the ring end, adding to the

anchor’s holding power when the ﬂukes are buried. e arms are at right angles to the

shank, and the broad ﬂukes are set at a carefully engineered angle to ensure a quick bite

into the bottom.

AnotherecientanchoristheCQR,orplow,ofEnglishdesign.Asitdoesnothave

astock,itrarelyfouls.Ithastheabilitytodiginagainpromptlyevenaftera180-degree

change of direction of a boat at anchor caused by changes in the wind or tide. is type

of anchor is not stowed as easily as some of the other lightweight anchors.

Mushroom Anchor

e mushroom anchor is standard for permanent moorings. In heavy weights, it has

excellent holding power. It has a cast-iron bowl at the end of the shank.

Homemade Anchor

You can fashion a simple anchor by placing a large bolt in a No. 10 can and then

ﬁlling the can with concrete. is is suitable only for a very small boat in calm waters.

Grapnels

e grapnel is frequently used by small craft for temporary use. It has three or more

ﬂukes uplifted around the shank. It is a handy piece of equipment for retrieving gear lost

overboard by dragging along the bottom.

Ordinary 8b.

Describe ﬁve types of

anchors. Describe how each

type holds the bottom, the

kind of bottom in which

it holds best, and the

advantages or disadvantages

of each type.

Navy Anchor

Danforth

Plow or CQR

Mushroom Anchor

Homemade Anchor

Grapnel

Safety and Seamanship 149

Sea Anchor

A sea anchor is used to stabilize a boat in heavy weather by providing drag and slow-

ing the vessel. Since it does not attach to the sea bottom, the sea anchor acts as a brake

by pulling large amounts of water along as the boat moves forward to counter the eﬀects

of high winds. Sea anchors can be improvised from spare parts on board if a commercial

sea anchor or drogue is unavailable. Commercial sea anchors are typically shaped like

a parachute or cone. ey ﬂoat just below the surface of the water with the larger end

pointing in the direction of the boat’s movement.

Sea Anchor or Drogue

Anchor Selection

Choosing the proper anchor or anchors for any given boat depends on several factors:

the load that the boat may place on an anchor, the types of bottom in which a particular

anchor may be used, and the type of anchor rode and anchoring materials. All of these

are interrelated.

e load that a particular boat may place on its ground tackle depends upon its

weight and several external conditions such as the force created by the wind above the

waterline, the currents below the waterline, and the wave action at any particular time.

A good rule of thumb for cruising sailboats calls for a working anchor weighing

about one pound per foot of the boat’s overall length, plus a “storm” anchor of about

twice that weight for bad weather. A “lunch hook” of about half a pound per foot may

besatisfactoryfortemporaryanchoring.Motorboatsandcenterboardsailboatsmayuse

smaller anchors.

All of these weights may be reduced for the more eﬃcient lightweight anchors, but

increased for the navy-type ones. Check with the anchor manufacturer’s recommenda-

tions before trusting the holding power of any anchor.

e holding power of an anchor varies greatly with the type of bottom. An anchor

that might develop 1,500 pounds of holding power in hard sand may only be able to

hold a 500-pound load in a soft bottom. You cannot always tell in advance where you

might anchor your ship, so you must have ground tackle available for the most diﬃcult

anchoring conditions you might face.

e horizontal pull generated by a particular boat will determine the type of anchor

rode. To be eﬀective, the rode must be long and strong enough. e length of the

rode—or scope—must be such that the pull on the anchor shank is almost horizontal.

Ascopeofatleast7to1,seventimesaslongastheverticaldistanceathightidefrom

the bow chock to the bottom, is considered safe. In storm conditions, you may need

10:1 to ensure a horizontal pull on your anchor.

Forexample:Ifyouareanchoringin12feetofwaterandthedistancefromyour

bow chock to the water is three feet, you should pay out seven times the total of 15 feet

or 105 feet of anchor rode. Any scope less than 5 to 1 would be considered unsafe in

anything but very calm weather.

Ordinary 8c.

Calculate the amount of

anchor rode necessary for

your ship’s primary vessel in

the following depths:

10, 20, 30 feet in normal

and storm conditions.

150 Safety and Seamanship

Small-craft anchor rodes are usually made of rope. Until the newly developed

syntheticropescameontothemarket,Manilahadbeenthetraditionalropeforanchor

rodes.Manilaisweakerthanthesyntheticmaterialsanddoesnothavetheelasticity

of synthetic ﬁbers, particularly nylon, which is strong, light, easy to handle, and elastic.

Nylon is particularly eﬀective in minimizing shock loads caused by winds and tides. e

syntheticmaterialsdryquickerandaremoredurablethanManila.

A short chain between the end of the rope line and the anchor is eﬀective. It tends to

lie on the bottom and further lessens the shock by adding weight to help maintain the

important horizontal pull.

All components of the anchoring materials should be joined with good-quality

galvanized shackles, and the line should have an eye with a thimble where it meets the

chain to reduce abrasion as much as possible.

In constructing a proper anchor rode, limit the working load to one-ﬁfth of the rated

breaking strength of the rope and one-half of the proof test of the chain used. us, a

boat developing a load of some 2,000 pounds should have a rode in which the rope is

rated at 10,000 pounds.

Plow Anchor Rig

Stowage of Ground Tackle

ough some small boats carry only a single anchor, this is by no means adequate. Even

if you discount the possibility of fouling an anchor so that it cannot be retrieved, there are

many occasions when it is desirable to lay two anchors. Also, having just one anchor heavy

enough for heavy-weather conditions would be a nuisance in ordinary conditions.

Manyboatscarrythreeanchors.Twoarekeptondeck,readyforuse.Alightone

is used for brief stops while someone is aboard. A medium-weight anchor is used for

ordinary service, including overnight anchorage in a harbor. e third anchor might be

considered a spare that has been chosen for extreme holding conditions. It is usually

carried below.

To prevent deck anchors from coming adrift when the boat rolls and pitches, carry

them in chocks and be sure they are securely lashed.

Except for very small craft that carry their line coiled forward on the deck or in an

open cockpit, the usual practice in boat manufacture is to provide rope and chain lockers

in the forepeak. Chain dries quickly as it comes from the water and can be fed down

through a deck pipe as it comes oﬀ the winch or is hauled by hand.

IfManilaropeisused,itshouldbethoroughlydriedbeforeitisstowedinthechain

locker. Some boats have gratings on the deck as an aid in drying rope. e chain lockers

Able 8a.

Describe the various

kinds of anchor rode and

the advantages and

disadvantages of each type.

Able 8b.

Identify the parts of the

anchor cable starting with

the anchor and ending

at the vessel.

Safety and Seamanship 151

should be well ventilated to permit circulation of air. A dark, wet locker is a likely place

for dry rot to happen.

Anchors and chain often become foul from the muddy bottom of harbors and should

bewashedbeforestowage.Manilarequirescareifitistogivegoodserviceasananchor

rode. It is subject to chafe and deterioration and should be inspected often.

Anchor Cable for Larger Vessels

Larger vessels sailing in deeper water require large amounts of chain when anchoring.

Modernanchorchainismadeofdie-lockchainwithstudstopreventthechainfrom

kinking and the links from damaging adjacent links.

Stud Link Chain

e lengths of chain that are connected to make up a ship’s anchor cable are called

shots. A standard shot is 15 fathoms (90 feet) long.

Shots of anchor chain are joined by a detachable link which is painted so sailors can

quickly know how much anchor chain has been paid out. In the military, for example, at

15 fathoms (one shot) the detachable link is red. One link on either side is painted white.

At 30 fathoms (two shots) the detachable link is white and adjacent links are white. Links

next to the detachable link in the next-to-last shot are painted yellow to alert the crew that

they are running out of chain. Each link in the last shot is painted red.

Recreationalboaterswithsmallervesselshaveadoptedavarietyofmethodstomark

chain and each will work as long as everyone on board understands the markings and

whattheymean.Manyusethemilitarysystem,butothersmarktheirchainevery10

feet. Some use paint and others use colored strips of cloth.

Anchoring

ere are certain basic steps to be taken in anchoring small boats under

normal conditions.

Approaching the Anchorage

Donotanchorwhereitissoshallowthereisapossibilityofbeingagroundatlow

water. Conversely, you need not anchor in 50 feet of water if you can ﬁnd 20 feet a little

closer to shore.

One prudent rule in strange waters is to check the depth of the water in the area of

any possible swing of the boat with a lead line or suitable measuring device. Note the

location of other boats or empty moorings so you will not anchor so close to boats that

you swing into others with shifts of tide or wind.

Hardsandistherstchoiceforthebottom.Softmudisthelast.Arockybottomis

generallybetweenthesetwo.However,youcannotknowjustwhatthebottomisuntil

after the anchor is down.

Able 8c.

Describe the methods

of marking chain and

demonstrate that you know

the chain markings on

your ship’s vessel.

Quartermaster 8b.

Know the methods of

bringing a vessel to anchor

and a mooring with special

emphasis on wind and

current with respect to the

vessel’s course and speed.

152 Safety and Seamanship

Dropping Anchor

Under either power or sail, come up to your chosen anchorage into the wind or tidal

current (whichever is stronger). Under power, bring the boat to a dead stop and then

reverse very slowly. At this point a crew member already stationed forward lowers the

anchor gently, always maintaining control of the rode. Never throw an anchor.

Reversetheboatslowlyastherodeispaidouttokeeptheanchorfromgetting

fouled.Keepreversinguntilittakesholdandamplescopehasbeenpaidout.Ifthe

anchor drags at this point, it is usually because it has been fouled or is resting on poor

holding ground at the bottom.

If it does drag, then you must raise the anchor and try it again. Once the anchor takes

hold, check to be certain you are clear of the shore and other boats before shutting oﬀ

the engine. Under sail, of course, you cannot reverse your boat to help you take hold.

However,youcanusethetideorwindasanaturalreversingpower.

At the moment you come to a standstill, drop the anchor quickly, but smoothly, and

pay out ample scope. en belay the rode to the bitt or a cleat and wait until you are

certain the anchor is not dragging.

At Anchor

Orders to the Crew

Before anchoring or weighing anchor, the crew must know what is expected of them.

Dutiesanddeckpositionsneedtobeexplainedandassigned.ereisusuallysome

distance between those handling the anchor and the helmsman; so if radios are not

available, basic hand signals need to be established so the helmsman and anchor handler

can communicate.

Basichelmcommandsare:LETGOTHEANCHORorDROPTHE

ANCHOR,RETREIVETHEANCHOR,FEEDOUTMORESCOPE,and

SNUBorCLEATOFFTHEANCHORRODE.

Anchorhandlersneedtocommunicate:ANCHORISREADY,ANCHORIS

AWEIGH(up)orDOWN,ANCHORISINSIGHT,ANCHORISCLEAR,

ANCHORISSECUREDFORSEA.eanchorhandlersometimesneedstocom-

municate the need to move forward, into neutral or reverse.

If you are in a crowded anchorage, experiencing poor weather conditions, or are

concerned that you may drag anchor, an anchor watch should be established. While on

duty, the anchor watch should:

• Conductfrequentvisualchecksoflandmarksandsurroundingboats.Checktheir

position relative to yours to see if your anchor or a nearby boat is dragging.

• MonitorGPS,VHF,otherelectronics,andhaveanairhornready.

• Keepyoureyeondepth,windspeedanddirection,andtheanchorrode.

• Ifanotherboatdragstowardyou,preparetofend.

Quartermaster 8c.

Take charge of a vessel used

by your ship and give all

commands to the crew

for setting and weighing

anchor in several wind and

current situations.

Able 8d.

While on a cruise, assist

in the construction of an

anchor watch schedule and

stand one watch.

Safety and Seamanship 153

Leaving the Boat

If you go ashore after properly anchoring, note carefully the boat’s relative bearing to

other boats, or better still, to nearby shore objects. By doing this, you can spot a change

in your ship’s position caused by the anchor dragging.

If a boat stays at anchor during a change of tide or wind shift, she may swing through

a180-degreearc.ismovementcanfoultherodeofsometypesofanchors,twisting

it around an arm or stock, causing the ﬂuke to be easily pulled from the bottom. Under

these conditions it is wise not to leave a boat unattended.

Weighing Anchor

When under power, move slowly toward the anchor while a crewman forward hauls in

the slack of the rode. When the anchor breaks loose, come to a stop while you bring it in.

is must be done carefully to avoid gouging the boat. If your boat is allowed much headway

while bringing in the anchor, there is a good possibility of damaging it with the anchor.

When the anchor is brought aboard, it should be secured at once. e wet line

should be allowed to dry before stowing.

If the anchor does not break loose easily, bring the boat carefully up to the approxi-

mate position of the anchor and belay the rode to the foredeck bitt. After this, apply just

enough power to give steerageway and run the boat past the anchor. If it does not work

the ﬁrst time, try this maneuver again.

Under sail you can usually sail right up to the anchor, while a crewman takes in slack

slowly and raises the anchor as described above. If the anchor is ﬁrmly embedded in the

bottom, you may have to sail forward to put added strain on the rope in the opposite

direction to the anchoring pull.

If you know beforehand that the bottom where you plan to anchor your boat is likely

to be foul, use a trip line. is is merely a light but strong line secured to the crown of

the anchor long enough to reach a pickup buoy that is left ﬂoating on the surface. When

the time comes to weigh anchor, the buoy is retrieved and the trip line pulled to haul the

anchor out crown ﬁrst.

Sometimes it is necessary to carry the anchor away from the ship in a small boat.

e ship is then pulled to it by means of capstans or winches. is is called kedging.

Groundedvesselsmaysometimespullthemselvesclearinthismanner.

When a boat lies mostly at her home port, it is best to set a permanent mooring. is

would make her more secure than being at anchor. A safe permanent mooring must be

able to hold in any weather condition. It must be as antifouling as possible.

A mooring anchor should be of the mushroom type in muddy or sandy bottoms.

ere should be a bulb on the upper end of the shank to help keep the anchor down in

a digging position.

Mooring Tackle

154 Safety and Seamanship

A common rule of thumb for mushroom anchor weights is about 10 pounds for every

foot of the boat’s overall length. is may be lessened somewhat for small, lightweight

racing sailboats, but should be increased for larger cruising craft, both power and sail.

In hard or rocky bottoms, other types of moorings with suﬃcient weight would be

adequate.Discardedrailroadwheels,concreteblocks,oldengineblocks,etc.,mightmake

adequate permanent mooring anchors, but in really bad storms, the mushroom anchor

is the most eﬀective anchor.

e chain used in permanent moorings is standard link steel chain that is usually

galvanized to resist corrosion. e diameter should be large enough for a holding power

consistent with the strain that will be placed on it.

Some two-thirds of the total length of chain to be used should be of heavy chain

(¾ to one inch in diameter). e balance should be lighter. e chain and all ﬁttings

should be checked annually for any possible looseness or worn links.

e mooring buoy that the light chain connects to is often a steel sphere, although

often wooden spars or Styrofoam buoys are used. If a metal buoy is used, it should have

some form of a bumper to cushion any possible striking against the boat’s hull.

e pendant or line by which a boat is connected to the mooring buoy should be

aboutthesamestrengthasthechainandoftenismadeofManilaornylon.Nylonis

goodforseveralseasons;Manilashouldbereplacedeachyear.Asthependantwillrun

through the bow chock at angles depending upon the swinging of the boat, the edges of

the chock should be smooth to minimize any abrasions. e pendant itself should be

protected by tape, cloth, canvas, or a hose tied around it to protect it from chaﬁng where

it rubs along the chock.

e pickup buoy can be made of many things. Whatever the material, it should have

a ring or handle on top to aid in picking it up.

Capstan

e capstan is a rotating device, operated by power or by hand, employed on board

ship for the application of extreme power to ropes and wires in the hauling in of heavy

objects such as an anchor. e main element of a capstan is its upright drum or barrel,

which distinguishes it from a windlass.

Head

Pigeon Holes

Barrel

Whelps

Pawls

Pawl Ring

Base

Able 8e.

Identify a capstan or

windlass and explain its

use in handling line, wire

rope, or chain.

Safety and Seamanship 155

Windlass

A windlass is a powerful winch on which a rope can be taken in or paid out.

In the old days the windlass consisted of a horizontal barrel of wood around which a

cable was wound. is was mounted on a windlass frame and revolved, the barrel being

ﬁtted with pawls, and with a brake arm and driving gear working with ratchets.

e modern windlass embodies these same principles. It is driven by a steam engine

or a motor but can be worked by hand. Usually, there is a capstan on the forecastle head

which works the windlass by means of a screw running in the driving gear.

Safety and Seamanship 157

NAVIGATION RULES

When driving a car, we must know traﬃc laws and rules of the road. When piloting

a ship we must know maritime laws and rules of the nautical road. Navigation Rules,

International and Inland is a system of laws to help you stay clear of other vessels.

ere are two sets of rules, international and inland. With a few exceptions, interna-

tional and inland rules are identical. International rules are in eﬀect on the ocean beyond

a line of demarcation usually at the harbor entrance. Inland rules apply to harbors, rivers,

andinlandlakes.AfewadditionalrulesareineectfortheGreatLakesandwestern

rivers, and mariners cruising these waters should note them.

e “rules of the road” are found in the book Navigation Rules, International and Inland

(COMDTPUBP16672.2[series])publishedbytheU.S.CoastGuard.ispublication

maybepurchasedfromtheSuperintendentofDocuments,U.S.GovernmentPrinting

Oﬃces in most major metropolitan centers. e entire Navigation Rules, International and

InlandcanbeaccessedanddownloadedfromtheU.S.CoastGuard’sNavigationCenter

Web site at www.navcen.uscg.gov/mwv/navrules/rotr_online.htm.

Forupdatesregardingyourlocalwaters,gototheU.S.CoastGuard’sNavigation

CenterWebsitetocheckforrecentchanges.A“NoticetoMariners”ispostedhere

and it advises mariners of important matters to navigational safety such as changes in

channels or aids to navigation.

Every vessel is governed by the rules applying to the waters she is on. It is very

important that the skipper and crew be familiar with all pertinent boating laws.

Courtesy and common sense dictate that small boats stay clear of larger vessels.

However,ifthereisanyriskofcollisionwhatever,therulesclearlyapplytolargeand

small vessels alike. Only strict observance of all rules by all vessels can ensure the mini-

mum danger. Every Sea Scout ship should have a copy of Navigation Rules on board.

Rules of the Road

Rule 2—Responsibility

“Nothing in these rules shall exonerate any vessel, or the owner, master, or crew

thereof,fromtheconsequencesofanyneglecttocomplywiththeseRulesorofthe

neglect of any precaution which may be required by the ordinary practice of seamen, or

by the special circumstances of the case.”

“InconstruingandobeyingtheseRules,dueregardshallbehadtoalldangersof

navigation and collision and to any special circumstances, including the limitations of

the vessels involved, which may make a departure from these rules necessary to avoid

immediate danger.”

Ordinary 9a.

Explain the purpose

of Navigation Rules,

International and Inland.

Able 9a.

Demonstrate a working

knowledge of Navigation

Rules, International

and Inland.

Ordinary 9b.

Know the general

“Rule of Responsibility.”

158 Safety and Seamanship

A rule may be departed from—that is, it may be disobeyed—only when circum-

stancesofthecasemakeitnecessarytoavoidimmediatedanger.Forexample,when

obeying the rule would run your vessel aground or into collision with a third vessel, or

when the vessel that is supposed to keep out of the way cannot do her duty and collision

is imminent, the responsibility rule allows you to take whatever action is necessary. Such

a situation might be caused by a disabled steering gear or sudden loss of power.

Rule 3—General Deﬁnitions

When the rules refer to a power-driven vessel, they mean any vessel propelled by

machinery, including steam, electricity, gasoline, and diesel, whether the vessel is also

under sail or not. A sailing vessel is any vessel proceeding under sail only, though she

may be equipped with power. A vessel is underway when she is not at anchor, or made

fast to the shore, or aground. It is not necessary to be moving through the water to be

“under way.”

A “vessel engaged in ﬁshing” means that nets, lines, trawls, or other ﬁshing apparatus

is in use and restricting the vessel’s maneuverability. Seaplanes are aircraft designed to

maneuver on water. A vessel “not under command” is a vessel that is unable to maneuver

by the rules because of some exceptional circumstance, and a “vessel restricted in her

ability to maneuver” is a vessel whose work restricts her ability to move as required by

the rules. A dredge is an example of a vessel restricted in her ability to maneuver. A

“vessel constrained by her draft” is a power-driven vessel that cannot deviate from the

course she is following because of her draft in relation to available depth and width of

the navigable water.

Dangeroussituationsrequiringquickdecisionsareoftenasnumerousfortheperson

at the helm of a boat as for the person behind the wheel of an auto, but are usually far

more complex. erefore, the person at the helm must know the rules well to be able to

analyze a situation quickly and apply the applicable rule correctly. Not every situation

can be discussed here, but the following describes the rudiments.

Steering and Sailing Rules

Rule 5—Lookout

“Every vessel shall at all times maintain a proper lookout by sight and hearing as well

as by all available means appropriate in the prevailing circumstances and conditions so

as to make a full appraisal of the situation and of the risk of collision.”

Rule 6—Safe Speed

Every vessel shall at all times proceed at a safe speed so she can take proper and eﬀec-

tive action to avoid collision and be stopped within a distance appropriate to prevailing

circumstances and conditions. In determining a safe speed, some of the factors that

should be taken into account are:

a) e state of visibility

b) e amount of other vessel traﬃc in the area

c) e maneuverability of your vessel

d) At night, the presence of background lighting

e) e state of the wind, sea, current, and proximity of navigational hazards

f ) e draft of your vessel in relation to the available depth of water

Safety and Seamanship 159

Rule 7—Risk of Collision

Every vessel shall use all available means appropriate to the prevailing circumstances

and conditions to determine if risk of collision exists, including the use of radar equip-

ment if installed and operational. If there is any doubt, such risk shall be deemed to

exist. Assumptions shall not be made on the basis of scanty information, especially

scanty radar information.

In determining if risk of collision exists, the following considerations shall be among

those taken into account:

a) Such risk shall be deemed to exist if the compass bearing of an approaching

vessel does not appreciably change; and

b) Such risk may sometimes exist even when an appreciable bearing change is

evident, particularly when approaching a very large vessel, a tow, or when

approaching a vessel at close range.

Situations for Proper Maneuvering

ere are three basic situations that can lead to collision aﬂoat—and an inevitable

lawsuit ashore: the meeting situation, the crossing situation, and the overtaking situation.

All of these situations are shown in the diagram.

None of the situations actually exist until two or more vessels are in sight or sound of

each other. Consider how quickly a situation might arise with another vessel suddenly

appearing out of a fog bank or around a river bend.

Normally, all of the situations can be observed in the making by simply taking a series

of bearings on the other vessel or, at night, her lights. If the bearings do not change

substantially from sight to sight, the two vessels

are on a collision course. e give-way vessel—

the one not having the right of way—is therefore

required to change course or speed or both.

Common sense is one of the best rules. It is

better to avoid a situation that might lead to a

collision than to try to remember the exact rule to

get you out of trouble.

If you are the skipper of the vessel in the

center of the diagram, you must keep out of the

way of any vessel approaching you in the arc

from dead ahead of you to 22.5 degrees abaft

your starboard beam. All the other vessels in

the diagram—except the meeting vessel—must

keep clear of you. Both you and the meeting

vessel must alter course as necessary to pass clear

of each other.

ABEAM ABEAM

MEETING VESSEL

112.5º

292.5º

160 Safety and Seamanship

Rule 12—Conduct of Vessels in Sight of One Another, Sailing Vessels

ese rules apply to sailing vessels except vessels racing among themselves. ese

rules do apply to racing vessels encountering others not in the race. Study them carefully.

a) When two sailing vessels are approaching one another so as to involve risk of

collision, one of them shall keep out of the way of the other as follows:

• Wheneachhasthewindonadierentside,thevesselthathasthewindon

the port side shall keep out of the way of the other.

• Whenbothhavethewindonthesameside,thevesselthatistowindward

shall keep out of the way of the vessel which is to leeward; and

• Ifavesselwiththewindontheportsideseesavesseltowindwardand

cannot determine with certainty whether the other vessel has the wind on

the port or on the starboard side, she shall keep out of the way of the other.

b) Forthepurposeofthisrule,thewindwardsideisthesideoppositetothaton

which the mainsail is carried.

Rule 13—Overtaking

e overtaking vessel is required to keep out of the way of the vessel being overtaken.

Power-driven vessels should keep to the starboard side of narrow channels.

A vessel is considered to be overtaking another when coming up from a direction

more than 22.5 degrees abaft her beam; and if a vessel is in any doubt as to whether she

is overtaking another, she should assume this is the case and behave accordingly.

Overtaking

Overtaking Vessel Stays Clear

Rule 14—Head-On Situation

Neither vessel may turn to port. If they are already so far left of one another that

they may pass safely without changing course, then they may do so. But if any change of

course is necessary to avoid risk of collision, the change must be to starboard.

Meeting

Each Holds Course

Sounds 1 Blast

Each Holds Course

Sounds 2 Blasts

Each Turns Right

Sounds 1 Blast

Ordinary 9c.

Deﬁne stand-on and

give-way vessels for the

following situations:

meeting, crossing, and

overtaking for both power

and sailing vessels.

Safety and Seamanship 161

Rule 15—Crossing Situation

e vessel that has the other on her starboard is required to keep out of the way by

altering course to starboard, slowing, stopping, or reversing. She may not turn to port.

e appropriate action will cause each vessel to pass the other port side to port side.

Hencetheoneshortblast.

Rule 18—Responsibility Between Vessels

Exceptwhere(Navigation)Rules9,10,and13otherwiserequire:

a) A power-driven vessel underway shall keep out of the way of:

• Avesselnotundercommand

• Avesselrestrictedinherabilitytomaneuver

• Avesselengagedinshing

• Asailingvessel

b) A sailing vessel underway shall keep out of the way of:

• Avesselnotundercommand

• Avesselrestrictedinherabilitytomaneuver

• Avesselengagedinshing

c) A vessel engaged in ﬁshing when underway shall, so far as possible, keep out

of the way of:

• Avesselnotundercommand

• Avesselrestrictedinherabilitytomaneuver

d) A seaplane on the water shall, in general, keep clear of all vessels and avoid

impeding their navigation. In circumstances, however, where risk of collision

exists, she shall comply with the rules of this part.

Lights and Shapes

By day, a vessel’s course or a change in her course is fairly obvious to the lookout. By

night or in limited visibility, however, little can be determined about the direction of

another vessel unless that vessel is lighted as required by the rules. Navigation lights

have required color, arc, range, and location.

Navigation lights provide information about the vessel’s size, activity, and direction of

travel. If you know the characteristics of navigation lights, you can take the appropriate

course of action when approaching other vessels.

Forexample,ifyouseeasolidgreenlightmovingonthewater,youareseeingthe

starboard side of a sailboat. A red light means its port side. If you see them both, the

sailboat is dead ahead. A white light higher than red means you are looking at the port side

of a powerboat, and white higher than green is starboard. If you see all three, the boat is

dead ahead. Sailboats and powerboats are both required to show white astern, so if you are

approaching a white light that is moving on the water, you are overtaking a vessel.

An anchored vessel must display an all-around light that is visible for two miles in

any direction. No other navigation lights should be on while a vessel is at anchor. Vessels

under seven meters do not need to display an anchor light, but it is a good idea to do so.

Vessels are required to show the proper navigation lights in all weather conditions

from sunset to sunrise, in limited visibility, and other times considered necessary. No

other visible lights that could be mistaken for navigation lights or lights that impair

visibility or interfere with keeping a proper lookout can be displayed.

Ordinary 9d.

Explain “Responsibility

Between Vessels”

(vessel priority).

162 Safety and Seamanship

Rule 21—Deﬁnitions

a) Mastheadlight.Awhitelightplacedovertheforeandaftcenterlineofavessel

showing an unbroken light over an arc of the horizon of 225 degrees and so

ﬁxed as to show the light from right ahead to 22.5 degrees abaft the beam on

either side of the vessel, except on a vessel less than 12 meters in length.

b) Sidelights. A green light on the starboard side and a red light on the port side

each showing an unbroken light over an arc of the horizon of 112.5 degrees and

so ﬁxed as to show the light from right ahead to 22.5 degrees abaft the beam on

its respective side. In a vessel of less than 20 meters in length, the sidelights may

be combined in one lantern carried on the fore and aft centerline of the vessel.

c) Stern light. A white light placed as nearly as practicable at the stern showing

an unbroken light over an arc of the horizon of 135 degrees and so ﬁxed as to

showthelight67.5degreesfromrightaftoneachsideofthevessel.

d) All-round light. A light showing an unbroken light over an arc of the horizon

of 360 degrees.

e) Flashinglight.Alightashingatregularintervalsatafrequencyof120

ﬂashes or more per minute.

Rule 22—Visibility of Lights

Vessels Less Than 12 Meters and 12 Meters or More but Less Than 20 Meters

Location

Visible Range in Miles

Arc in Degrees

Less Than

12 Meters

12 Meters to

20 Meters

Masthead light 2 3 225

All-round light 2 2 360

Side lights 1 2 112.5

Stern light 2 2 135

Rule 23—Power-Driven Vessels Underway

Power vessels underway will exhibit a masthead light forward, sidelights, and a

sternlight. Vessels less than 12 meters in length may exhibit an all-round white light and

sidelight.(PowerboatsontheGreatLakesmaycarryanall-roundwhitelightinsteadof

a second masthead light and sternlight combination.)

Rule 25—Sailing Vessels Underway and Vessels Under Oars

a) A sailing vessel underway shall exhibit sidelights and a sternlight.

b) A sailing vessel less than 20 meters in length may combine the sidelights

and sternlight in one lantern carried at or near the top of the mast where

it can be seen.

c) A sailing vessel underway may, in addition to sidelights and sternlight, exhibit

at or near the top of the mast, where they can best be seen, two all-round

lights in a vertical line, the upper being red and the lower green.

d) A sailing vessel of less than seven meters in length or a vessel under oars shall, if

practical, exhibit the lights prescribed in paragraph a) or b) of this rule, but if she

does not, she shall have ready at hand an electric torch or lighted lantern showing

a white light which shall be exhibited in suﬃcient time to prevent collision.

Ordinary 9e.

Explain the navigation

lights required for power-

driven and sailing vessels

underway. Explain what

is required for a vessel

under oars.

Able 9b.

Explain vessel lights for the

following: towing (astern,

alongside, pushing ahead,

and cannot deviate), ﬁsh-

ing, trawling, restricted

maneuverability, underwater

operations, constrained by

draft, and aground.

Able 9c.

Describe special lights and

day shapes deployed on

the following vessels—not

under command, restricted

by ability to maneuver,

constrained by draft, ﬁshing

(trawling), and sailing

vessels under power.

Safety and Seamanship 163

Seethecolorpage“LightsConformingtoRules23–31”intheappendix.

Day Shapes

Large vessels display certain lights at night and “day shapes” during daylight hours

toindicatetheyareinvolvedinspecialactivitiesorsituations.Foramorecompletelist,

consultU.S.CoastGuardpublications.Someimportantlightsanddayshapesare:

NIGHT DAY

Ship NOT UNDER COMMAND.

Due to unusual circumstances

the ship is out off control.

Two 360-degree red lights

displayed in a vertical line.*

Two black balls displayed in a

vertical line.

Ship RESTRICTED IN ABILITY

TO MANEUVER.

Ship cannot maneuver due

to the type of work being

performed aboard such as diver

down or dredging.

Three 360-degree red over

white over red lights displayed

in a vertical line.*

Black ball over black diamond

over black ball displayed in a

vertical line.

Vessel CONSTRAINED

BY DRAFT.

Vessel cannot maneuver out of

the channel due to draft.

Three 360-degree red lights

displayed in a vertical line.*

Black cylinder in rigging.

FISHING.

Boats ﬁshing with nets and

trawling (dragging nets).

360-degree green light over

white light.

Two black cones apex to apex.

NOT TRAWLING.

Boat ﬁshing other than

trawling.

360-degree red light over

white light.

Two black cones apex to apex; if

less than 20 meters may display

basket in rigging.

SAILING VESSELS UNDER

POWER.

Light prescribed for power-

driven vessel.

Conical shape in rigging with

apex pointing down.

*If the vessel is not anchored or aground, it shall also show side lights and a stern light.

Rule 34—Maneuvering and Warning Signals—Inland Rules

When power-driven vessels are in sight of one another and meeting or crossing at a

distance within half a mile of each other, each vessel underway, when maneuvering, shall

indicate that maneuver by the following signals on her whistle:

• Oneshortblast:“Iintendtoleaveyouonmyportside.”

• Twoshortblasts:“Iintendtoleaveyouonmystarboardside.”

• reeshortblasts:“Iamoperatingasternpropulsion.”

Upon hearing the one- or two-blast signal of the other vessel, if in agreement, you

shall respond with the same signal and take the necessary steps to eﬀect a safe passing.

If, however, for any cause, either vessel fails to understand the intentions of the other,

or doubts the safety of a proposed maneuver, she shall immediately sound the danger

signal of at least ﬁve short and rapid blasts on the whistle and each vessel shall take

appropriate precautionary action until a safe passing agreement is made. Whistle signals

can be supplemented with light signals.

When vessels are in sight of one another, a power-driven vessel intending to overtake

should indicate her intention by the following signals:

• Oneshortblast:“Iintendtoovertakeyouonyourstarboardside.”

• Twoshortblasts:“Iintendtoovertakeyouonyourportside.”

Vessels leaving a dock or berth, or nearing a river bend or similar blind spot, shall

sound one prolonged blast. e signal should be answered with a prolonged blast by any

approaching vessel that may be within hearing.

Ordinary 9f.

Describe the sound signals

for maneuvering, warning,

and restricted visibility.

164 Safety and Seamanship

1 Short Blast

2 Short Blasts

DANGER ZONE

(112½º)Stand On Vessel Holds

Course and Speed

GIVE WAY VESSEL

GIVES WAY

Stand On Vessel

(Overtaken)

Give Way Vessel

(Overtaking)

To Port To Starboard

1 Short Blast

PORT TO PORT

2 Short Blasts

STARBOARD TO STARBOARD

Rule 35—Sound Signals in Restricted Visibility

All vessels in or near an area of restricted visibility, whether by day or by night, must

sound fog signals at intervals of not more than two minutes. ey may sound no other

signal. Whistle signals for passing may not be sounded until vessels are within sight of

each other. A prolonged blast is four to six seconds in duration. A short blast is about

one second.

e fog signals are as follows:

• Power-drivenvesselsmakingway,oneprolongedblast

• Power-drivenvesselsunderwaybutstoppedandmakingnoway,twoprolonged

blasts with an interval of about two seconds between them

• Avesselnotundercommand;avesselrestrictedinherabilitytomaneuver,

whether underway or at anchor; a sailing vessel; a vessel engaged in ﬁshing,

whether underway or at anchor; and a vessel engaged in towing or pushing

another vessel, one prolonged blast followed by two short blasts

• Avesseltowed(ifmanned),oneprolongedblastfollowedbythreeshortblasts.

When practical, this signal shall be made immediately after the signal made by the

towing vessel.

• Avesselatanchor,bellrungrapidlyforveseconds

• Avesselaground,bellrungrapidlyforvesecondswiththreeseparateanddis-

tinct strokes on the bell immediately before and after the rapid ringing of the bell

Safety and Seamanship 165

AIDS TO NAVIGATION

Along the length of the coasts and navigable waters of the United States and its pos-

sessions, there are many aids to navigation, which are all those man-made objects used

by mariners to determine position or a safe course. ese aids range from steel, concrete,

or wood structures such as lighthouses, buoys, and beacons, to electronic navigation

aidssuchasradiobeaconsandGPS.Aidstonavigationincludeallthevisible,audible,

and electronic symbols that are established by government and private authorities for

piloting purposes.

eU.S.CoastGuardhasresponsibilityfordesigning,establishing,andmaintaining

morethan40,000navigationalaidsinthewatersoftheUnitedStates.eCoastGuard

also monitors thousands of state and privately maintained aids to navigation. Today our

nation has the biggest and best aids-to-navigation system in the world. In comparison,

GreatBritain,aseafaringnation,maintainsfewerthan550aidstonavigation.

is system, evolved through the years, has many variations. ey are as follows:

• U.S.NavigationSystem

• WesternRiverSystem

• UniformStateWaterwayMarkingSystem

• PrivateAidstoNavigation

Aids to navigation encompass a wide range of ﬂoating and ﬁxed objects. ey fall

into two basic categories:

1. Beacons—structurespermanentlyxedtothelandorseabed.Mostbeacons

have lateral or non-lateral aids attached to them. Lighted beacons are called

“lights,” unlighted beacons are “daybeacons.”

2. Buoys—ﬂoating objects anchored to the bottom. ey have distinctive shapes

and colors that communicate their purpose and how the mariner should

navigate around them.

Note: Buoys and beacons may have lights or sound-making devices attached. Both

buoys and beacons may be referred to as “marks.”

Light List

A complete list of aids to navigation is found in the ﬁve-volume Light List published

yearlybytheU.S.CoastGuard.VolumeIcoverstheAtlanticCoasttoLittleRiver,

SouthCarolina;VolumeII,thebalanceoftheAtlanticandGulfcoasts;VolumeIII,the

Paciccoastsandislands;VolumeIV,theGreatLakes;andVolumeV,theMississippi

Riversystem.e Light List and all charts should be corrected regularly from “Notice to

Mariners”aschangesinaidstonavigationaremade.

Able 9d.

Understand the system of

aids to navigation employed

in your area. Include buoys,

lights, and daymarks and

their signiﬁcance and

corresponding chart symbols.

166 Safety and Seamanship

Lighthouses

Lighthouses are important aids to seafarers and have been in use for centuries.

Lighthouses diﬀer markedly in their external characteristics. Each structure is built

tomeetthespecicdemandsofitslocation.Mosthaverecognizableproles.Eachis

colored to be easily identiﬁed by day, and each has its own characteristic light sequence

for identiﬁcation at night. By using all of the characteristics of a given lighthouse—light,

shape, materials, and color—a mariner can quickly identify it by day or night and plot

bearings from it.

e distance a light can be seen at sea in clear weather depends upon three things:

the height of the light itself above sea level (which is noted on the chart), the height of

the observer above the sea, and the candlepower of the light. Because of the curvature of

the earth’s surface, the higher a light is located above sea level, the farther it can be seen.

Manylighthousesareequippedwithsignalsthatserveaswarningsduringfoggy

weatherorotherperiodsofpoorvisibility.Regularlytimedblastsofahorn,siren,

or other signal identify most lighthouses. As a further navigational aid, marine radio

beacons have been installed at strategically located lighthouses.

Symbols for Lighthouses

e basic symbol for a lighthouse is a circle with an overprinted magenta disc and

an“exclamationmark.”Majorlightsarenamedanddescribedwhileminorlightsare

described only. e characteristics of the light are shown, and the height of the focal

plane of the lantern above mean high water is also shown. e nominal range is shown

(approximately) in miles, and other equipment on the station is listed.

If the lighthouse has a radio beacon, the magenta disc is surrounded by a magenta

circle and the radio frequency and identifying signal are described, and if the radio

beacon shares a frequency with other stations, the sequence within the group would be

indicatedbyaRomannumeral.

Certain lights are not visible through the 360-degree arc of the horizon, because of

interference by land masses. When a light is observed through a portion of its arc, the

symbol for the light on the chart is shown with an obscured sector.

Some lights contain a red sector to warn of special dangers within the arc of visibility

of the sector. When a light contains such a sector, it is shown on the chart.

Visibility of Lights

e distances at which lights may be seen are shown on charts and in the light list

as the nominal range. is is the distance the light can be seen under normal condi-

tionsforthearea.Hazeandfogcanreducethisrange,andunusuallyclearconditions

can increase it. e light’s luminous range is the distance it can be seen under current

conditions without considering the curvature of the earth. e geographic range is the

distance a light can be seen under perfect viewing conditions, limited only by the earth’s

curvature, and assuming that the observer’s eye is at sea level.

Daybeacons

Daybeaconsareanothertypeofnavigationalaid.esestructuresarebuiltofwood,

metal,ormasonry.Generally,theyarepaintedtocontrastwiththeirsurroundings.Whena

daybeacon is used to mark the side of a channel, the lateral system of coloring and num-

beringisused.Daybeaconsoftenhavereectorsforspottingatnightbysearchlight.

20Ft. 9M

Safety and Seamanship 167

Buoys

e buoy system may appear confusing with the many odd shapes, varied colors, odd

sounds, and complicated lights, but there is a system. It is called the lateral system and

is very cleverly devised to operate with a high degree of eﬃciency. Buoys are located to

warn of dangers and obstructions and to mark channels. e lateral system determines

the distinguishing shape, color, number, and light characteristics of buoys to indicate

the side on which each should be passed by vessels proceeding from seaward toward the

head of navigation.

Not all channels lead directly from seaward, so in certain places arbitrary rules have

been established to make the lateral system consistent. us a vessel is considered to be

proceeding from seaward when proceeding in a northerly and westerly direction along

thecoastoftheGulfofMexico,asoutherlydirectionalongtheAtlanticcoast,anda

northerly direction along the Paciﬁc coast.

OntheGreatLakes,thearbitrarydirectionfromseawardisnortherlyandwesterly.

OntheMississippiandOhioriversandtheirtributaries,fromseawardisupstream

towardtheriversources.AidsontheMississippiRiveranditstributariesarenumbered

according to mileage distances upstream from references points.

Port-Side Odd-Numbered Aids

Port-side numbered aids are green in color, odd-numbered, and may be lighted

(green light).

Port-side marks are on the left side of the waterway as you travel upstream, and the

buoy numbers will increase as you head upstream. (Chart depictions are shown next to

the marks.) Port-side buoys have a cylindrical appearance above the water, like a can or

drum ﬂoating on its end. ey are commonly referred to as “can” buoys.

Beacons. Port-side beacons have square marks attached to them, with two shades of

color and a reﬂective border.

Color pages illustrating navigation aids are in the appendix.

Starboard-Side Even-Numbered Aids

Starboard aids are red and have even numbers. ey will be on your right side as you

travel upstream. Buoy numbers increase as you head upstream, and they may have a red light.

Starboard-side buoys have an above-water appearance like a cylinder topped with

a cone, pointed end up. e cone may come to a point or be slightly rounded. ese

buoys are commonly referred to as “nun” buoys.

Starboard-side beacons have triangular marks attached to them, with two shades of

color and a reﬂective border.

168 Safety and Seamanship

Safe Water Marks

ese marks are used to mark fairways, mid-channels, and oﬀshore approach points.

ey have unobstructed water on all sides. ese marks may be lettered, and may be lit

with a white light. ey may also have a red top mark.

Isolated Danger Marks

ese indicate a danger that may be passed on all sides. ey are erected on or

moored on or near danger. ey should not be approached closely without special

caution. ey may be lit and they may be lettered.

Dayboards

ese diamond-shaped marks are used to help the vessel operator determine location

on a nautical map. When you see a dayboard and ﬁnd the corresponding mark on the

chart, you know your precise location. ey may be lettered and may be lit with a white

light. eir color reﬂects that of nearby lateral marks.

Special Marks

Special marks have no lateral signiﬁcance (meaning they don’t tell you which side of

the channel or river you may be on). ese marks are used to mark a special feature of

area.eseincludearealimitsforanchorages,shinggrounds,ordredging/spoilareas.

ese buoys may be lit, and if they are, it will be a ﬁxed or ﬂashing yellow light.

e shape is optional, but it usually follows the shape of nearby navigation buoys.

Safety and Seamanship 169

Characteristics of Lighted Buoys

To permit ready identiﬁcation and to avoid confusion with other lights, most lighted

buoys have distinct ﬂashing characteristics. ese characteristics are in the form of a

variety of ﬂashes (light periods) and eclipses (dark periods). ese characteristics are

indicated on charts and in the light lists by the following abbreviations:

 F Fixed

 Fl Flashing

 GpFl GroupFlashing

 QkFl QuickFlashing

Occ Occulting

 IQkFl InterruptedQuickFlashing

 S-LFl Short-LongFlashing

 EInt EqualIntervalFlashing

 Mo(A) MorseCodeLetterA

Additional symbols used in the light list to describe lights and their characteristics

are:R(red),G(green),W(white),s(seconds),(ash),andec(eclipse).Forexample,

thesymbolsFl.G.,2.5s(0.5s)inthelightlistjustbelowthenameoftheaidindicate

that this light exhibits a ﬂashing green light every 2.5 seconds, the ﬂash being 0.5

seconds duration followed by an eclipse (period of darkness) of 2.0 seconds.

e light rhythms on lighted buoys follow a pattern that helps the navigator identify

thelightanditsmeaning.Mid-channelbuoyswillalwaysshowawhitelightashingthe

MorsecodeletterA.Apreferredchannelaidwillshowaredorgreenlightdepending

on which channel is preferred and have a composite group ﬂashing light (2 + 1). Port

and starboard side buoys will show a green light to port and a red light to starboard.

eir light rhythms will vary from buoy to buoy in such a way that buoys will not be

easily confused. e lighting pattern will be marked on the chart.

Sound Buoys

Buoys equipped with sound signals are eﬀective in fog or whenever visibility is

limited. ese are classed as bell buoys, gong buoys, whistle buoys, or horn buoys. Each

is easily recognizable by its distinctive sound.

Bell buoys have four clappers hung loosely around the bell so the slightest motion of

thebuoycausesaclappertostrikethebell.Gongbuoyshavethreeorfourgongsofdif-

ferent tones, each with a separate clapper rung in turn by the motion of the buoy in the

sea. e air used in whistle buoys is compressed and released by the rise and fall of the

buoy from the movement of the sea. Buoys of this type are usually placed only where

there is suﬃcient motion to activate them. A horn buoy is sounded at regular intervals

by mechanical means.

Dependence on Buoys

AlthougheverycareisgivenbytheU.S.CoastGuardinmaintainingallnavigational

aids, the navigator must not rely entirely on the placement and lighted characteristic of

a buoy. Buoys may be carried away, sunk, shifted, or have lights extinguished by nature,

collision, or mechanical failure.

The Rule of Lettering

On all charts, lettering is printed in both vertical and slanted type. e rule is that if

an object is aﬂoat, or it covers and uncovers with tidal action of the water, the descriptive

wording or abbreviation is printed in slanted type. If the object is not aﬂoat, or if it does

170 Safety and Seamanship

not cover and uncover with the tide, the descriptive wording is printed in vertical type.

usamarinercantellataglanceifALPHAROCKisanisletorareef.Ifthewording

is printed in slanted type, it can at times be under water and thus may not be seen. All

descriptive lettering for ﬂoating aids to navigation is found in slanted type, while descrip-

tions of lighthouses, ranges, and other objects not aﬂoat are found in vertical type.

Intracoastal Waterway

e Intracoastal Waterway is the protected, shallow, inland water route along the

Atlantic seaboard from New Jersey to the waterways of south Texas. Pleasure boats and

shallow-draft commercial vessels use this waterway to avoid the more hazardous outside

passage in the open sea. Its system of buoys to navigation is basically the same as the

lateral system, but diﬀerent distinctive shapes and colors of buoys are used.

FortheseabuoysthatdelineatechannelsothecoastoftheUnitedStatesandfor

the Intracoastal Waterway, red is on the right (shore side) when proceeding clockwise

aroundtheU.S.fromtheEastCoasttotheGulfCoast,orproceedingnorthalongthe

West Coast.

ICW marks are further identiﬁed by a small yellow reﬂector at the bottom of the mark.

Numbers on buoys going south increase consecutively—odd numbers on the left,

evennumbersontheright.However,numbersstopatspecicpointscausedbynatural

dividing lines and start over again.

Western River (Mississippi River) System

Navigational aids on the western rivers consist of many types: unlighted buoys,

lighted buoys, shore lights, daybeacons, river gauges, and lights on bridges and locks.

ese aids are shown on river charts and also tabulated in the light list. Certain tribu-

tary rivers also have safety harbor and landing markers and direction boards.

IntheWesternRiverSystem,asaresultofcustomandusage,allaidsareconsidered

withreferencetotheowoftheriver.Redbuoysareontheleft-handbankandgreen

buoys are on the right-hand bank as seen from a vessel bound downstream.

is arrangement enables a radio-equipped vessel to communicate with an approach-

ing craft some distance away to report the exact position of any obstruction, misplaced

aid, or other hazard.

eshapesandcoloringofaidsontheWesternRiverSystemaremuchthesame

as elsewhere in the lateral system. e red (nun) buoys are on the left-hand side of the

navigable channel and the green (can) buoys are on the right-hand side as seen from a

vessel bound downstream. Unlighted buoys are equipped with reﬂectors as an aid at

night: nuns with red reﬂectors, cans with green reﬂectors. Unlighted red and green buoy

tops are painted white to increase their visibility at all times. In this case white is not

consideredadirectionalcharacteristic.Redandgreenhorizontalstripedbuoysmarking

junctions of the river, wrecks, or other obstructions do not have white tops. Quarantine,

anchorage, dredging, and special purpose buoys have the same color and markings as

those in the basic lateral system.

IntheWesternRiverSystem,unlighted buoys are not numbered. Numbers on

lighted buoys indicate only the number of miles from a given starting point.

Another type of navigational aid is the channel-marker shore light, mounted on a

wood structure, painted white.

Manyshorelightsshowthesamecharacteristicsasthelightedbuoys.Looking

downstream they show a ﬂashing white or green from the right bank and ﬂashing white

or red from the left bank. Sometimes the light is ﬁxed or occulting.

Safety and Seamanship 171

e channel is buoyed where it is narrow or makes a sharp bend. Where it is straight

for a considerable distance, channel shore lights are used as a guide. Each light is visible

from the one preceding it.

Foundinseparatedpairs,onehigherthantheother,range lights are usually small,

skeleton-type structures. ey are visible from one direction only. When they are in line,

you know you are on a safe course.

By steering a course that keeps these lights in line, you will remain in the channel. But

you must consult your charts to know where to leave the range course. Proceeding too

far might ground your vessel.

e range lights may be white, red, or green and may be ﬁxed or ﬂashing.

AlllightstructuresanddaybeaconsintheWesternRiverSystemareequippedwith

reﬂectors. As seen from a vessel bound downstream, they are red and white on the left

bank, green and white on the right bank. All reﬂectors are white unless shown as red or

green in the light list.

River gaugesaresignboardsatintervalsalongtheriverbanksintheWesternRiver

System. Each bears a single number to enable the experienced pilot to estimate the

depth of the water at a particular point. ese river gauges appear on all river charts.

e numbers are changed to conform to the seasonal level of the river.

ere are two printed aids to navigation that every river pilot should have available

for instant use: the light list and the river chart. ey are prepared and sold by the

Corps of Engineers. e charts show the sailing line or channel, around and between

islands in the river, as well as the mileage from a given point to the head of navigation.

Lights on locks and bridges guide the pilot through the many locks on the Western

RiverSystemandlocatethechannelbeneathbridges.

172 Safety and Seamanship

PILOTING AND NAVIGATION

Piloting and navigation are the art and science of guiding your vessel on its intended

path. ough piloting and navigation are closely related, the seaman considers piloting

the art of ﬁnding his way along a shore or in and out of harbors and rivers. Navigation,

then, is piloting oﬀshore but without the many aids to navigation close to land. e

pilotcanactuallyseetheshoreandlighthouses,rangesandbuoys.Hecanreadthe

depth under him and listen to various radio aids, foghorns, and bells. e navigator

mustproceedwithouttheseaids.Heorshemustrelyonthestorytoldbythecelestial

bodies, the speed of his ship, and his or her knowledge of the currents, tides, and the

vast ocean that he or she sails.

To get from place to place on land, we use a map. We depend on visual cues to guide

us and keep us safe. ere are no street names, lane markers, or road signs on water, and

a sailor must choose his own path. is is done with a chart that provides details such

as landmarks, water depth, navigational aids, channels and shorelines.

To pilot or navigate properly, you need the proper tools—compass, watch, chart,

pencil, dividers, parallel rules or plotter, and a calculator.

Charts

A chart is a detailed scale print

or representation (in indelible ink

on waterproof paper) of navigable

waters. All charts are projected to

overcome the curvature of the earth’s

surface. e round globe is projected

onto a ﬂat chart without loss of

accuracybywhatiscalledMercator

projection. e value of this is that a

straight course appears as a straight

line on a chart.

Pole

Parallel of Latitude

Meridian of Longitude

Equator

A chart is a small section “peeled” from the cylinder

or projection.

Chart

A Mercator Projection

Ordinary 10a.

Demonstrate your

understanding of latitude

and longitude. Using a

Mercator chart, demonstrate

that you can locate your

position from given

coordinates and determine

the coordinates of at least

ﬁve aids to navigation.

Safety and Seamanship 173

Latitude and Longitude

Latitude is distance north or south of the equator. Parallels of latitude are sometimes

referred to as small circles (a circle whose plane does not pass through the earth’s center)

that are equidistant north or south of the equator, diminishing in size as they approach

the poles. Parallels of latitude are numbered in degrees (°), minutes (‘), and seconds (“)

from north or south with 0° at the equator to 90° at the poles.

Longitude is distance east or west of the

prime meridian, which passes through the

RoyalNavalObservatoryinGreenwich,

UnitedKingdom.Allmeridiansaregreat

circles that pass through the north and

south poles. ese great circles intersect

the equator at right angles. ey are

measured in degrees (°), minutes (‘), and

seconds(“)from0°to180°.

Latitude and longitude enable a naviga-

tor to pinpoint his or her position at any

spot on the earth. ey are also used to

describe the location of other ships, objects,

and aids to navigation. When recording

a location, latitude is written ﬁrst and

identiﬁed as north or south. Longitude is

written next and labeled east or west. In

practice, the coordinates are rounded oﬀ to

the nearest tenth of a minute.

enauticalmileis6,076feet—thestatuteorlandmileis5,280feet.enautical

mile is the average length of one minute of arc on a great circle of the earth. A degree of

latitude contains 60 minutes of arc and, therefore, is 60 nautical miles long.

A degree of longitude is 60 miles long only at the equator; so when degrees of longi-

tude are ﬁgured north or south of the equator along any parallel of latitude, the degrees

become shortened and the minutes become less than a nautical mile in length. is is

why the measurement of distance is always taken along the latitude scale of a chart.

On a chart, distances can be measured with a pair of dividers on the latitude scale

which is on the east and west sides of the chart. A minute of latitude on the scale is

equal to a nautical mile.

e longitude scale at the top and bottom of the chart must not be used for mea-

suring distances because the meridians of longitude converge at the poles. It follows,

therefore, that for any distance either above or below the equator, a degree of longitude

becomes progressively smaller, thus giving an incorrect measurement.

PolyconicprojectionisusedonchartsoftheGreatLakes.isprojectionismadeto

correspond more nearly to the earth’s true surface. Parallels are curved and are projected

totheirtruelengthwithintheareaofthechart.Meridiansarestraightequidistantlines

converging at a point which may or may not be a pole.

North Pole

Greenwich

N. Parallel of Latitude

S. Parallel of Latitude

Equator

South Pole

Prime Meridian

Meridian

174 Safety and Seamanship

A Polyconic Projection

Some charts print a legend deﬁning the symbols and the abbreviations used. A com-

plete list of symbols and abbreviations is found in the pamphlet Chart No. 1, published

by the National Ocean Survey.

Scale

It’s important to know the scale to which the chart is drawn. is is given as a

fractionjustbelowthechart’stitle.Harborchartsthatshowlotsofdetailmayhavea

scale of 1:10,000 or 1:20,000. is means that one inch on the chart equals 10,000 or

20,000 inches (a little more than ⅛ or ¼ nautical mile). Ocean charts can have a scale of

1:1,000,000.Hereoneinchrepresents13.7miles.Asmall-scalecharthaslessdetailed

features;alarge-scalecharthasgreaterdetail.Rememberthatthescaleisafractionand

that one ten-thousandth is larger than one-millionth.

Features

A coastal chart is concerned with varying depths of water and shows soundings in

fathoms or feet, depth curves, and shoal and rocky areas. A river chart omits these things

because depths are relatively consistent in the main channel. e coastal chart gives the

depth of water at mean low tide, while the river chart tells how high the water is at that

particular season. Both charts show contours, landmarks, and shore installations.

Coastal and lake sailors need accurate compass courses so charts are made accord-

ingly.Meridiansandparallelsareshown,withappropriatescalesalongthechart’seast

and west edges. ere is at least one compass rose with two circles: the outer circle

shows degrees with zero at true north, the inner shows points and degrees with zero at

magnetic north.

e river sailor needs none of this, so his or her chart simply follows the direction of

the stream, and north may be at any angle relative to the sheet. Latitude and longitude

may be shown on river charts, but the scales are omitted as are the compass roses.

e coastal chart is measured in nautical miles, and the river chart in statute miles.

Mileagesontheriveritselfarenormallymarkedandnumberedfromabasepoint.

When using any chart, always be certain that you have the latest edition or revi-

sionsincechangesfrequentlyoccur.Foreaseinplotting,obtainthechartwiththe

maximum scale available. Charts can be kept up to date by noting changes published

in“NoticestoMariners,”availableonlineandfromthelocaldistrictheadquartersof

theU.S.CoastGuard.

Safety and Seamanship 175

Navigation charts for North America are produced largely by three U.S. government

departments and one Canadian agency. U.S. National Ocean Survey charts cover all

coastal waters in the United States, including tidal rivers. e U.S. Army Corps of

EngineersisresponsibleforimportantinlandwatersthatincludetheMississippisystem

andtheGulfIntracoastalWaterway.ItsU.S.LakeSurveycoverstheGreatLakesand

connecting waters. e U.S. Naval Oceanographic Oﬃce produces oﬀshore charts

and republishes foreign charts of navigable waters around the world. e Canadian

HydrographicServicechartsthedominion’simportantnavigablewaters.

Compass

e most important navigational device on a boat is the compass. A reliable compass

tells you what direction you are going, and this is necessary information when plotting

dead reckoning positions.

A simple compass consists of a magnetized needle or pointer mounted on a card.

e needle swings on a pivot so it always points in a northerly direction. is position is

called “magnetic north.”

A compass will not be accurate if it is not installed properly. e lubber line must be

aligned with the keel of the boat, and the compass needs to be away from interfering

metallic objects and unshielded or untwisted electrical wiring.

e compass card can be marked in several ways. An outer card will show degrees.

ere are 360 degrees in a complete revolution of the compass needle. North is 000°;

east090°;south180°;andwest270°.(Note: Any compass bearing less than 100° is

expressedinthreedigitswithaleadingzero,e.g.,084°isexpressedaszero-eight-four.)

An inner card showing the “points of the compass” has historic value but is no longer

used having been abandoned in favor of the more accurate 360-degree compass.

Compass Card

Ordinary 10b.

Explain the degree system

of compass direction.

Explain variation and

deviation and how they

are used to convert between

true headings and bearings

to compass headings

and bearings.

176 Safety and Seamanship

Variation

e magnetic compass always points to magnetic north, the center of magnetic

energy which draws and holds the needle. It does not point to true or geographic

north.Geographicnorth,ortheNorthPole,isthenorthernendoftheaxisuponwhich

Earth rotates. All charts and maps are oriented to geographic or true north. Variation is

the degree of diﬀerence between true and magnetic north.

Magneticnorthisnotaxedspot.ItsgenerallocationisnorthofCanada,butits

exact location is subject to some annual change. e motion is predictable and by

simple computations, the correct local variation and annual change are noted upon each

compass rose on all charts. e mariner converts his magnetic compass reading to true

reading to conform to his charts.

Because waves of magnetic energy ﬂow in irregular paths between the northern and

southern magnetic poles, variation is easterly or westerly, or as the mariner faces the

North Pole, the compass needle is too far to the right or to the left. Charts indicate the

direction of variation.

Variation is expressed in degrees and minutes, east or west of true north.

Why do you need to understand variation? Your charts reﬂect true north, but your

compass reads magnetic north. In some places, the degrees diﬀerence can determine

whether you get where you want to be or whether you are lost at sea.

If you live on the east coast of the United States, the variation is to the west. If you

are on the west coast, variation is to the east. e compass rose on your chart is your

reference for both true and magnetic direction; and since variation is location depen-

dent, on smaller scale charts with multiple compass roses, the variation may be diﬀerent.

Always use the compass rose closest to where you are plotting on the chart.

To convert from true to magnetic, you simply add west variation or subtract east

variation to true to get the equivalent magnetic heading.

Deviation

Deviation is the error caused by ferrous metals on the boat and in the boat’s equip-

ment such as generators, radios, alternators, and batteries. All of these pull the compass

needle. is pull, or deviation, is reduced by placing magnetized iron bars called ﬂinders

bars near the compass to pull it back to a nearly correct heading. Compass correction,

also known as compensating, should be done by expert compass adjusters.

ere are almost always small residual compass errors, and in some cases large ones.

Deviationcanbedeterminedbyrunningyourshipoverknowncoursestobearon

knownrangemarks.Makenoteofyourcompassheadings.edierencebetweenyour

compass heading and the magnetic heading is your deviation for that compass heading.

Use your calculations to prepare a chart for use when piloting.

Note: When taking bearings with a hand-held compass, do not apply deviation.

Deviationisonlygoodforthecompassinthatlocation.Asyoumovearoundtheboat,

the deviation will change. It is best, too, not to take compass bearings while standing

near the engine or the anchor. e middle of the vessel, farthest from large iron pieces

will give the best results.

Safety and Seamanship 177

Deviation Table

Vessel: SSS Scout

Location:PilotHouse(BinnacleCompass)

Compass Heading Deviation Compass Heading Deviation

000 +4.0W 180 -4.5E

030 +3.5W 210 -7.0E

060 +2.5W 240 -5.5E

090 +2.0W 270 -2.5E

120 +2.0W 300 +1.0W

150 +0.5W 330 +3.5W

Why do you need to understand deviation? Once you have converted your true

heading to a magnetic heading by correcting for variation, you may still be on the wrong

track unless you account for deviation.

Just as you do when adjusting for variation, to correct for deviation, you add degrees

west and subtract degrees east. Once you have corrected for compass deviation, you can

successfully reach your chosen destination.

When calculating headings or bearings, a deck log is useful. As a memory aid,

remember,“TVMakesDullCompany—AddWildcats.”

Sample Portion of Deck Log

True Variation Magnetic Deviation Compass

092 -4E 088 +2W 090

Measuring Speed

Speedometer

Just as in a car, you need a device on your boat to tell you how fast you are traveling.

Mostvesselshaveaspeedometer.Somespeedometersworkthroughapaddlewheel

extending into the water from the hull that rotates faster as speed increases. Some

speedometers use the pressure of water rising in a small tube (called a pitot tube) attached

outside the hull with a special ﬁtting connected by tubing to a small dial mounted on an

instrument panel. Changes of pressure within the pitot tube are registered on a dial that

iscalibratedinknots.(Knotsarenauticalmilesperhour.Knotsperhourisameasureof

acceleration.) Others operate on the drag of a movable strut projecting into the water from

a hull ﬁtting. Underway, the pressure on the strut moves a small piston against hydraulic

ﬂuid in a tube, which moves a needle on a dial calibrated to record knots. A boat speedom-

eter only shows approximate velocity through water. e eﬀects of wind and current must

alsobeconsideredtogetanaccuratereadingofspeedoverthebottom.YourGPSwill

provide a speed over ground reading, but this is not the same as speed through water.

Ordinary 10c.

Describe three kinds

of devices used aboard

ship for measuring speed

and/or distance traveled,

and, if possible,

demonstrate their use.

178 Safety and Seamanship

Patent Log

IfyourspeedometerisfouledandtheGPSismalfunctioning,youcanstillcalculate

speed. If you have an engine tachometer, you can prepare a list of engine speeds that cor-

respond to speed through the water. Some vessels have a patent log. A patent log is any

one of various mechanical devices designed to measure a ship’s speed, distance, or both.

Patent logs have three parts: (1) a metal rotator that is drawn through the water with

blades that vary its speed of rotation depending on the speed of the boat towing it; (2) a

line several hundred feet long attached at one end to the rotator and at the other end to

a wheel on the instrument on the boat; and (3) a dial that registers the speed of rotation

ofthewheeltowhichtheloglineisattachedreadinginknotsand/oraccumulated

distance in nautical miles. e best-known type of patent log is called a taﬀrail log.

Chip Log

e chip log is well suited for small-boat use, especially at speeds from two to 10 knots

perhour.eold-timechiploghadthreeparts:chip,line,and28-secondsandglass.e

chip was a thin wooden quadrant weighted on the curved edge so it would ﬂoat upright.

One end of a line was attached to the point of the chip. Lines went from each corner of the

chip to a peg-and-socket attached to the line. A sharp tug pulled out the peg, and the chip

collapsed for easy retrieval. e other end was wound on a small reel.

elinewasknottedatintervalsof47feet,3inches.Whenthechipwasthrown

overboard, the glass was inverted and the line ran out. e number of knots leaving the

reelinthe28secondstheglasstooktoemptywasapproximatelyequaltotheboat’s

speed in knots. is is where we get the sea term “knot.”

In the maritime environment, speed is measured in knots (on inland waterways, some

vessels will use miles per hour). A knot is one nautical mile per hour. (One nautical mile

is 1.15 statute miles.)

Although fairly accurate up to 10 knots, the chip log has been almost entirely

replaced by the patent log or the speedometer. You can easily make one, but use a stop-

watch, digital watch, or sweep second hand as your timing device. A 15-second interval

is easier to read on a watch; so for this time, tie the knots 24 feet, 4 inches apart.

Chip Log

Dutchman’s Log

AsimplemethodfordeterminingspeediscalledtheDutchman’slog.isissimply

a method of noting the time it takes a chip, paper, or other ﬂoating object to pass from

a marked point at the bow to a mark at the stern. e distance in feet is to feet per hour

as the time in seconds is to the hour in seconds (3,600 seconds in one hour).

Forexample,thedistancebetweenthemarksis20feet.etimebetweenthemarks

is four seconds.

(20x3,600)÷4=18,000feetperhour

Multiplythedistance(20feet)bysecondsperhour(3,600).isis72,000.en

dividebytheseconds(4),whichequalsthefeetperhour(18,000).

ereare6,076feetinanauticalmile,sodividethefeetperhourby6,076.

is is approximately 2.9 knots. (A knot is one nautical mile per hour—a speed,

not a distance.)

Safety and Seamanship 179

Try this formula several times; then work out a chart for your boat similar to

the following:

Speed Table for S. S. S. Scout

TIME

(seconds) SPEED

(knots)

27.4

34.9

43.7

52.9

62.5

(Distance bow to stern: 25 feet)

Care must be taken to sight down to the water vertically and to mark the time

accurately, preferably using a stopwatch.

A ground log is a simple tool for showing a boat’s approximate speed and direction

in shoal water. It consists merely of a weight on one end of a hand line. e weight is

thrown overboard and allowed to rest on the bottom. e direction of the line and

the amount paid out in a given time as the boat moves indicates the boat’s course and

speed.

Time

Foraccuratenavigation,theexacttimeofanobservationmustbeknown.Extremely

accuratetimescanbeacquiredfromaGPSandmostmodernwatches.

Navigators deal with several types of time. e principal time used in navigation

is Greenwich Mean Time(GMT)orZulu Time. is is the time at the prime

meridianpassingthroughtheRoyalNavalObservatoryatGreenwichnearLondon,

UnitedKingdom.AllchronometersaresettoGreenwichMeanTime,alsoknown

as Coordinated Universal Time (UCT). is time is broadcast on WWV and

WWVHeveryminute,andmaybeusedtosetyourwatchorchronometer.HF

frequenciesare2.5,5.0,10.0,15.0and20.0MHz.

Zone Time is the time we use in our daily activities. Our clocks are advanced by

onehourforeach15degreesoflongitudewemoveeastfromGreenwich.Clocksare

set back when moving west. On land, time zone lines usually follow political boundar-

ies for the convenience of the citizens but closely approximate the 15-degree intervals.

e continental United States is divided into four time zones: Eastern, Central,

MountainandPacic.Dependingonthetimeofyear,ZoneTimecanbeexpressedas

standard time or daylight saving time.

Ordinary 10d.

Understand Coordinated

Universal Time (Greenwich

Mean Time or Zulu

Time) and zone time.

Demonstrate your ability

to convert from one to the

other for your local area.

180 Safety and Seamanship

GMT/UCT Conversion

Zone GMT/UCT Standard Daylight

Atlantic 1800 1400 -4 1500 -3

Eastern 1800 1300 -5 1400 -4

Central 1800 1200 -6 1300 -5

Mountain 1800 1100 -7 1200 -6

Paciﬁc 1800 1000 -8 1100 -7

Alaska 1800 0900 -9 1000 -8

Hawaii 1800 0800 -10 0900 -9

Navigators, concerned with the correct time can obtain a radio time signal, called

atimetickoratimehack,atleastdaily.Zonetimeaccurateto0.2secondscanbe

obtained by logging on to www.time.gov. Click on the time zone where you live, and set

yourwatchtoagreewiththedisplayedtime.Youcanalsodial303-499-7111.isisa

toll call to the National Institute of Science and Technology in Boulder, Colorado. e

time will be reported as Coordinated Universal Time.

Forpiloting,navigation,andmilitarypurposes,timeisexpressedinfourgures

from 0001 through 2400 (midnight). is 24-hour clock avoids confusion between

morning and afternoon. us, 0100 (pronounced “O-one-hundred”) is 1 .., and 1300

(thirteen-hundred) is 1 ..

Whenpiloting,timesneedtobeaddedandsubtracted.Remember,thereareonly60

minutesinanhour.Donotbefooledandsubtractatimesuchas1125from1218and

think that 93 minutes have elapsed. Only 53 minutes of time have actually passed.

Distance

In the marine environment, we measure distance in nautical miles to make plotting

on our charts easier. e distance a vessel travels is a function of the speed and time it

travels. A car traveling 60 miles per hour goes a mile a minute. A boat traveling six knots

goes one nautical mile in 10 minutes.

If you know your boat’s speed and the time she has been underway, you can calculate

thedistancerun.eSpeed/Time/Distanceformula,referredtoas60DSTreet,is

easy to use.

60xDistance(nauticalmiles)=Speed(knots)xTime(minutes)

Supposeyouhavebeensailingforanhourand10minutesat6.2knots.Howfar

have you gone?

• Convertthetimetominutes:1hour(60minutes)+10=70minutes

• 60D=Speed(6.2)xTime(70)

• 60D=434.2

• D=434.2÷60=7.24nauticalmiles

Ordinary 10e.

Explain the 24-hour time

system and demonstrate that

you can convert between

12- and 24-hour time.

Safety and Seamanship 181

Speed, Time, and Distance

Computing speed, time, and distance is an important part of dead reckoning. e 60

DStreetcalculationcanbeusedtondspeed,time,ordistanceaslongastwoofthe

factors are known.

WhatifyourGPSshowsyouaretravelingat5.7SOG(speedoverground)?How

long will it take you to sail 24 miles back to your marina?

• 60D=SpeedxTime

• 60x24=SpeedxTime

• 1,440=SpeedxTime

• 1,440=5.7xTime

• 1,440÷5.7=Time

• 266minutes=Time

• Convertthetimetohoursandminutes.266minutes=240(4hours)+26minutes

SupposeyourhandheldGPSgoesoverboardafteryouhavetraveled12.5nauticalmiles

intwohoursand17minutesandyourskipperwantsanestimatedspeedforyourvessel?

• Convertthetimetominutes:2hours(120minutes)+17=137minutes

• 60D=SpeedxTime(137)

• 60x12.5=Speedx137

• 750=Speedx137

• 750÷137=Speed

• 5.47knots=Speed

Mostchartshavealogarithmicspeedscalelocatedontheupperorlowermargin.

is is an aid in avoiding arithmetic as you can tick oﬀ time, speed, or distance with

your dividers; however, a pocket calculator is quite easy to use.

Dead Reckoning

Early navigators abbreviated deduced reckoning as ded. reckoning. Today, dead

reckoning(DR)isthetermusedforlocatingapositionbycalculation.Ifspeed,time,

and heading are known, it is possible to calculate or “dead reckon” a position.

A dead reckoning plot is the record of your boat’s progress based on heading steered

andspeedmadethroughthewater(orovergroundifusingGPS).Itdoesnotshow

your true position at any point—only your “reckoned” position. Your true position is

foundbyxesfromchartedfeatures,radionavigationaids,GPS,orcelestialobserva-

tions. Your dead reckoning plot must always start from a known point, a ﬁx. It tracks

your progress until the next ﬁx, where you start a new dead reckoning plot.

An important part of dead reckoning is calculating an estimated time of arrival at

your waypoints. ese ETAs help prevent gross errors in navigation.

Deck Log

A deck log is a record of the calculations made when planning a course. e departure

point and legs of your journey should be logged as part of your pre-sail plan. Because the

departure time is unknown, the estimated time en route (ETE) is shown instead of an

ETA. is information should be recorded on the ﬁrst lines of the deck log.

Ordinary 10f.

Make a dead reckoning table

of compass and distances

(minimum three legs)

between two points, plot

these on a chart, and deter-

mine the ﬁnal position.

Note: Ideally this require-

ment should be met while

underway. If this is not

possible, it may be simulated

using charts.

Able 10a.

Describe the deck log

aboard your ship’s principal

craft. Keep a complete log

for three cruises.

Logarithmic Speed Scale

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60

To ﬁnd SPEED, place one point of dividers on distance

run (in any unit) and the other on minutes run. Without

changing divider spread, place right point on 60 and left

point will then indicate speed in units per hour.

Example: with 4.0 nautical miles run in 15 minutes, the

speed is 16.0 knots.

182 Safety and Seamanship

Time Position Latitude Longitude True Var. Mag. Dev. Comp. Speed Distance ETA Remarks

DECK LOG

VESSEL _____________________________ NAVIGATOR ______________________________________ FROM ______________ TO ________________

Safety and Seamanship 183

Once underway, the time of actual departure is logged. Calculations made during

pre-sail planning can be used to give a compass heading and compute an ETA to the

rstwaypoint.Actualspeedsandheadingsarelogged.Fixesdetermineyouractual

position, and the deck log tracks your progress until the next ﬁx where you start a new

dead reckoning plot.

Chart Plotting

Some tools are needed for chart plotting. e minimum will be an up-to-date chart,

sharp pencil, pair of dividers, good eraser, and parallel rules, or one of the many plotters

available. Your boat should have a good compass with a deviation table. A pelorus or a

hand-bearing compass is helpful but not required.

To determine the distance of a line or course on the chart, spread the dividers to the

length of the line. en place the points of the dividers on the distance scale to read

the distance in nautical miles, or set the dividers for a given number of miles and walk

othedistance.OnMercatorprojectionscalecharts,thedistancecanbereadfromthe

latitude scale: one minute of latitude equals one nautical mile.

To describe a position on the chart, note either the latitude and longitude or its dis-

tance and direction from some speciﬁc point. Latitude and longitude can be determined

by using the dividers to measure the distance of the position to the nearest printed

parallel and meridian. is distance is then measured with the dividers on the latitude

and longitude scales on the chart borders.

Measuring the longitude of a point on a chart.

The longitude is 78º32.7' West.

Measuring the latitude of a point on a chart.

The latitude of Point X is 32º12.5' North.

Able 10b.

Lay a course of at least

three legs and execute it

using dead reckoning.

184 Safety and Seamanship

Charts usually have a compass rose in several diﬀerent places. is rose has an

outer ring that is oriented to true north. A second compass rose inside the outer ring is

oriented to magnetic north. e date, exact variation, and change in variation are in the

center of this rose.

Parallel rules are used on the compass rose to measure a course or bearing or to draw

a course line or line of position. To measure a course, place the dividers on the line, well

spread. Put the edge of the parallel rules against the dividers without moving them.

Put your ﬁngers ﬁrmly on the line side of the rules, and “walk” the other side up to the

nearest compass rose. Put the edge of the rules exactly on the cross (+) in the center of

therose.Readthecourseonthesamesideasyourdirectionoftravel.Forexample,ifyou

areheadedgenerallysoutheast,youranswershouldbebetween090°and180°.

To lay out an accurate plot you must understand variation and deviation to correct a

compass course or bearing to a true course or bearing, and how to uncorrect from true

to compass. e time-speed-distance formula will be used regularly. You will also need

toknowhowthelinesaredrawnandlabeled.Herearesomegeneralrules.

• AlwaysstartaDRplotfromaknownposition—ax.

• Alllinesonthechartarelabeledassoonastheyaredrawn.

• Numbersareroundedotothenearestvalue.Ifthenumberisexactlymidway

between two values, it is rounded to the even value. us, 1.44 is rounded to 1.4,

1.46 to 1.5, and 1.45 to 1.4, while 1.55 is rounded to 1.6.

• Timeisalwaysexpressedinmilitarytime:1:30..iswritten0130,4:18.. is

written1618.etimeofaxiswrittenparalleltothebottomofthechart,timeof

aDRpositioniswrittenatanangletothebottomofthechart,andiflinesofposi-

tion are labeled, the time is above the line. Time is rounded oﬀ to the nearest minute.

• Coursesandbearingsarealwaysplottedastruedirectionsusingthreedigits.e

courseiswrittenabovethecourseline:acourseof45°iswrittenC045;282°is

writtenC282.Ifbearingsarelabeledonlinesofposition,theyarewrittenbelow

theline:abearingof185°iswrittenB185.edegreesymbolisnotused,as

three-digit numbers are always degrees.

• Speedisexpressedinknotsonoceansandharbors,statutemilesperhouron

inland waters. e speed used must agree with the chart’s usage. Speed is written

belowthecourselineandroundedotothenearest10th.Aspeedof6.27knotsis

written S 6.3.

• Distanceisroundedotothenearest1⁄10 mile. If distance is plotted on a course

line, it is written below the line following the speed.

• Deadreckoningpositionsareindicatedbyadotonthecourselinewithasemi-

circle.DRpositionsareplottedwheneverthereisachangeincourseorspeed,as

wellaseveryhour,onthehour.etimeofallDRpositionsisnoted.

• Axismarkedwithadotsurroundedbyacircle.etimeofthexisnotedand

thisstartsanewDRplot.

• Anelectronicxpositionismarkedwithadotsurroundedbyatriangle.

• Anestimatedpositionismarkedwithadotsurroundedbyasquare.etimeis

notnoted,asitwillbethesameasitsaccompanyingDRposition.AnewDRplot

is never started from an estimated position.

• Latitudeandlongitudearenevermarkedonthechart.Whentheyarelogged,

however, they are rounded oﬀ to the nearest 10th of a minute, or six seconds.

Latitudeiswrittenrst,thenlongitude.Latitude4218’14”Northiswritten

42°18.2’N.e latitude scale is used to determine distance; the longitude

scale is never used for this purpose.

• InadditiontoplottingtheDRcourseonthechart,theskillednavigatorkeepsan

accurate set of notes on a deck log.

Safety and Seamanship 185

DR Position and Estimated Position

A dead reckoning position is the position determined from compass headings

(corrected), speed(s), and time since the last ﬁx. If you have a major change in heading

or speed, you need to plot a new position.

An estimated positionisaDRpositionmodiedbyadditionalinformationthat

is available to you but is not speciﬁc enough to be a ﬁx. All headings, ﬁxes, and lines

of position are drawn on a chart in relation to the bottom. e water through which

a ship moves is not ﬁxed, but moves as a mass in accord with tidal and current forces.

Obviously, a heading must be corrected by the amount of movement caused by either or

both of these forces.

If you know the direction and velocity of a current, you can modify your position by

runningacurrentvectorjustasyouplottedthebasicDRvector.

HelpfulinformationregardingtidesisfoundintwopublicationsoftheNational

Ocean Survey—the Tide Table and Current Table. By referring to certain key points

where high and low water is given for each day of the year, the navigator may then refer

toatableofcorrectionsforhisownlocale.Forexample,highwateratNewLondon,

Connecticut, may occur at 1100 on January 14. To ﬁnd the time of high water at any

oftheseveralsmallerportsnearbyoratvariouspointsintheriver,thetablessay:“For

Noank,add50minutestotimeofH.W.atNewLondon”or“ForWestHarbor,add31

minutes”or“ForMoneyPond,subtract13minutes.”Inthisway,almosteverymileof

the seacoast is covered with a tidal prediction.

Fixes

Fixingistheartandscienceofusingseveralsetsofinformationtoaccuratelyestablish

your position. Two or three bearings on diﬀerent objects, one bearing and a bottom

sounding,threecelestialobservations,and/ormorecanprovideax.

Beforetakingax,thinkaboutyourDRposition.Acommonerrorislookingaround

and leaping to the conclusion that you are near a location you cannot have possibly

reached. Look at your chart and have an idea of what you should see. en, take your ﬁx.

Bearings

A bearing is a line that you sight from your vessel to an identiﬁable landmark or

navigation aid using a device such as a hand-bearing compass. e bearing has a mea-

sured direction and can be plotted on a chart.

Because the bearing is based on an actual measured observation, you know that your

vessel lies somewhere along the line of sight. is is called a line of position (LOP).

e simplest line of position is taken from a range. Sight down two charted objects

youcanseefromthewater.Drawapencillineseawardfromthem.Youaresomewhere

along that line.

Light

Bluff

Chimney

Light

Lines of Position From Ranges

Able 10c.

Demonstrate your ability

to ﬁx your position by the

following methods: taking

bearings from two known

objects, running ﬁx, and

estimated position.

186 Safety and Seamanship

Visual Fixes

To take a bearing or visual ﬁx, sight over the binnacle. It may have a bearing pointer

(pelorus) for that purpose. When taking a bearing, line up the charted object and the

compass pointer. Write the bearing down. When you are through taking ﬁxes, go to

your chart. Line up your parallel rules on the compass rose on the magnetic bearing you

recorded for the object. Walk the rules to the object on your chart and draw a line from

theobjecttonearyourDRposition.isistheLOP.Drawthelineforyoursecondand

additional bearings. Note the time above the LOP and the bearing from the boat to the

object below the line.

Fix by Two Cross Bearings

If you have two or more lines of position taken at the same time, your position is at the

intersection of the two lines. is is a ﬁx. If possible, select objects that are about 90° apart.

Two crossed bearings provide a reasonably accurate ﬁx. It should be noted that the

narrower the angle of intersection of the two lines, the greater the likelihood of error.

Fix by ree Bearings

A ﬁx by three bearings is preferable, whenever possible. Any error is averaged by

locating the ﬁx in the center of the small resulting triangle. Sailors call this a “cocked hat.”

esmallerthetriangle,themoreaccuratethex.Repeatthebearingsifnecessary.

Running Fix

Sometimes you cannot get a good sighting on more than one object. When a stan-

dardxisimpossible,youcangetarunningx(Rx)bytakingaseriesofbearingson

thesameobject.Manynavigatorswilltakeabearingandtimewhentheobjectis45°

or 60° oﬀ the bow, a second bearing and time when the object is dead abeam or 90°. To

plot the running ﬁx:

House

B328

1100 B100

Windmill

Fix by Two Cross Bearings

B080

B195

1100

B320

House

Beacon

Light

Fix by Three Bearings

Safety and Seamanship 187

1. DrawyourrstLOPonyourchart.

2. Determineyourspeedforthetimeelapsedbetweentherstandsecond

bearing.Multiplyyourspeedbythenumberofminutesbetweensightingsto

ndthedistanceyoutraveled(SxT=D).

3. You must use a technique called “advancing the bearing” to plot the ﬁx. To

advance the LOP, you move it forward on the same bearing as the ship’s

course. e distance you move the LOP should be the distance you traveled

betweenyourrstandsecondbearings.DrawanLOPparalleltotheoriginal

LOP at this distance.

4. e running ﬁx is where the lines intersect.

Advancing the LOP

Light

C 037

B290

B234

Advanced LOP

1st LOP

2nd LOP

Keepinmind,arunningx’saccuracyissomewherebetweenthecertaintyofa

standard ﬁx and the mixed reliability of an estimated position.

Double the Angle On the Bow

Doubletheangleonthebowisaspecializedx.Itmakesuseofthespecialproperties

of isosceles triangles, and it also establishes your vessel’s position oﬀ a coast.

1. Take a bearing and a time on an object 20 degrees oﬀ the bow.

2. Take a second bearing and time on the same object when it is 40 degrees oﬀ

the bow. (Youcanuse15/30,25/50,30/60,etc.eoperationisthesame,

but the angle must be doubled.)

Plot the bearings, and you will have an isosceles triangle with the leg between the ﬁrst

and second bearing the same length as the leg from the second bearing on the object.

(is method is valuable because it predicts in advance the distance oﬀ when abeam.)

Able 10d.

Establish distance from

a known object using

“double the angle on the

bow” and explain how to set

a danger angle.

0916

RFix 0934

188 Safety and Seamanship

Doubling the Angle on the Bow

B090

B045 B022 ½

Course

B C D

Danger Bearing

When planning a sail, you choose a path that will keep your boat in safe waters.

Often there are hazards to be avoided. Establishing a danger bearing is a technique used

to avoid going into treacherous waters.

Whenplottingyourcourse,determinetheareayouneedtoavoid.Findalandmark

or aid to navigation on the chart, and draw a line of position on an angle from the object

that avoids the danger area. is establishes a safe area and an unsafe area. If you stay on

the correct side of the line while underway, you will be safe.

Measurethebearingofthelineandconvertittoacompassbearing.Ifyouneed

to stay to the left of the line, the line should be labeled with NLT (no less than) and

thecompassbearing.elineislabeledwithNMT(nomorethan)andthecompass

bearing if you must stay to the right of the line.

Danger Bearing

NMT

320

When your vessel approaches the danger area, take frequent sightings on the landmark

or object you selected earlier. If the hazard lies to port, then any bearing greater than the

danger bearing indicates trouble. If the hazard lies to starboard, the opposite applies.

Safety and Seamanship 189

Electronic Fixes

Global Positioning System

Twenty-fourormoreGPSsatellitesorbittheearth,andtheybroadcastveryprecise

timesignals.GPSdevicesreceivethesatellitesignals,comparethem,andgiveyoua

setofcoordinates.isisespeciallyvaluabletothesailor,becauseGPSlooksatyour

absolute position on the globe. Sometimes, when relying on dead reckoning alone, the

eﬀects of current and wind are not readily apparent.

eprimarypurposeofGPSisdeterminingposition,whichitgivesinlatitudeand

longitude,buttheGPScanalsotellwhichcoursetosteerifwaypointsareestablished,

anditcanprovideanETAtoyourdestination.eGPSprovidesyourspeedover

ground(SOG).ItisimportanttounderstandthatSOGisnotnecessarilyspeed

throughthewater.SOGisaresultofspeedthroughthewater,current,andleeway.

AGPScannotwarnofhazardsordeterminewaterdepth.Knowledgeofthelocal

environment must come from charts, personal observations, and other instruments on

the boat.

Today,thesimplestandmostcommonxtakenisaGPSx.SinceyourGPSisnota

chart,youneedtoplotyourpositionasreportedbytheGPSonachartatregularinter-

vals.TotakeaGPSx,makesuretheGPSiscurrentlylockedon.enreadthepresent

positioncoordinates.eyshouldbechangingconstantlyifyouareinmotion.Makenote

of the time. en read and write down the latitude to 1⁄10 of a minute. Next, read and

write down the longitude to 1⁄10 of a minute. You may also want to note track and ground-

speed as additional useful information. Plot the coordinates and time immediately, check

your course for hazards, and compute an ETA to the next point.

Waypoints

AlthoughtheprimarypurposeofaGPSistotelllocation,anequallyimportant

function is helping you get where you are going. is involves waypoints.

Waypoints are the places you want to go. When planning a cruise, you establish

positions and record latitude and longitude in your deck log. ese coordinates can be

enteredintoaGPSandstoredinabankofwaypoints.

Working with waypoints provides several opportunities to make mistakes. Be sure to:

• Double-checkthelatitudeandlongitudeofthewaypointsonyourchart.

• EnterthelatitudeandlongitudecorrectlyintotheGPS.MosterrorsinGPSinput

occur because of transposed numbers in the coordinates.

• Donotsetexactcoordinatesforlargeobjectssuchasrangemarkersorbeaconsasway-

points. Set waypoints that provide ample clearance for safe passage around them. If you

are traveling in limited visibility, you do not want to navigate directly into something.

• Whenunderway,selectthecorrectwaypointfromtheliststoredinyourGPS.

Whenyouselectandactivateawaypointfornavigation,theGPSwillcomputethe

course bearing and distance from your current location to the waypoint; however, you

must remember it does not know what lies beneath the water. You must use your chart

to make sure your course is clear of obstacles that will endanger your vessel.

OnewaypointyoumustbeabletogenerateblindfoldedistheMOB(manover-

board)waypoint.OncetheMOBwaypointiscreated,itautomaticallybecomesthe

active waypoint directing you back to the place where it was activated.

NevertaketheprecisionoftheGPSasagiven.Satellitesignalscanbeweakenedor

interrupted by the geometry of the satellites, atmospheric conditions, obstacles block-

ingthesignal,sunspotsorsolarares,andelectricalinterference.Goodseamanship

demands that your navigation is veriﬁed by all available means, including taking bearings

oflandmarks/beacons/lights,radar,depthsounding,andcalculatingtheeectsofset

and drift due to the tide.

Able 10e.

Discuss how GPS

(Global Positioning System)

operates and explain the

purpose of waypoints.

Demonstrate your ability

to use a GPS while

underway using three

diﬀerent waypoints.

190 Safety and Seamanship

Radar

Radar,orradiodetectingandranging,isanelectronicdevicethatbouncesradio

energy oﬀ objects and measures the time required for the impulse to return to the point

of transmission. e returning impulses are translated into a maplike picture of the

object on a radar scope. e image may be interpreted to provide bearings and distances

of the objects.

Metalishighlyreective.Dirtislessreective.Waterdoesnotreectradarmuchat

all. If you are in a bay, the water surrounding the ship will show as black. A trained radar

operator, by changing the gain and other controls, can identify ships, buoys, bridges,

water towers, industrial plants, and shorelines.

Maritimeradarsuseaplanpositionindicatorformat,whichmeanstheradardisplay

looks somewhat like a chart. Around the edge is a compass rose to allow you to take

bearings. On simple radars, the bow of the boat is always at the top, and you read

relativebearings.Morecomplexsystemsfeedthemagneticheadingandvariationtothe

radar so it shows true north at the top. e heading of the boat is shown as a bright

strobefromthecentertoedge.Rangemarksallowyoutomeasuredistancesfromas

little as a half mile up to 20 miles.

Radar’sprimaryuseiscollisionavoidance,butitisveryusefulforxing,aswell.

Fixingcanbedonethreeways.esimplestistotakearangeandbearingonaknown

object, note the time, and plot it on your chart. Another ﬁx would be to take bearings

on two or more known objects, and plot them just as you would visual ﬁx bearings.

Finally,youcantaketwoormorerangesfromknownobjects,arcothedistanceswith

a drawing compass, and your position is where the arcs intersect.

Radio Direction Finder

is device is a radio receiver with a loop antenna that can be rotated so the direction

of the transmitting station can be determined. Locations of transmitting stations are

charted and marked as “radio beacons.” ese stations transmit designated signals at

stated intervals so they can be identiﬁed.

Two or more radio beacons can produce lines of position that intersect to give the

ship’s position, or the ship can home in on a single beacon. Bearings so established may

be subject to error due to local or atmospheric distortion. is means constant recheck-

ing. e normal range is between 20 and 200 miles.

Automatic ID System (AIS)

AIS is a maritime navigation safety communications system that provides vessel

identity, type, position, course, speed, navigational status, and other safety-related

information automatically to appropriately equipped shore stations, other ships, and

aircraft.Withthisinformation,itispossibletocallanyshipoverVHFradiotelephone

by name, rather than an imprecise call such as, “Ship oﬀ my starboard bow.”

AIS’s primary function is as a navigation tool for collision avoidance, but it is helping

toimproveournation’ssecuritybyincreasingtheU.S.CoastGuard’sawarenessof

vessels in the maritime domain, especially vessels approaching United States ports.

Inertial Navigation System

is highly sophisticated multi-device equipment involves a complex computer

that takes into account all the factors found in dead reckoning such as speed, distance,

courses, changes, current, wind, etc. A vessel’s position can be constantly known.

Able 10f.

Discuss the method of

establishing a radar ﬁx.

Safety and Seamanship 191

Fixing by Sounding

Charts contain information about objects that are invisible from a boat but that can

be veriﬁed, measured, or identiﬁed. e depth of the water beneath a boat is one more

piece of information that can be used to ﬁnd a position.

Charts show depth. Soundings are often recorded in feet, but on some NOS charts,

they are in meters. In very deep water, depths are shown in fathoms of six feet. e scale

will be clearly marked on the chart.

A sounding will not usually indicate a precise position, but it can help you determine

generally where you are and are not.

Electronic Depth Sounder

An electronic depth sounder determines the depth of water under a boat’s hull by

measuring the time required for a transmitted sonic impulse to reach the bottom and

return by echo to the boat. is instrument is called by many names—sonic depth ﬁnder,

echo sounder, depth ﬁnder, depth indicator, depth meter, depth sounder, or fathometer.

A depth sounder consists of two elements, an indicator and a transducer. e

transducer is a combined transmitter and receiver installed in the hull. It is small and

compact. A cable inside the hull runs from the transducer to the indicator. Electronic

pulses are sent and received by the transducer. A unit in the indicator times their travel

and converts the result into depth (distance from the transducer to the bottom).

e Lead

Although the lead line is considered old fashioned, it comes in handy as a backup to

an electronic depth sounder. It can also be useful in checking the depths all about a boat

that has gone aground.

e lead line is nothing more than a long length of small-diameter rope with a lead

weight at one end. e line is marked at regular intervals to show depth. Sometimes,

a dollop of wax is aﬃxed to the end of the lead so a sample of the bottom’s consistency

can be obtained.

To use a lead line, the boat must be going slow ahead. A person on the bow heaves

the lead forward and lets the line run out. When the bow passes the line, the slack is

pulled out until the line is vertical, and the tag closest to the water is read. Caution:

Retrievethelinequicklyiftheengineisrunningsoyouwon’tfoulthepropeller.

Fixing in Limited Visibility

e curse of the coastal boater and the bane of oceangoing vessels is the seafarer’s

ancient enemy—fog. ick weather (fog, heavy rain, snow, haze) blots out landmarks,

conceals aids to navigation, and hides ships at sea in a sometimes impenetrable blanket

where visibility is reduced to 100 feet or less.

In foggy conditions, which prevail when visibility is seven-tenths of a mile or less, you

mustknowwhereyouare.Fixinginlimitedvisibilityisbestdonebyelectronicmeans.e

GPSisnotnormallyaectedbyvisibility.Radarsetswillseethunderstorms,butshould

also be able to see the normal radar returns. A radio direction ﬁnder is also useful.

Quartermaster 10b.

Know the methods of

ﬁxing a boat’s position in

limited visibility.

Safety and Seamanship 193

WEATHER

Asailormustdevelopasoundworkingknowledgeofweather.Gaugingweather

conditions and predicting change coupled with knowing how to handle a vessel in glassy

calm, full gale, thick fog, drenching rain, or light breezes are vital skills for a good sailor.

Before Leaving the Dock

Several days before you set out on the water, start listening for the National Weather

Serviceextendedve-dayoutlooksonNOAAWeatherRadio,AM/FMradio,or

television, or check online at www.noaa.gov.SatellitesandDopplerradarhavegreatly

enhanced meteorologists’ ability to interpret and predict weather patterns, so you can

get a good idea of the conditions you will face early in your planning.

e responsibility for the collection and dissemination of weather information

rests primarily with the National Weather Service, National Oceanographic and

Atmospheric Administration. e service issues a daily surface weather map of the

United States that can be found in most daily newspapers and is available online at

www.noaa.gov.

ere are two types of weather you must track—weather caused by large systems

and weather caused by local conditions. e National Weather Service predicts large

weather patterns as well as local wind and water conditions.

e day before you leave, pay close attention to the television and marine weather fore-

castsonNOAAWeatherRadio.Payattentiontoanysmallboatcautionarystatements,

advisories,orgaleorstormwarnings.Higherwindsorwavesnoworinthefuturegiveyou

time to change your plans or prepare for a rougher sail and pack accordingly.

Quartermaster 11a.

Read and understand a local

weather bulletin. Know

how to obtain current

marine and weather reports

from the National Weather

Service in your area by

telephone, radio, or online.

Coast Guard Warning Display Signals

Small Craft

Advisory

Gale Storm

Warning

Hurricane

Warning

Day

Signals

Night

Signals

194 Safety and Seamanship

National Weather Service Deﬁnitions

• Small-Craft Advisory.Observedorforecastwindsof18to33knots.Small-Craft

Advisories may also be issued for hazardous sea conditions or lower wind speeds

that may aﬀect small-craft operations. Issued up to 12 hours ahead of conditions.

(ere is no legal deﬁnition of the term “small craft.”)

• Gale Warning.Observedorforecastwindsof34to47knots

• Storm Warning.Observedorforecastwindsof48knotsorgreater

• Tropical Storm Warning. Observed or forecast winds of 34 to 63 knots associ-

ated with a tropical storm

• Hurricane Warning. Observed or forecast winds of 64 knots or higher associated

with a hurricane

• Special Marine Warning. Observed or forecast winds of 34 knots or more

associated with a squall or thunderstorm and expected to last for two hours or less

GaleWarnings,StormWarnings,TropicalStormWarnings,andHurricane

Warnings are issued up to 24 hours ahead of conditions.

e study of cloud appearance, wind direction (particularly as it changes) and force,

visibility and its change, temperature, humidity, and changing atmospheric pressure all

enable the sailor to arrive at a reasonable judgment of what conditions will be in the

immediate area.

Tools that facilitate good judgment regarding local weather conditions include the

barometer, thermometer. psychrometer, anemometer, and wind vane.

Barometer

e barometer measures atmospheric pressure—the key to weather forecasting. e mea-

surement is based on the height of a column of mercury in a tube that is sealed at one end.

e open end is down in a small container of mercury. If the tube is more than 30 inches

in height, the mercury in the tube will measure about that height when balanced by normal

air pressure. (e actual normal pressure is 29.92.) Actual calculations are done in inches of

mercuryandresultsareyieldedinbothinchesofmercuryrangingfrom27–31andmillibars.

A barometer records changes in air pressure within this range on a precise scale.

Abarometerofthistypeisprecise,costly,fragile,andquitebulky.Mostpeoplerelyon

the aneroid barometer which is a small, thin, round metal can from which most of the

air has been expelled. As atmospheric pressure increases, the two ﬂat sides tend to move

inward. When the pressure decreases, they move apart. e movement is recorded by

a pointer moving over a scale calibrated to heights of a mercury column in inches and

fractions, with another scale calibrated in millibars. An adjustable pointer provides a

reference point from which changes may be observed.

It is important to remember that the lower the barometric pressure, the stormier the day.

Quartermaster 11b.

Demonstrate your

ability to read a barometer,

thermometer, anemometer,

psychrometer, and weather

vane. Be familiar with the

Beaufort Wind Force Scale.

Aneroid Barometer

Safety and Seamanship 195

Thermometer

e thermometer is a well-known device for measuring the temperature. e

Fahrenheitscaleiscommonlyusedwiththefreezingpointofwaterat32°Fandthe

boilingpointofwaterat212°Fatsealevel.etotalscaleissubdividedinto180parts

or degrees. On the Celsius scale, the freezing point of water is 0°C and the boiling point

is 100°C.

Psychrometer

e psychrometer measures relative humidity with a combination of wet and dry

thermometers. ese are either permanently mounted or can be portable like the sling

psychrometer,whichismorecommonlyused.Relativehumidityiscomputedfrom

the ambient temperature as shown by the dry-bulb thermometer and the diﬀerence in

temperatures as shown by the wet-bulb and dry-bulb thermometers.

Psychrometer

Sling Psychrometer

Anemometer

e anemometer is a device for measuring wind force in statute miles per hour or

in knots. It may have rotating cups with a geared wheel that measures wind speed on a

dial, or it may be the tube type that measures velocity on a vertical scale according to the

height a small ball rises in the tube.

Anemometer

196 Safety and Seamanship

Wind Vane

Knowingthedirectionofthewindisanimportantpartofpredictingweather

because wind brings us our weather. A wind vane, sometimes called a weather vane,

spins and points in the direction from which the wind is coming. It is important to

understand that a wind vane only indicates the wind at its height. Wind often varies at

diﬀerent heights.

Wind Vane

Beaufort Wind Force Scale

AdmiralSirFrancisBeaufortofGreatBritaindevelopedascalein1805tohelp

sailors estimate wind based on visual observations. Beaufort’s scale starts with 0 and

goes to a force of 12. e Beaufort numbers were adapted for non-naval use and tied to

anemometerrotationsinthe1850s.

Use the Beaufort scale to determine water conditions you will experience based upon

wind speeds that are predicted for your area.

Safety and Seamanship 197

Beaufort Wind Force Scale

Beaufort

Force

Miles Per

Hour

Weather

Bureau Term Condition of Sea Land Conditions

00–1 Light Flat Calm; smoke rises vertically

11–3 Light Ripples without crests Wind motion visible in smoke

24–7 Light Small wavelets Wind felt on exposed skin; leaves rustle

38–12 Gentle Large wavelets Leaves and smaller twigs in constant motion;

light ﬂags extended

413–18 Moderate Small waves Dust and loose paper rise; small branches

begin to move

519–24 Fresh Moderate, longer waves; some foam and spray Smaller trees sway

625–31 Strong Large waves; white foam crests; spray Large branches in motion; umbrella use

becomes difﬁcult

732–38 Strong Sea heaps up; foam begins to streak Whole trees in motion; effort to walk against

the wind

839–46 Gale Moderately high waves with breaking crests form-

ing spindrift, streaks of foam Twigs broken from trees

947–54 Gale High waves with dense foam; wave crests start to

roll over; considerable spray Light structure damage

10 55–63 Storm Very high waves; sea surface white; considerable

tumbling; visibility reduced

Trees uprooted; considerable structural

damage

11 64–72 Storm Exceptionally high waves Widespread structural damage

12 Above 73 Hurricane

Huge waves; air ﬁlled with foam and spray; sea

completely white with driving spray; visibility

greatly reduced

Massive and widespread damage

to structures

Heat Index

Once you have determined temperature, relative humidity, and wind direction and

speed, you should consider the heat index for summer sailing. e heat index is the

human-perceived equivalent temperature or how hot it feels. When the humidity is higher,

evaporation is reduced, which means our bodies cannot reduce heat through perspiration.

e chart below establishes the caution, extreme caution, and danger levels at 40 per-

cent humidity. A 90-degree day reaches the extreme danger level at 95 percent humidity.

NOAA National Weather Service Heat Index Chart

Not taking the heat index into consideration can have serious effects on you and your crew.

80°–90°F Caution: Fatigue is possible with prolonged exposure and

activity. Continuing activity could result in heat cramps.

90°–105°F Extreme caution: Heat cramps and heat exhaustion are

possible. Continuing activity could result in heat stroke.

105°–130°F Danger: Heat cramps and heat exhaustion are likely;

heat stroke is probable with continued activity.

Note: Exposure to full sunshine can increase heat index values by up to 15 degrees.

Keepaneyeonyourlookoutonsunnydays.

198 Safety and Seamanship

Wind Chill

Low temperatures combined with wind give us another human-perceived equivalent

temperature that is reﬂected by the wind chill index. Wind chill is based on the rate of heat

loss from exposed skin. As the wind increases, heat is carried away from the body faster,

which drives down skin temperature and eventually internal body temperature. Use the

NOAA chart to prepare for the dangers of winter winds and freezing temperatures.

Wind Chill Table

Equivalent temperature in cooling power on exposed ﬂesh

Air temperature (degrees Fahrenheit)

35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 -25 -30

Wind speed (miles per hour)

0–4 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 -25 -30

532 27 22 16 11 6 0 -5 -10 -15 -21 -26 -31 -36

10 22 16 10 3-3 -9 -15 -22 -27 -34 -40 -46 -52 -58

15 16 9 2 -5 - 11 -18 -25 -31 -38 -45 -51 -58 -65 -72

20 12 4-3 -10 -17 -24 -31 -39 -46 -53 -60 -67 -74 -81

25 8 1 -7 -15 -22 -29 -36 -44 -51 -59 -66 -74 -81 -88

30 6-2 -10 -18 -25 -33 -41 -49 -56 -64 -71 -79 -86 -93

35 4-4 -12 -20 -27 -35 -43 -52 -58 -67 -74 -82 -89 -97

40 3-5 -13 -21 -29 -37 -45 -53 -60 -69 -76 -84 -92 -100

45 2-6 -14 -22 -30 -38 -46 -54 -62 -70 -78 -85 -93 -102

Wind speeds greater than 45 mph have little additional chilling effect.

Weather Underway

ContinuetomonitorNOAAWeatherRadiowhileonthewater.Weatherchanges

may occur just over the horizon, but you can be prepared if you know they are coming

your way.

Forecasterscannotpredictsuddenstronglocalstorms.Onceunderway,youneedto

keep a “weather eye” focused on the skies around you.

• Lookfordevelopingcloudsandgrayingskies.

• Aquicktemperaturedropandwindshiftoftenmeansastormiscoming.

• Backingwinds(movescounterclockwiseovertime)implyworseningweather.

• HeavystaticonanAMradiomaymeanastormisnearby.

• Listenfordistantthunder;watchforlightningandroughwater.

• Temperaturechangesinearlymorningoreveningmaycausefog.

Safety and Seamanship 199

Clouds

Cloud watching can be a pleasant pastime, and knowledge of cloud shape and height

can clue you in to important changes in the weather. ere are many names and types of

clouds, but a sailor only needs to concentrate on two basic shapes—cumulus and stratus.

Stratus means to spread out, ﬂatten, or cover with a layer.

Cumulus means heap, pile, an accumulation. ese clouds are puﬀy, and they look

like masses of cotton balls

You never have to worry about cumulus or stratus clouds unless they are also nimbus.

Nimbus means rainy cloud.

Names of the speciﬁc types of clouds are created by combining the type of cloud with

the height of the cloud.

Cloud Group Cloud Height Cloud Type

Cirrus = High clouds 18,000+ Feet Cirrus Cirrostratus

Cirrocumulus

Alto = Middle-level clouds 6,500 feet to 18,000 feet Altostratus Altocumulus

Stratus = Low clouds Up to 6,500 feet Stratus Stratocumulus

Nimbostratus

200 Safety and Seamanship

It is not necessary for you to remember all the cloud names and formations, but there

are two things to watch for that indicate a high probability for a storm.

1. A “lowering ceiling” occurs when the base of the stratus clouds sinks lower

and closer to the ground. A cloud resting on the ground is fog.

2. Watch for cumulus clouds that are rapidly developing vertically to become

cumulonimbus thunderstorm clouds. ese storms develop over water on hot

and humid days as radiant heat from the land absorbs moisture from nearby

water which rises to produce thunderheads.

Thunderstorms and Lightning

If a thunderstorm catches you while on the water, both wind and lightning are a

danger to you.

• Makesureeveryoneisinalifejacket,reducesail,andprepareforheavyseas.

• Makenoteofyourlocation.

• Reducespeed,securealllooseobjects,andcoverallhatchesandopenings.

• Keepawayfrommetalobjectsthatarenotgroundedtotheboat’sprotectionsystem.

• Positionyourselfinthemiddleoftheboatandgetaslowtothedeckaspossible.

• Sitawayfromelectricalpanelsandelectronicgear.

Safety and Seamanship 201

Waterspouts

ere are two types of waterspouts—fair-weather waterspouts and tornadic water-

spouts. Tornadic waterspouts form during severe thunderstorms and along the edges of

frontal systems. ey have the same characteristics and dangers as tornadoes over land.

Fair-weatherwaterspoutsaregenerallylessdangerous,andtheyarenotassociatedwith

super-cell thunderstorms. ey are more akin to the dust devils that form over land.

Waterspouts are unpredictable, but signs that signal their formation are dark spots on

the water, sudden shifts or increases in wind, and funnels coming from clouds overhead.

Fair-weatherwaterspoutsgenerallyoccurincoastalwatersanddevelopinassociation

with dark, ﬂat-bottomed, developing cumulus clouds.

As fascinating as they are, you need to steer clear. e best way to avoid a waterspout

is to move away at a 90-degree angle to its apparent line of movement.

Safety and Seamanship 203

PRACTICAL DECK SEAMANSHIP

Deckseamanshipconcernsthegeneralworkthatgoesonabouttheship’sdeck.

Drills,damagecontrol,handlinglines,marlinspike,andhandlinggroundtacklearedeck

seamanship skills. ere are many other deck seamanship skills that make us safer and

more competent sailors.

Watches

Watches are work shifts. In days gone by, the standard was “four on” and “four oﬀ ”

referring to duty hours. Today, the general rule on larger vessels is four-on and eight-oﬀ.

issystemkeepsathirdofthecrewondutyatalltimes.Dogwatchesoccurtostagger

the shifts and allow the crew an opportunity to eat an evening meal.

Watches

First Watch 2000–2400

Middle Watch 2400–0400

Morning Watch 0400–0800

Forenoon Watch 0800–1200

Afternoon Watch 1200–1600

First Dog Watch 1600–1800

Second Dog Watch 1800–2000

*In the second dog watch, to indicate that a new watch has taken over, the sequence of bells is varied as follows:

1 bell, 6:30 p.m.; 2 bells, 7 p.m.; 3 bells 7:30 p.m.; 8 bells, 8 p.m. The ships clock, of course, repeats the sequence of 1 to 8 bells

every 4 hours (day and night) without variation.

Bells

Clocks, as we know them, were not invented

untilthe14thcentury.Hourglasseswereusedto

keep time onboard. Sand passed from the top half

of the hourglass to the bottom approximately every

half hour.

One strike on the bell indicates the ﬁrst half

hour of the watch has passed. e bell is struck an

additional time for each half hour. us, eight bells

signal the end of a four hour watch. is process is

repeated for every watch.

When the bell is struck more than once, it is

sounded in twos. At 1430, for example, you will hear

ring-ring, ring-ring, ring.

Ordinary 11a.

Name the seven watches

and explain bell time.

Bells and How Struck

1 bell (.)

2 bells (..)

3 bells (.. .)

2 bells (.. ..)

5 bells (.. .. .)

6 bells (.. .. ..)

7 bells (.. .. .. .)

8 bells (.. .. .. ..)

Each dot represents one strike of the bell.

204 Safety and Seamanship

The Lookout

e Navigation Rules require a vessel to keep a proper lookout. In fog, at least one

lookout should be forward and one aft. A lookout aft is also required when backing out

of a slip, and a lookout is required at anchor.

e lookout must be able to report accurately the bearing of any vessels, aids to navi-

gation, and objects that are sighted or heard to the person in charge of the vessel. e

lookout should relate any other pertinent information that is evident such as estimated

distance, course, and speed of other vessels. e lookout must be vigilant, have no other

duties or distractions, and be in a position to clearly see and hear.

To communicate the location of objects in view, the lookout should use relative

bearings.Relativebearingsarebearingsrelativetotheship’sbow.Relativebearingsare

based on an imaginary 360-degree circle drawn around the vessel. e bow is at 000°,

thestarboardbeamis90°,thesternis180°,andtheportbeamis270°.Lookoutscannot

have accurate compasses at hand and be eﬀective at their watch, nor will they know the

compass course of the ship and the true direction of objects they sight. By using the

system of relative bearings measured in degrees from the bow of the ship, the lookout

can report the position of objects quickly and accurately.

Ordinary 11b.

Explain the duties of a

lookout and demonstrate

how to report objects in

view and wind directions

with respect to the vessel.

Ordinary 11c.

Name relative bearings

expressed in degrees.

Safety and Seamanship 205

Helmsmanship

One of the marks of a good seaman is the ability to steer well. is skill is not

developed by study, but by a good deal of practice.

ere are certain commands given to a helmsman that need explanation. To turn

right,sayRIGHTRUDDER,andtoturnleft,sayLEFTRUDDER.eseexpres-

sions allow no possibility of confusion.

Ruddersusuallyhavealimitedamountoftravel.Smallboatscanhave180degrees

ofmovement,butlargervesselsmayhaveonly70degreesoftravel.atmeansthereis

just 35 degrees of movement either side of centerline. If the maximum available rudder

arc is 35 degrees, full rudder is likely to be only 30 degrees, the remaining degrees being

used only for emergencies.

RIGHTFULLRUDDERmeanstogothenormalmaximumdeectiontothe

right.RUDDERAMIDSHIPSmeanstocentertherudder.RIGHT15DEGREES

RUDDERmeanstomovetherudder15degreestotherightandholditthere.EASE

THERUDDERmeanstobegintomovetherudderbacktowardmidships.EASETO

10meanstoreducetherudderto10degreesright.HANDSOMELYmeansdoitslowly.

Onceashipstartstoturn,itwillcontinuetodoso.MEETHERmeanstoslow

down the swing without completely stopping it.

NOTHINGTOTHERIGHTorNOTHINGTOTHELEFTmeansthatyou

cannot go right or left of the directed heading.

SHIFTYOURRUDDERmeanstomoveitacorrespondingamounttotheother

side.MINDYOURRUDDERhastwomeanings:rst,tostandbyforanorder;or

second, to pay more attention, you are not steering as requested.

ehelmalwaysrespondstotheorderbyrepeatingtheorder.IftheOODsays,

“Right10degreesrudder,”thehelmimmediatelysays,“Right10degreesrudder,”and

starts moving the wheel. When the rudder is stable at 10 degrees right, the helm will say,

“Rudderright10degrees,sir,”andtheOODwillacknowledge.

ereisasecondcategoryofhelmorders.eyareheadingcommands.STEADY

ASYOUGOmeanstoholdtheheadingunderthelubber’slinewhenthecommand

isgiven.Alternatively,STEERCOURSE045DEGREESdirectsthehelmtoturnto

045° and hold that course until told otherwise.

At sea, most steering is done by compass, requiring the helmsman to keep the lub-

ber’s line of the compass on the mark of the compass card that indicates the course to be

steered.Rememberthatthecardstandsstillwhiletheshipswings.

As a vessel swings with a change in course, there is a tendency for the inexperienced

helmsman to allow the vessel to swing too far. A crooked course, yawing side to side, is

the result. When piloting a small boat, pick out a distant landmark or a star at night to

steer by. When using a star as a mark, remember that stars, like the sun and moon, move

across the sky, so every 15 minutes, you must pick out a new star and check constantly

with the compass.

e compass on a small boat is more aﬀected by pitching and rolling than a compass

on a large vessel. Using a landmark by day or a star at night, the helmsman can steer a

good course by dropping his eye occasionally to the compass to check that he or she is

on course.

Ordinary 11e.

Demonstrate the use of

wheel or helm commands

found in the Sea Scout

Manual.

206 Safety and Seamanship

Cruise Log

Every time you go out on the water with your ship, you have an opportunity to

record information that is useful, and you can document the highlights of the cruise.

Manyshipshavedevelopedtheirowncruiselogformat,andyouwillndthatmost

logs begin by recording the date, prevailing weather conditions, wind direction and

speed, persons aboard, departure location and time, and arrival location and time.

Observations such as the diﬃculty in lining up landmarks when entering a new

harbor or the time it takes to get from one point to another against an incoming tide are

instructional and helpful when planning a future cruise. Capturing events such as a hat

or skipper’s sandwich overboard are especially fun for later reﬂection.

Vessel Maintenance

In general, boats are fragile. Whether a canoe or an ocean liner, they have been designed

to travel under skillful direction in an element that could be overwhelming. e best design

and the sturdiest construction won’t amount to much if the craft has been allowed to

deteriorate through neglect or ignorance.

e real seaman is always alert for signs of trouble—a strained hull, evidence of dry rot,

corrosion, worn gear, frayed lines, sluggish performance of hull or engine, worn stitching

ontheseamsofasail.Flakingnishorcrazedvarnishcanmeanimpendingtrouble.e

knowledgeable boatman keeps his vessel shipshape. It is a good practice to keep a mainte-

nance log every sail, and enter all discrepancies in it, both those you ﬁx at the time and those

that must wait for a while to be ﬁxed.

Firstandforemost,thesafetyoftheshipandherpassengerscanbeseriouslyjeopardized

by neglecting the hull, ﬁttings, sail, rigging, power plant, or gear. e continuing value of the

boat depends almost entirely on its care and upkeep. e true seafarer takes pride in the

sparkling appearance of his or her ship.

ere are boats today that are 30 to 50 years old that retain their full seaworthiness and

original appearance because they have been kept up. ere are boats only a few years old that

are worthless hulks because of simple neglect. Sun, rain, salt water, acids, and fumes are consid-

ered the great enemies of ﬁnish, appearance, and integrity; however, the real enemy is neglect.

WORK SCHEDULE

Outﬁtting Checklist

ITEM TO BE DONE BY DATE TO BE DONE MATERIAL COST

Remove cover—Store Skipper—mate Apr. 1 ————— —————

Inspect boat Crew Leaders ——

Develop checklist Committeeman ——

————— —————

Scrub and clean

Inside

Outside

Crew #1

Crew #2

Apr. 8

Clean and check

seams, ﬁttings, etc.

for leaks—recaulk

Crew #1 on deck

Crew #2 on hull

Apr. 8 Compound $3.50

————— ————— ————— —————

Remove and replace

plank—portside

Crew #3 mate Apr. 15 Plank $16.00

Install sisterframe

starboard amidships

Skipper,

consultant

Apr. 15 Frame

Fastenings

$14.25

$16.18

Cut away and install

new section of coaming

Crew #4 committeeman Apr. 15 Parts and Labor $28.95

Ordinary 11f.

Supervise and contribute to

the cruise log for three days

of cruising (one cruise or a

combination of day cruises).

Submit the cruise logs to

your Skipper.

Safety and Seamanship 207

Fitting Out

Normally the overall condition of the boat is analyzed and necessary corrective action

is taken two times per year, in the spring and the fall. Spring is the traditional ﬁtting-out

time. Winter covers come oﬀ, the hull is carefully inspected inside and out, the power

plant or sails and rigging are checked, all equipment is looked over, and repairs are made.

Small boats are included in the work schedule.

edevelopmentofachecklististherststep.Fromitcanbedeterminedthejobsto

be done and their priority, the materials and tools required, and the costs and time that

the ﬁtting out will take. Another question that must be answered is who is to do the

work: the crew, volunteers, a shipyard, or special technicians.

If it is a small sailboat or powerboat up to 20 feet, usually the work can be done

quickly and simply by Sea Scouts at little cost. If it is a larger boat, ﬁtting out can be

time-consuming, diﬃcult, and—if professional services are needed—very expensive.

Set up a time schedule and assign people to the work to be done. e plan should

involve all hands, including the Skipper, mates, committee members, consultants, and

specialists.

Remember,youcansaverepairandmaintenancecostsbycarefulselectionoftheboat

in the ﬁrst place. en, by employing good workmanship with quality materials, you can

avoid many problems.

Laying Up

is is a procedure to be followed when a boat is to be stored for the winter. In

preparation, much equipment should be removed. Cushions, blankets, mattresses (and

other fabrics), charts, books, navigation gear, ﬁre extinguishers, anchor lines, running

rigging, food and liquids, etc., should be placed ashore for storage in a safe, dry place.

e hauling-out process is important. If the boat is a small one that can be hauled

and stored on a trailer, the problem is relatively simple. If the boat needs to be hauled on

a railway and is to be stored in a cradle or shored up with blocks and poppets, attention

must be given to hull support at four points at least to prevent the boat from hogging or

sagging.

e boat should be thoroughly cleaned. e bottom in particular should be washed

and scrubbed clean of all marine growth and slime. e bilges should be cleaned and

thoroughly drained.

e engine should be cleaned, the oil drained, and the exterior sprayed with light

oil to prevent corrosion. e spark plugs should be removed and oil injected into the

cylinder heads. Spars should be removed and stored.

e great enemies of a boat in storage are rot, mildew, and corrosion. Ventilation

mustbeadequate.Removealloorboardsandopenallhatches,skylights,drawers,and

locker doors.

Unless stored inside, make a frame and cover the boat with canvas, allowing for ample

ventilation. e battery or batteries should be removed and stored, preferably on a low

(trickle)charge.Hereagain,achecklistandworkscheduleshouldbedevelopedandthe

costs estimated.

Working in a marine environment multiplies the safety hazards you will encounter.

All the safety procedures you practice on land must be followed. Wear safety glasses or

a face shield. Wear protective clothing, including a hard hat if it is appropriate. Use dust

masks where needed, and use a safety harness if you are working where a fall is possible.

Wear a life vest if going overboard could occur, and never work alone. Always have

someone nearby on deck or in a compartment in case something goes awry.

Able 11a.

Demonstrate your

knowledge of personal

safety equipment needed

while cleaning, maintaining,

or repairing your vessel.

208 Safety and Seamanship

Tools

Every ship needs certain hand tools because all vessels need tuning, adjustment, and

repair regularly. Each ship is unique in its needs, but there are a number of useful hand

tools that are commonly needed by all vessels.

Pliersgiveyouagriponalmostanything,butoftendamagethatitemaswell.Don’t

use pliers if you have a wrench that ﬁts the job.

Wrenches come in many varieties: open end, box end, specialty. Each is sized for a

specicnut,metricorEnglish.Havetherightset.

Screwdrivers also come in a wide variety of heads, mostly ﬂat-head or Phillips, but

there are others. Use the right size.

Hammers(ball-peenandclaw),hacksaws,knives,andothersmallhandtoolsare

often needed.

Forwoodworking,you’llneedsaws,chisels,planes,nailsets,rivetblocks,scrapers,

clamps, ﬁles, drills, bit brace and bits, putty knife, spirit level, and rule.

On-deck tools should include wire cutters (of a size to cut any diameter wire aboard),

routingiron,d,needles,palm,wax,twine,wirebrush,electrician’stape,Mystiktape,sail

repair tape, hand ax, tin snips, sandpaper, putty, caulking compound, sealer, etc. A good

extension light should be included.

Allhandtoolsneedreasonablecare.Storetheminadryareasotheywon’trust.Don’t

abuse them by using them for something they are not designed to do. A screwdriver is

not a pry bar. If tools become worn, replace them before they become dangerous.

Hardware

Everything on a boat will regularly be put to the test, and it is imperative for your

safety and the safety of others that you use the right tool for the job. When selecting

hardware for your boat, you need to know the purpose and your needs. You need to

consider things like safe working load, working load limit, breaking strength, and correct

size of connecting pieces.

Common Boat Hardware

Pelican Hook

e pelican hook is a hinged hook shaped like

a pelican’s beak that is held closed by a ring that is

easily released. It has various uses aboard a boat,

and is commonly seen securing lifelines. e

upper hook is sized by length. e lower part of

the pelican hook is sized by the wire or thread

that is attached to the hook.

Able 11b.

Know the names, uses,

sizes, and proper care of

the common hand tools

used by your ship.

Able 11c.

Identify and explain the

use of the following:

thimble, shackle, turnbuckle,

pelican hook, and other

ship’s hardware and ﬁttings

commonly used aboard

your ship’s vessels. Describe

how each is sized.

Safety and Seamanship 209

Shackle

Usually, this is a U-shaped piece of metal with

a removable pin across the open end. Shackles

are connecters. A clevis shackle can be used to

connect the mainsail to the main halyard on a

sloop or the anchor to the chain. A snap shackle

is often used to connect the jib halyard to the

jib or a topping lift to the boom. Clevis shackles

are sized by the diameter of the clevis pin. Snap

shackles are sized by the opening eye inner

diameter and the bail inner diameter.

imble

When there is a loop in wire rope, it is ﬁtted

around a thimble to keep it from bending too

tightly. e thimble also keeps the cable from

pinching and abrading the inside of a loop. A

rope spliced over a thimble is also protected from

chaﬃng. You are likely to ﬁnd a thimble with

youranchorrode.Ropegalvanizedthimblesare

sized according to the rope size, and stainless

wire thimbles are sized according to the wire size

to be wrapped around it.

Turnbuckle

is device adjusts the tension or length of ropes, cables, rigging, and other systems

that need tensioning. e threaded part of the turnbuckle goes through two diﬀerent

eyelets in the body of the turnbuckle. One thread is left-handed, the other is right-

handed. When the turnbuckle is turned, it tightens or loosens the attached lines.

Moststandingrigginghasturnbucklesforadjustment.Wireropeandcableexpand

and contract with temperature. Prolonged load can deform rigging. Turnbuckles allow

adjustment back toward the ideal. Turnbuckles are sized by the bolt size and length of

the body.

210 Safety and Seamanship

Paint and Varnish

e protection of marine surfaces covers a wide and specialized ﬁeld. Surface protec-

tion must be related to the material to be covered—wood or plywood, metal, ﬁberglass,

plastic, etc., and whether it is an exterior or interior and above or below the water’s

surface.

Also, it is important whether your boat operates in salt or fresh water. In any case,

obtainproductsdesignedformarineuse.Marinepaintsfallintomanycategories,each

designed to inhibit staining, marine growth, surface erosion and corrosion, dry rot,

abrasion, and the eﬀects of oil and gasoline. ey provide for stress as well as high tem-

peratures and other weather conditions. And, ﬁnally, they reduce friction to a minimum.

Paints can be oil base, lead base, or any of the modern resin and synthetic bases.

ey can be hard ﬁnish (enamel) or self-ﬂaking (ﬂat). ey can be glossy, as in a racing

bottom ﬁnish, or defoliating, as in a copper or other toxic metal compound designed to

kill or prevent underwater marine growth.

Common to all types of paint are three ingredients: pigment, solvents, and ﬁlm

formers. Varnishes and shellac contain no pigments.

• Alkyds.emostcommonandmostversatilepaint

• Vinyls.Anantifoulingnishforunderwatersurfaces

• Epoxies.Asyntheticforuseonplasticandberglass

• Polyurethanes.Ahardnishthatisabrasion-andfriction-resistant

• Acrylics.Hullandmetalprotection

• Phenolics.Clearnishessuchasvarnish

• Lacquerhardnish.Avarnishorenamelbaseusedcleartowaterproofsurfaces

such as wiring

• Shellac.Usedasavarnishbaseorasealant,frequentlyusedtocoatengineor

pump gaskets

e secret of lasting protection is the care taken in preparing the surface before

applying the ﬁnish.

Foranewsurface,sandtheareasmoothandcleanitcarefullytoremoveanyresidue.

On wood or plywood, use a sealer to set the grain. en apply a surfacing compound to

ﬁll any dents or scratches, and a primer or undercoat to provide a smooth surface and a

tight bond for the ﬁnal ﬁnish. Use a primer on metal surfaces, also.

On previously ﬁnished surfaces, remove the old ﬁnish by scraping, burning, chemical

removers, or sanding to the point where the remaining surface oﬀers a sound bond. If the

surface is exposed, touch it up as you would a new surface. A rule of thumb is to take oﬀ as

much of the old ﬁnish as you plan to put on (to prevent a heavy buildup of ﬁnish).

On wood surfaces that are to be varnished to show the grain and beauty of the wood,

sand smooth, remove any discoloration with a bleach, apply stain if desired, and apply at

least ﬁve coats of good marine varnish. On previously varnished surfaces, sand carefully and

apply at least two coats. e secret of a good varnish job is to sand lightly between coats.

Paint should always be thoroughly agitated and mixed before applying. Never mix or

agitate varnish. It will form air bubbles that are almost impossible to work out.

Painting and varnishing should be done on clear days with a temperature range

between60°and85°F.Neverapplynishtodamporrottedsurfaces.

Paints and varnishes should be kept in tightly sealed containers in well-ventilated

lockers, but not aboard your vessel. Brushes should be cleaned carefully in a solvent or

thinner and soap and warm water. Wrap in cloth or foil and hang up by the handles or

lay ﬂat (never on end on the bristles) between periods of use.

Able 11d.

Demonstrate proper surface

and coating preparation,

coating techniques, care of

stored coatings, and clean-

ing of brushes and tools

used to maintain surfaces

on your ship’s vessel.

Safety and Seamanship 211

Fiberglass Repairs

As most of the contemporary boats used by Sea Scouts are constructed of ﬁberglass,

therepairofdamagetosuchboatsshouldbeknowntoall.Fiberglassisavailablein

cloth, mats, ribbon, and powdered form. Exercise caution when working around this

material as it ﬂoats in the air and is a hazard to your nose, eyes, and skin. Irritation is

marked. Wear nose masks, goggles, and long-sleeve shirts.

Fiberglassismoldedintoahullinapermanentmoldwhichhasbeenlinedrstwith

a parting compound and a layer of gel-coat. A layer of activated resin is applied followed

by a layer of ﬁberglass cloth. en another layer of resin and ﬁberglass until the desired

thickness is obtained. Upon curing, by time, the hull is removed from the mold for

further processing.

To repair a hole in the hull of such a vessel, secure a patching kit from any hardware

store and follow directions for activating the resin and note that mixing must be done in

a glass or metal container using a disposable wooden stick. e activator will eat right

throughmostpapercups.Dependingontheratioofactivatortoresininyourmix,you

have about three minutes to use it before it becomes stiﬀ.

Prepare edges of the hole to be repaired by sanding a clean surface at least two inches

all around. Next apply a coat of activated resin and let it dry until tacky. en cut (with

scissors) a patch of cloth equal to the cleaned area. Soak this patch in a fresh batch

ofactivatedresinusingastickorputtyknife.Donotuseyourhandsifatallpossible.

Apply the patch to the opening and smooth down with a broad putty knife—from the

middle outward. Smooth out wrinkles and bubbles and feather the edges. Allow to cure

before application of successive layers, if needed. Complete with one or more coats of

activated resin and allow to cure thoroughly.

Use240-gritwet-or-drysandpapertosmoothandfeatheredges.Finishwith400-

gritpaper.Useplentyofwaterineachcase.Letdryandpaint,ifrequired.Handsand

tools may be cleaned with acetone, but use it sparingly.

Onoccasionitmaybepossibletorepairthegel-coatiftheholeisnottoolarge.Gel-

coat repair kits are available in most marine supply stores together with instructions.

It is impractical to gel-coat an entire boat unless you have had years of experience

using a two-line spray gun and materials at elevated temperatures.

Able 11e.

Explain techniques used for

the maintenance, protection,

and repair of hulls and

decks on your ship’s vessel.

Safety and Seamanship 213

ENVIRONMENT

Water Pollution

In1948,CongressenactedtheFederalWaterPollutionControlActto“enhance

the quality and value of our water resources and to establish a national policy for the

preservation,controlandabatementofwaterpollution.”Multipleamendmentshave

further deﬁned the act over time.

Oil

eFederalWaterPollutionActprohibitsdumpingharmfulquantitiesofoilinto

United States navigable waters or adjoining shorelines. All oil must be disposed of at an

approved facility.

Ifavesselorfacilitydischargesoil,theymustnotifytheU.S.CoastGuardimmedi-

ately.Failuretodosoispunishablebyacriminalpenaltyofnesoruptoveyearsinjail

or both for the person in charge of the source. e owner or operator who discharges

the oil is also liable for all removal costs and all claims of loss or injury to other parties.

e Environmental Protection Agency has deﬁned harmful quantities of oil as those

that violate applicable water quality standards, or cause a ﬁlm or sheen on the surface of

the water, or cause a sludge or emulsion to be deposited beneath the surface of the water

or on adjoining shorelines.

e law also speciﬁes that using soap as a dispersant on an oil spill is illegal and

violators can face severe state and federal ﬁnes.

Keepinganoilabsorbentspongeinyourbilgetosoakupoil,andhavingoilabsor-

bent pads or rags on hand in case of a spill are good preventative measures. Be careful

when changing engine oil, and wipe up any spills so the oil is not pumped overboard

in bilge water.

Onfederallycontrolledwaters,vessels26feetorlongermustdisplaya5-by-8-

inch“DischargeofOilProhibited”placardnearthemachineryspaceoratthebilge

pump switch.

Ordinary 12.

Discuss with an adult leader

the Federal Water Pollution

Control Act as related to oil

discharges. Explain what a

“Discharge of Oil” placard

is and ﬁnd it aboard your

ship’s vessels.

214 Safety and Seamanship

DISCHARGE OF OIL PROHIBITED

eFederalPollutionControlActprohibitsthedischargeof

oil or daily waste into or upon the navigable waters of the United

States or the waters of the contiguous zone, or which may aﬀect

natural resources belonging to, appertaining to, or under the exclu-

sive management authority of the United States, if such discharge

causes a ﬁlm or discoloration of the surface of the water or causes

sludge or emulsion beneath the surface of the water. Violators are

subjecttosubstantialcivilpenaltiesand/orcriminalsanctions,

including ﬁnes and imprisonment.

In case of oil discharge, call U.S.C.G. 800-424-8802

Hazardous Materials

Bottom paint is made to prevent growth on your hull. Top-coat and varnish is made

to resist mold and the elements. If you think about it, no paint or varnish product is

environmentally safe, and all are toxic to both humans and marine life. So, when clean-

ing or painting your vessel, use a suspended tarp to catch spills, paint scrapings, or debris

that might end up in the water.

Some anti-fouling paint uses tributyltin because it causes abnormal development and

reduced reproduction in marine life. Silicon- or Teﬂon-based paints are more environ-

mentally friendly, or you can use a non-ablative (copper based) anti-fouling paint.

In general, wise boaters will minimize the use of toxic materials while the vessel is in

the water and will use biodegradable and low-phosphate products whenever possible.

ItisagoodideatoinspectfuellinesperiodicallyandreplacebadoneswithUSCG-

approved Type A, alcohol-resistant fuel line hoses. Old antifreeze and oil need to be

disposed of on shore at the proper facility.

Plastics and Garbage

It is true that most of the garbage ﬂoating around in our water or obscuring our

shorelines made its way there through street gutters and storm drains ﬂowing into local

streams, creeks, and bayous. e garbage looks bad and is deadly to wildlife and danger-

ous for boaters. Plastic items foul propellers and clog engine intake systems causing

disabled vessels, expensive repairs, and lost time.

Able 12a.

Demonstrate your

knowledge of local environ-

mental laws related to the

proper storage, disposal,

and cleanup of maritime

coating materials, fuels,

and other environmentally

sensitive materials.

Able 12b.

Discuss with an adult

leader the dumping of

garbage in the marine

environment. Review the

contents of the MARPOL

placard and locate it aboard

your ship’s vessels.

Safety and Seamanship 215

eInternationalTreatytoPreventPollutionfromShips(MARPOL)wascreated

to address plastic pollution. Besides prohibiting the dumping of plastics, the law also

restricts dumping of other vessel-generated garbage at sea, including paper, glass, metal,

and food wastes.

eMARPOLtreatyrequiresthatvesselof26feetorlongermustprominently

display a placard for all crew and passengers to read.

Vessels 40 feet and over that are equipped with berthing and a galley must have a

written waste management plan that includes instructions for discharging sewage and haz-

ardous substances; discharging garbage and other food waste; disposing of plastics, bottles,

and cans; and advising the captain in case of oily discharges or diesel spills. e same law

requires marinas to have adequate trash receiving capability for their normal customers.

Violationsofanyoftheregulationsareliableforacivilpenaltyofupto$25,000for

eachviolationandcriminalpenaltiesofupto$50,000and/orimprisonmentforupto

ﬁve years.

Sewage

As boaters, it is our legal responsibility to help protect the aquatic environment. One

of the largest environmental problems is caused by sewage discharged from vessels,

especially in shallow bays and inlets.

Sewage must be treated properly before disposal. If your boat has an installed toilet,

it must have an operable marine sanitation device on board and be designed to prevent

discharge into the water.

AllinstalledMSDsmustbeU.S.CoastGuardcertied.TypesIandIItreatwaste

with special chemicals to kill bacteria. ese devices must have the “Y” valve secured so

it cannot be opened when the vessel is on waters (fresh water, within three miles of the

coast, etc.) where sewage cannot be dumped overboard.

TypeIIIMSDsprovidenosewagetreatmentandareeitherportabletoiletsor

holding tanks. Collected waste is taken ashore and disposed of at a pump-out station or

onshore toilet.

Gray Water

When you wash your hands or dishes, take a shower, or even brush your teeth on

aboat,youproducegraywater.Graywaterisproblematictoouraquaticenvironment

because of the soaps and detergents that are used. Even those labeled as biodegradable

contain substances that are harmful to some marine life.

To reduce the gray water onboard, use shore-side showers, dishwashing stations and

laundry facilities whenever possible. Check product labels and use low-nitrogen and

low-phosphorous detergents onboard, and when using cleaning products, use more

“elbow grease” than cleaning product.

Aquatic Nuisance Species

Aquatic nuisance species are waterborne, non-native organisms that threaten the

diversity or abundance of native species and the ecological stability of aﬀected waters, or

threaten a commercial, agricultural, aquacultural, or recreational activity. ese nuisance

species typically do not have predators and quickly outcompete native species for space

and food.

ANS hiding in ballast water in oceangoing vessels, and the importation of tropical

ﬁsh that are intentionally or accidentally released, cause potential ecosystem disaster.

Once here, the aquatic nuisance species use us to get around. ey hide in our cloth-

ing, boats, and the equipment we use in the water. When boats are moved from one

waterway to another, the organisms get a free ride on trailers.

Quartermaster 12a.

Discuss the three types of

marine sanitation devices

(MSD) and the laws

governing sewage discharge.

Quartermaster 12b.

Explain what gray

water is and how it

should be handled in

your boating area.

Quartermaster 12c.

Explain what aquatic

nuisance species are and

how you can help stop

their spread.

216 Safety and Seamanship

ANS have caused reductions in game ﬁsh populations, have clogged some lakes and

rivers with excessive vegetation, and some have caused damage to boats. But you can

helplimittheirspread.First,youneedtolearntoidentifytheANSinyourarea.When

you see them, you need to report them to your state’s natural resources agency.

Live wells, bilge water, transom wells, and the motor need to be drained at the ramp

or access, and any visible organisms need to be removed from your boat, trailer, vehicle,

andotherequipmentbeforeleavinganybodyofwater.Getridofunwantedbaitonland

or in the trash. Never release live bait into the water.

Clean all equipment, clothing, and footwear, and do your best to eliminate

ANS hitchhikers.

Appendix 217

KGW KWG KWB KBW KWR KRW KRB KBR KGB KBG KGR KRG

BR "A"

FI (2) 5s

BR "C"

RW "N"

Mo (A)

"A"

"5"

DAYBEACON

LIGHTED UNLIGHTED

CAN

LIGHTED

AND/OR SOUND

MR SPHERICAL UNLIGHTED

AND/OR SOUND

NUN NUN DAYBEACON

LIGHTED BUOY LIGHTED BUOY

LIGHT

"U"

GREEN LIGHT ONLY

FLASHING (2)

FLASHING

OCCULTING

QUICK FLASHING

ISO

WHITE LIGHT ONLY

NBNGNR

GREEN LIGHT ONLY RED LIGHT ONLY

SP "B"

RW "N"

C "A"

N "C"

Y "A"

Bn Y "B"

FIXED

FLASHING

LIGHTED

SHAPE OPTIONAL--BUT SELECTED TO BE APPROPRIATE

FOR THE POSITION OF THE MARK IN RELATION TO THE

NAVIGABLE WATERWAY AND THE DIRECTION

OF BUOYAGE.

UNLIGHTED

PLATE 1

YELLOW ONLY

GR "A"

FI (2+1) G 6s

G "9"

FI G 4s

"1"

FI G 6s

C "S"

RG "B"

FI (2+1) R 6s

R "8"

FI R 4s

N "C"

N "6"

"2"

C "9"

"2"

FI R 6s

PORT SIDE

ODD NUMBERED AIDS

ISOLATED DANGER

NO NUMBERS - MAY BE LETTERED

DAYBOARDS - MAY BE LETTERED

PREFERRED CHANNEL

NO NUMBERS - MAY BE LETTERED

PREFERRED CHANNEL

NO NUMBERS - MAY BE LETTERED

STARBOARD SIDE

EVEN NUMBERED AIDS

LATERAL SYSTEM AS SEEN ENTERING FROM SEAWARD

AIDS TO NAVIGATION HAVING NO LATERAL SIGNIFICANCE

U.S. AIDS TO NAVIGATION SYSTEM

on navigable waters except Western Rivers

WHITE LIGHT ONLY MORSE CODE

Mo (A)

SAFE WATER

NO NUMBERS - MAY BE LETTERED

RANGE DAYBOARDSÑMAY BE LETTERED

SPECIAL MARKS - MAY BE LETTERED

RED LIGHT ONLY

FLASHING (2)

FLASHING

OCCULTING

QUICK FLASHING

ISO

PREFERRED

CHANNEL TO

STARBOARD

TOPMOST BAND

GREEN

COMPOSITE GROUP FLASHING (2+1) COMPOSITE GROUP FLASHING (2+1)

PREFERRED

CHANNEL TO

PORT

TOPMOST BAND

RED

"G"

WHITE WITH BLUE BAND

MAY SHOW WHITE

REFLECTOR OR LIGHT

MOORING

BUOY

Aids to Navigation marking the

Intracoastal Waterway (ICW) display

unique yellow symbols to distinguish

them from aids marking other waters.

Yellow triangles e aids

should be passed by keeping them on

the starboard (right) hand of the

vessel. Yellow squares e aids

should be passed by keeping them on

the port (left) hand of the vessel. A

yellow horizontal band ovides

no lateral information, but simply

identifies aids as marking the ICW.

INFORMATION AND REGULATORY MARKERS

WHEN LIGHTED, INFORMATION AND REGULATORY

MARKS MAY DISPLAY ANY WHITE LIGHT RHYTHM

EXCEPT QUICK FLASHING, Mo(A), AND FLASHING (2)

TYPICAL INFORMATION AND REGULATORY MARKS

EXPLAINATION MAY BE PLACED

OUTSIDE THE CROSSED DIAMOND

SHAPE, SUCH AS DAM, RAPIDS,

SWIM AREA, ETC.

THE NATURE OF DANGER MAY

BE INDICATED INSIDE THE

DIAMOND SHAPE, SUCH AS ROCK,

WRECK, SHOAL, DAM, ETC.

CONTROLLED

AREA

DANGERBOAT

EXCLUSION

AREA

TYPE OF CONTROL IS INDICATED

IN THE CIRCLE, SUCH AS SLOW,

NO WAKE, ANCHORING, ETC.

SWIM AREA NO WAKE

ROCK

SLOW

BUOY USED TO DISPLAY

REGULATORY MARKERS

INFORMATION MAY SHOW WHITE LIGHT

MAY BE LETTERED

FOR DISPLAYING INFORMATION

SUCH AS DIRECTIONS, DISTANCES,

LOCATIONS, ETC.

MULLET LAKE

BLACK RIVER

LIGHT

indicat

218 Appendix

378

APPENDICES

SEA SCOUT MANUAL

U.S. AIDS TO NAVIGATION SYSTEM

on the Intracoastal Waterway

AS SEEN ENTERING FROM NORTH AND EAST—PROCEEDING TO SOUTH AND WEST

PORT SIDE

ODD NUMBERED AIDS

GREEN LIGHT ONLY

FIXED

FLASHING (2)

FLASHING

OCCULTING

QUICK FLASHING

ISO

GREEN LIGHT ONLY

STARBOARD SIDE

EVEN NUMBERED AIDS

RED LIGHT ONLY

FIXED

FLASHING (2)

FLASHING

OCCULTING

QUICK FLASHING

ISO

G “9”

Fl G 4sec

LIGHTED bUOY

CAN

C “7”

DAYmARK

SG-1

“1”

LIGHTED bUOY

R “8”

Fl R 4sec

N “6”

NUN

DAYmARK

“2”

RANGE DAYMARKS—MAY BE LETTERED

KGW-1 KWG-1 KWb-1 KbW-1 KWR-1 KRW-1 KRb-1 KbR-1 KGb-1 KbG-1 KGR-1 KRG-1

DAYMARKS HAVING NO LATERAL SIGNIFICANCE

mAY bE LETTERED ■WHITE LIGHT ONLY

NR NG Nb

SAFE WATER

NO NUMBERS—MAY BE LETTERED

■ WHITE LIGHT ONLY mORSE CODE

mo (A)

PREFERRED CHANNEL

NO NUMBERS—MAY BE LETTERED

COmPOSITE GROUP FLASHING (2+1)

SP “G”

RW “N”

Mo (A)

“A”

RED

LIGHT ONLY

LIGHTED

GR “C”

Fl (2+1) G

C “L”

N “W”

RG “B”

Fl (2+1) R

PREFERRED

CHANNEL TO

STARbOARD

TOPmOST bAND

GREEN

PREFERRED

CHANNEL TO

PORT

TOPmOST bAND

RED

CAN NUN

JG JR

“A”

“b”

SPHERICAL LIGHTED

AND/OR SOUND

DUAL PURPOSE MARKING USED WHERE THE

ICW AND OTHER WATERWAYS COINCIDE

When following the ICW from New Jersey through Texas, a should be kept to your starboard hand and a should be kept to your port hand, regardless of the color of the

aid on which they appear. Information and Regulatory Marks and Special Marks may be found on Intracoastal Waterway. Refer to plate 1.

SG-SY

SG-TY

JG-TY

JR-TY

TR-TY

DUAL

PURPOSE

DAYMARKS

DUAL

PURPOSE

BUOYS

DUAL

PURPOSE

DAYMARKS

DUAL

PURPOSE

BUOYS

JG-SY

JR-SY

TR-SY

C “5”

N “6”

“A”

“6”

“5”

“D”

“C”

“B”

Plate 2

Appendix 219

PASSING DAYBEACON CROSSING DAYBEACON

CAN

LIGHTED BUOY

WHITE LIGHT ONLYMAY BE LETTERED

EXPLAINATION MAY BE PLACED

OUTSIDE THE CROSSED DIAMOND

SHAPE, SUCH AS DAM, RAPIDS,

SWIM AREA, ETC.

THE NATURE OF DANGER MAY

BE INDICATED INSIDE THE

DIAMOND SHAPE, SUCH AS ROCK,

WRECK, SHOAL, DAM, ETC.

BUOY USED TO DISPLAY

REGULATORY MARKERS

INFORMATION

CONTROLLED

AREA

DANGER

BOAT

EXCLUSION

AREA

MAY SHOW WHITE LIGHT

MAY BE LETTERED

TYPE OF CONTROL IS INDICATED

IN THE CIRCLE, SUCH AS SLOW,

NO WAKE, ANCHORING, ETC.

S WIM

FOR DISPLAYING INFORMATION

SUCH AS DIRECTIONS, DISTANCES,

LOCATIONS, ETC.

MU L L E T L A K E

B L AC K R IV E R

A R E A N O W A K E

R O C K

S L O W

DA N G E R

WHITE LIGHT ONLY

CNG CNR

SHAPE: OPTIONAL--BUT SELECTED TO BE APPROPRIATE

FOR THE POSITION OF THE MARK IN RELATION TO THE

NAVIGABLE WATERWAY AND THE DIRECTION

OF BUOYAGE.

UNLIGHTED

LIGHT

LIGHTED

PASSING DAYBEACON

LIGHTED BUOY

MAY BE

LIGHTED

NUN

LIGHT

FIXED

FLASHING

YELLOW ONLY

INFORMATION AND REGULATORY MARKERS

WHEN LIGHTED, INFORMATION AND REGULATORY MARKS

MAY DISPLAY ANY LIGHT RHYTHM EXCEPT QUICK FLASHING, Mo(a)

AND FLASHING (2)

PLATE 4

GREEN OR

FLASHING

ISO

WHITE LIGHTS

OR R IG HT DE S C E NDING B ANK

RED OR

FLASHING (2)

ISO

WHITE LIGHTS

OR L E FT DE S C E NDING B A NK

MARK JUNCTIONS AND OBSTRUCTIONS

COMPOSITE GROUP FLASHING (2+1)

PRE FE RR E D C HANNE L

WHITE WITH BLUE BAND

MAY SHOW WHITE

REFLECTOR OR LIGHT

MOORING

BUOY

P R E FE R R E D C HA NNE L

T O S T A R B O A R D

TOPMOST BAND GREEN

FI (2+1) G

JG JR

P R E FE R R E D C HA NNE L

T O P O R T

TOPMOST BAND RED

FI (2+1) R

CROSSING DAYBEACON

MILE BOARD

BLACK-STRIPED

WHITE BUOY

123.5

MILE BOARD

176.9

Used to indicate an obstruction to navigation,

extends from the nearest shore to the buoy. This

means "do not pass between the buoy and the

nearest shore." This aid is replacing the red and

white striped buoy within the USWMS, but cannot

be used until all red and white striped buoys on a

waterway have been replaced.

MAY SHOW WHITE

REFLECTOR OR QUICK FLASHING WHITE LIGHT

IN L A N D ( S TA T E ) WA T E R S O B S T R U C T I O N MA R K

LIGHT

PORT SIDE

on the Western River System

U.S. AIDS TO NAVIGATION SYSTEM

AS SEEN ENTERING FROM SEAWARD

STARBOARD SIDE

STATE WATERS

SPECIAL MARKS--MAY BE LETTERED

DAYBOARDS HAVING NO LATERAL SIGNIFICANCE

TYPICAL INFORMATION AND REGULATORY MARKS

220 Appendix

INTERNATIONAL FLAGS AND PENNANTS

WITH MORSE SYMBOLS

3 RD EDITION

DECEMBER 1977

Note: See Pub. 102,

Page 22, for complete meanings

DMA STOCK NO.

WOXZC6

*ONLY used as a Procedure Signal meaning, “Received” or “I have received your last

signal”—NOT to be used as a Single Letter Signal.

Published by the Defense Mapping Agency

Hydrographic/Topographic Center

WASHINGTON, D.C. 20315

NUMERAL PENNANTS

•-

-•••

-•-•

-••

•

••-•

--•

••••

••

•---

-•-

•-••

-•

---

•--•

--•-

•-•

•••

••-

•••-

•--

-••-

-•--

--••

•----

••---

•••--

••••-

•••••

-••••

--•••

---••

----•

-----

Alfa

Have diver down, keep clear

Bravo

Dangerous goods

Charlie

Yes

Delta

Keep clear,

maneuvering with difﬁculty

Echo

Altering course to starboard

Foxtrot

Disabled,

communicate with me

Golf

Require a pilot.

Fishing: Hauling nets

Hotel

Pilot on board

India

Altering course to port

Juliett

On ﬁre, have

dangerous cargo, keep clear

Kilo

Wish to communicate

Lima

Stop instantly

Mike

My vessel is stopped,

making no way

Novem-

ber

Oscar

Man overboard

In harbor—All persons

report on board

Papa

At sea-Fishing:

Nets on obstruction

Quebec

Request free pratique

Romeo

Sierra

Engines going astern

Tango

Keep clear,

engaged in pair trawling

Uniform

You are running into danger

Victor

Require assistance

Whis-

key

Require medical assistance

Xray

Stop your

intentions, watch for signals

Yankee

Dragging my anchor

Zulu

Require a tug.

Fishing: Shooting nets

SUBSTITUTES

1st

Substitute

2nd

Substitute

3rd

Substitute

CODE

(Answering Pennant

or Decimal Point)

ALPHABET FLAGS

Appendix 221

1.POWERDRIVEN 2.POWERDRIVENUNDER12

meters

3.SAIL

4.SAILUNDER20meters 5.ANCHORED 6.TOWINGASTERN

OVER200meters

7.TOWINGALONGSIDE 8.PUSHINGAHEAD 9.FISHING

10.TRAWLING 11.RESTRICTEDMANEUVERABILITY 12.UNDERWATEROPERATIONS

(DREDGING)

13.TOWINGCAN’TDEVIATE 14.CONSTRAINEDBYDRAFT 15.AGROUND

PILOTBOATALSODISPLAYS

(WITHOUTMASTHEADLIGHT)

INTERNATIONAL:UNDER7M&7KNOTS

SIDELIGHTSOPTIONAL

IFALSOUNDERPOWER:USESAME

LIGHTSAS#1—ORTHISDAYSHAPE

50meters&OVERADDLOWERLIGHT

AFT100m&OVERADDDECKLIGHTS TOWDISPLAYSSIDE&STERNLIGHTS

200M&UNDER—2MASTHEADLIGHTS

INLAND:TUGDISPLAYS2YELLOWTOW

LIGHTSANDNOSTERNLIGHT

INLAND:2YELLOWTOW,NOSTERN

LIGHT;BARGESHOWSFLASHING

YELLOWONBOW

GEAROUT> 150mor

inDIRECTIONOFGEAR

SIDE & STERN LIGHTS OFF

WHEN NOT MAKING WAY

orCAUTIONSAFEor

SIDESIDE

TOW200morless

USE2MASTHEADLIGHTS

INTERNATIONALONLY NOTUNDERCOMMANDor

SIDE & STERN

LIGHTS OFF

WHEN NOT

MAKING

WAY

MAY USE COMBINATION

SIDELIGHT

MAY BE

ADDED

MAY USE

THIS

COMBO

LIGHT

SIDELIGHTS ARE

SHOWN ON BOW

OR A

BASKET

IF UNDER

20m

OR A

BASKET

IF UNDER

20m

LightsConformingtoRules23–31

NavigationRules,InternationalandInland

Appendix 223

RESOURCES

Piloting and Navigation

Bauer, Bruce A. Sextant Handbook.Maine:InternationalMarine,1992.

Blewitt,Mary.Celestial Navigation for Yachtsmen.Maine:InternationalMarine,1995.

Bok,BartJ.andWright,FrancisW.Basic Marine Navigation. Massachusetts:

HarvardUniversityPress,1944.

Bowditch, Nathaniel. American Practical Navigator. Bethesda: National Imagery and

MappingAgency,2002.

Burch,David.Emergency Navigation. Maine:InternationalMarine,1986.

Eyges, Leonard. e Practical Pilot.Maine:InternationalMarine,1989.

Hart,MarionR.andMcEwen,William. How to Navigate Today. New York:

CornellMaritimePress,1943.

Lane,CarlD.andMontgomery,John.Navigation the Easy Way. New York:

W. W. Norton, 1949.

Maloney,ElbertS.Chapman’s Navigation and Piloting 65th Edition. Annapolis:

Naval Institute Press, 2006.

Mixter,GeorgeW. Primer of Navigation, 7th Edition. New York:

W. W. Norton and Company, 1995.

Neeley,HenryM. Primer for Star Gazers. New York:

RandomHouseValuePublishing,1989.

Rabl,S.S. e Star Atlas.NewYork:CornellMaritimePress,1946.

Shufeldt,H.H.andDunlap,G.D. Piloting and Dead Reckoning.

Annapolis: Naval Institute Press, 1991.

Sterling,FrankW. Small Boat Navigation. NewYork:McMillan,1917.

Boat Design and Building

Chapell,HowardI.American Small Sailing Craft. New York:

W. W. Norton & Company, Inc., 1951.

Schock, Edson I. How to Build Small Boats. New York: Imp. Barnes, 1952.

224 Appendix

Boat Maintenance and Engines

Chapman,CharlesF.Boat Maintenance Aﬂoat and Ashore, Vols. I, II, and III.

NewYork:MotorBoating,IdealSeries,1952.

Fontaine,W.H.Boat Owners’ Handbook.NewYork:Dodd,Mead&Company,1941.

Jones,C.Morgan. Small Boat Engine Manual.NewYork:CornellMaritimePress,1948.

Miller,Conrad. Small Boat Engines.NewYork:eRudderPublishing,1939.

Robberson,Elbert. Small Boat Mechanic’s Handbook. Princeton: Van Nostrand, 1956.

Canoes, Rowboats, and Outboards

Handel,CarleW.Canoe Camping.NewYork:RonaldPressCompany,1953.

Mason,Bill. Path of the Paddle. Toronto:KayPorterBooks,1996.

Pearsall, Bill. Young Sportsman’s Guide to Motorboating. Nashville:

omas Nelson & Sons, 1962.

Knots and Ropework

Ashley, Cliﬀord W. e Ashley Book of Knots.NewYork:RandomHouse,Inc.,1993.

Day,Cyrus.e Art of Knotting and Splicing.Annapolis:NavalInstitutePress,1980.

Graumont,RaoulandHensel,JohnJ.Encyclopedia of Knots and Fancy Rope Work.

Cambridge:CornellMaritimePress,1972.

Graumont,RaoulandWenstrom,Elmer. Fisherman’s Knots—and Nets. Centreville:

CornellMaritimePress,Inc.1948.

Henderson,Richard.Understanding Rigs and Rigging. Camden:

InternationalMarine,1985.

Merry,Barbara.e Splicing Handbook.Camden:InternationalMarine,1987.

Smith,HerveyG.e Arts of the Sailor: Knotting, Splicing and Ropework. New York:

DoverPublications,1990.

Toss, Brion. Rigger’s Apprentice.Camden:InternationalMarine,1992.

Toss, Brion. e Rigger’s Locker.Camden:InternationalMarine,1992.

Safety, First Aid, Swimming, and Lifesaving

How to Survive on Land and Sea,U.S.NavalInstitute,Annapolis,Maryland.

General Seamanship

Bottomley, Tom. Boatman’s Handbook. NewYork:HearstMarineBooks,1988.

Brindze,Ruth.e Experts’ Book of Boating. NewYork:Prentice-Hall,1959.

Brotherton,MinerK.e 12-Volt Bible.Newport:SevenSeasPress,1985.

Burgess,RobertF.Handbook of Trailer Sailing.Camden:InternationalMarine,1992.

Cutler, omas J. Blue Jacket’s Manual. Annapolis: Naval Institute Press, 1999.

deKerchove,René.International Maritime Dictionary. Princeton:

Van Nostrand Company, 1961.

Lane,CarlD.New Boatman’s Manual. New York: W. W. Norton, 1951.

Krietemeyer,Capt.GeorgeE.e Coast Guardsman’s Manual. Annapolis:

Naval Institute Press, 2000.

Maloney,ElbertS. Chapman: Piloting, Seamanship and Small Boat Handling. New York:

HearstMarineBooks,1996.

Marino,Emiliano.e Sailmaker’s Apprentice.Camden:InternationalMarine,1994.

Noel, Capt. John V. Jr. Knight’s Modern Seamanship. New York:

D.VanNostrandReinholdCompany,1961.

Appendix 225

Riesenberg,Felix.Standard Seamanship for the Merchant Service, 2nd Edition.

NewYork:D.VanNostrandCompany,1936.

Rogers,JohnG.Origins of Sea Terms.Mystic:MysticSeaportMuseum,1984.

Rousmaniere,John. e Annapolis Book of Seamanship. New York:

Simon & Schuster, 1999.

omas, Elwell B. is Business of Boating. Cambridge:CornellMaritimePress,1949.

VanDorn,WilliamG.Oceanography & Seamanship. Centreville:

CornellMaritimePress,1993.

Walliser, Blair. Basic Seamanship and Safe Boat Handling. New York:

BantamDoubledayDell,1978.

Weeks,MorrisJr.e Complete Boating Encyclopedia. NewYork:GoldenPress,1964.

West,Gordon.Boatowner’s Guide to Marine Electronics. Camden:

InternationalMarine,1993.

Galley Techniques and Outdoor Cooking and Camping

Bates,JosephD.Jr. e Outdoor Cook’s Bible.NewYork:DoubledayBooks,1964.

Craighead,FrankC.Jr.andCraighead,JohnJ.How to Survive on Land and Sea.

Annapolis: U.S.NavalInstitute,1984.

Jones,RussellK.andNorton,C.McKim.e New Cruising Cookbook. Easy to Cook

Meals on a Two Burner Stove. New York: W. W. Norton and Company, 1960.

Kephart,Horace. Camp Cookery-Outdoor Cooking Secrets From 1910. Carlisle:

Applewood Books, 2001.

Oetting,RaeandRobison,MabelOtis. Camping and Outdoor Cooking.Minneapolis:

T.S.DenisonandCompany,1958.

Rutstrum,CalvinandKouba,Leslie.New Way of the Wilderness. New York:

Macmillan,1958.

e Boy Scout Handbook. Irving: Boy Scouts of America, 2009.

Cruising, Tours, and Expeditions

Benjamin, John J. Cruising Boats Within Your Budget. NewYork:Harper,1957.

Duncan,RogerandBlanchard,Fessenden. A Cruising Guide to the New England Coast.

NewYork:Dodd,MeadandCompany,1959.

Jenkins, Elmer. Guide to America.Washington,D.C.:PublicAairsPress,1953.

Wells,GeorgeS.andWells,Iris. Handbook of Auto Camping and Motorists Guide to

Public Campgrounds. NewYork:Harper&Row,1964.

Wells,GeorgeS.andWells,Iris. Handbook of Wilderness Travel. New York:

Harper&Row,1968.

Sailing and Racing

Aymar,GordonC. Start ’Em Sailing.NewYork:RonaldPressCompany,1941.

Aymar,GordonC.e Second Book on Sailing: How to Choose, Race and Cruise Your

Own Boat.NewYork:RonaldPressCompany,1960.

Basic Keelboat. US Sailing Association, 2009.

Bavier,RobertN.Jr.Sailing to Win.NewYork:Dodd,Mead&Company,1983.

Bavier,RobertN.Jr.e New Yacht Racing Rules, Revised Edition. New York:

W. W. Norton & Company, 1969.

Blanchard,FessendenS. e Sailboat Classes of North America.GardenCity:

Doubleday,1968.

Calahan,HaroldA. Learning to Race. Mineola:DoverPublications,2000.

226 Appendix

Calahan,HaroldA. Learning to Sail. NewYork:Macmillan,1972.

Coutts, James. Start Windsurﬁng Right.St.Louis:C.V.Mosby,1991.

George,M.B.Basic Sailing.Croydon:MotorRacingPublications,LTD,1980.

Morris,EverettB.e Able Seaman: A Basic Book of Boating Under Sail or Power.

New York: Cornerstone Library, 1965.

Ratsey,EarnestA.anddeFontaine,W.H.Yacht Sails, eir Care and Handling.

NewYork:W.W.Norton&Company,1957.

Smith,HerveyGarrett.e Small-Boat Sailor’s Bible. New York:

Doubleday&Company,Inc.,1964.

Smith,RufusG.Sailing Made Easy.NewYork:Dodd,Mead&Company,1966.

Start Sailing Right.USSailingAssociation,1997.

e Racing Rules of Sailing 2009–2012. US Sailing Association.

Ship Meeting Helps

Auer, J. Jeﬀrey. Essentials of Parliamentary Procedure.NewYork:PrenticeHall,1974.

Auer,J.JereyandEwbank,HenryLee.Handbook for Discussion Leaders. New York:

Harper&Brothers,1947.

Bailard,VirginiaandMcKown,Harry. So You Were Elected. New York:

McGraw-Hill,1960.

Trecker,HarleighB.andTrecker,AudreyR. Committee Common Sense.Markham:

Whiteside, 1954.

Appendix 227

GLOSSARY

ejargonoftheseabeganwithseafaringmencenturiesago.Manytermswere

added during the golden age of sail, and a few came about later with the advent of steam

power and the internal combustion engine.

A few meanings were lost or changed as the basic source of energy was trans ferred

from sail to mechanical power. But the ﬂavor of this language was so strong that it has

survived and probably will persist for ages.

abaft. Toward the stern; at the rear of a ship.

abeam. The direction at right angles to the

keel of the boat.

aboard. On or in the boat.

abreast. Lying or moving side by side.

adrift. Not made fast; lying around loose; at

the mercy of wind and wave.

aft. In, near, or toward the stern or rear end of

the boat.

after. Toward the stern.

aground. On the bottom; stranded (usually a

miserable situation).

ahead. In a forward direction.

amidships. Midway between the bow and the

stern, or the front and back of the boat.

anchorage. A sheltered area where boats can

anchor in reasonable safety and not interfere

with marine trafﬁc.

apparent wind. The wind felt aboard a boat.

It is the combination of the true wind and the

wind caused by the motion of the boat.

astern. Behind a boat, or in a backward

direction.

auxiliary. A boat equipped to be propelled by

sail or power, or both used together.

aweigh. Said of an anchor when it is clear of

the bottom.

backstay. A wire brace led aft to support a

mast against the pressure of the wind.

bark. Three-masted sailing vessel square-

rigged on fore and main, with the mizzen

fore-and-aft rigged.

barkentine. Three-masted sailing vessel

square-rigged on fore, with the main and

mizzen fore-and-aft rigged.

barometer. An instrument for measuring

atmospheric pressure.

beam. The greatest width of a vessel.

beam sea. A sea running at right angles to the

boat’s course.

bearing. The direction of an object from a boat

(expressed in compass degrees).

beat. A zigzag course against the wind.

belay. A command to stop; a line is belayed

when it is made fast.

belaying pin. A wooden or metal pin ﬁtted into

a rail; it is used for the securing of sheets and

halyards.

bell. Used aboard a boat as a warning signal, or

as a means of announcing time.

below. In the cabin or under the deck.

bend. To connect two lengths of rope; a knot

used for this purpose.

bight. Any part of a rope except the ends;

usually refers to a curl or loop in a rope.

228 Appendix

bilge. The lowest point of the inner hull of

a ship; also, the internal part of a boat

below waterline.

binnacle. Protective casing for the compass.

bitt. A stout vertical post used for taking

the heavy strain of lines used in mooring or

anchoring. Bitts may be bolted to the deck, or

through the deck and stepped at the keel. Bitts

are sometimes ﬁtted with round metal pins

(called “norman pins”) near the bitt’s head to

aid in belaying a line.

bitter end. The last part of a rope, or the last

link in an anchor chain.

block. A mechanical device used for transmit-

ting power or changing the direction of motion

by means of a rope or chain passing around

movable pulleys.

boom. A spar at the foot of a fore-and-aft sail

to which the sail is secured.

boom crutch. A notched upright board, or

metal structure, into which the boom ﬁts

when the sails are furled or off the spars.

bow. The forward or front end of a vessel.

bow chocks. Metal ﬁttings on the deck at

the bow through which anchor and dock

lines are fed.

bowsprit. A spar to which the headsails are

attached, extending forward beyond the bow.

brightwork. Woodwork on a vessel which is

varnished or ﬁnished to show its grain. Also

refers to polished metal parts.

broach to. Said of a vessel under sail when

running with the wind on the quarter when

the ship’s head comes up suddenly toward the

wind in conse quence of a sea striking the stern

or through bad steering.

bulkhead. A wall or partition between

compartments—often watertight for safety.

bunk. Sleeping berth; also, something

reported that is not done or not true.

buoy. A ﬂoating marker anchored to

the bottom.

cable. A rope or chain secured to the anchor.

cast off. To let go of a line.

caulk. To make seams watertight by ﬁlling them

with cotton, oakum, or caulking compound.

centerboard. A movable plate of wood or

metal pivoted at its forward end that can

be raised or lowered through the keel of a

sailboat to prevent sliding to leeward.

chaﬁng gear. A wrapping of canvas or

rope around spars, rigging, or lines to

prevent chaﬁng.

chart. Marine version of a road map show-

ing aids to navigation, shoals, water depth,

dangers, etc.

chine. The curved or angular part of the hull

where the bottom and sides meet.

clear. Free, not entangled.

cleat. A horned ﬁtting of wood or metal to

which lines are made fast.

clew. The aft lower corner of a sail.

close-hauled. Sailing as close to the wind as

possible.

coaming. A protective rail higher than the

deck to keep water out of the cockpit.

cockpit. Open part or well of the boat where

passengers sit and the helms man steers.

coil. To arrange a line in easily manageable

loops so it can be stowed.

colors. The ceremony of raising or

lowering the national ensign and other

recognized ﬂags.

come about. To change the course of a ship

when sailing by the wind so it will sail at the

same angle with the wind on the other side.

course. The direction steered by the

helmsman.

cringle. A ring sewn into the sail so a line can

be passed through it, like a grommet in the

edge of a tent.

cross bearing. Two or more bearings of known

objectives noted and plot ted on a chart to

determine the ship’s position.

current. The movement of water in a

horizontal direction.

dead reckoning. A method of navigation

by which the position of a ship is calculated

from its last well-determined position and

its subsequent direc tion and rate of progress

through the water.

deviation. The change in the compass read-

ing caused by the magnetic inﬂuence of the

iron, steel, or electronics aboard a boat and

its equipment.

displacement. The number of tons of water

displaced by a vessel aﬂoat.

ditty bag. A small bag for carrying or stowing

all personal articles.

Appendix 229

downwind. To leeward.

draft. Depth of a hull from the waterline to the

lowest part of the keel.

ease. To slacken or loosen.

ensign. The ﬂag of the United States of America

or other nation. Also the ﬂag of the U.S. Power

Squadrons, U.S. Coast Guard Auxiliary, a yacht

ensign ﬂown by documented yachts.

fast. A rope or chain by which a vessel is

moored to a wharf, pier, quay, etc.

fathom. A unit of water-depth equivalent to

six feet.

fenders. Portable bumpers hung over the sides

to protect the hull from contact with a pier,

wharf, or other boat.

ﬁd. A tapered wooden tool used to separate

the strands of a rope before splicing.

ﬁtting. General name for ship’s hardware.

ﬁx. A term denoting the determination of

a ship’s position by observation of celestial

or terrestrial objects, or by a combination

of both.

ﬂake. A method of loosely stowing line that

is too thick or too long to coil. Flaking down

a line involves laying it onto a deck in ﬁgure

eights. Each ﬁgure eight is a “fake.” A line with

multiple fakes has been “ﬂaked down.”

ﬂemish down. Line that has been secured on a

deck in a tight, ﬂat coil resembling a mat.

ﬂotsam. Floating trees, plants, driftwood,

wreckage, etc. (any “stuff” ﬂoating).

ﬂuke. The ﬂattened end of an anchor arm.

fore and aft. In line with the keel; from stem to

stern; lengthwise.

forestay. A stay leading from a mast forward.

forward. Toward the bow.

foul. Not clear; jammed; tangled.

freeboard. The distance between the waterline

and the main deck or gunwale.

galley. Kitchen aboard a boat.

gear. Name applied to blocks, tackle, ropes,

and other equipment used in operating a boat.

give-way vessel. The vessel which, according

to the rules of the road for two approaching

vessels, must keep out of the way of the other.

ground tackle. The anchor and anchoring gear.

gunwale. “Gunnel”; upper edge of a boat’s side.

halyard. A line used for hoisting sails.

handsomely. Gradually or carefully, as when

slacking or easing a rope on which there is

a strain.

hatch. An opening through the deck to a cabin

or area below.

haul. To tighten or pull in (like hauling the

anchor, for instance). A change of wind in a

counterclockwise direction.

hawse pipe. Opening in the bow of a vessel

from which the anchor line is passed.

hawser. Fiber rope ﬁve to 24 inches in circum-

ference used for towing or working the ship.

head. The toilet aboard a boat; the bow area of

the boat.

heading. The direction in which a ship actually

points or heads at any particular moment.

heave. To throw; the rise and fall of a vessel

at sea.

heave in. To pull (as on an anchor line).

heave to. To put a sailing vessel in the position

of lying to, by putting the helm down and

causing the sails to counteract each other.

heaving line. A light line, or messenger,

attached to a heavier line and thrown to a pier

or other vessel.

heel. A boat heels when it inclines to one side

or the other. There is a transverse tilt when the

hull is off the vertical.

helm. The steering device; tiller, wheel.

helmsman. The person who steers.

hitch. To tie a rope to an object; a knot used for

this purpose.

hook. Sailor’s name for an anchor.

hull. The main body or shell of a boat,

exclusive of superstructure.

jetsam. Things that sink in the water—

they don’t ﬂoat like ﬂotsam.

jib. A triangular sail set ahead of the foremast

on a sailboat.

jibe. Bringing a sailboat from one tack to the

other by swinging her stern across the wind,

in order to bring the sails to the other side. To

shift suddenly and with force from one side to

another when running before the wind.

jib sheet. The line by which the angle of the jib

is controlled.

jury rig. A makeshift rig.

230 Appendix

keel. The backbone of the boat; the basic

support extending from stem to stern.

knot. A measure of speed; the velocity in

nautical miles (6,076 feet) per hour.

lee. Pertaining to the part or side away from

the wind, or which is sheltered from the wind.

leeward. “Loo-ard;” toward the lee side; away

from the wind.

leeway. A drift to leeward, or in the direction

toward which the wind is blowing.

lines. Ropes used for various purposes aboard

a boat.

locker. A chest, box, cabinet, or closet used as a

storage compartment.

log. A record of a vessel’s activities; also, an

instrument for measuring distance traveled.

logbook. A record of all the activities of a ship.

luff. The forward or entering edge of a sail.

lufﬁng. The quivering of the sail when sailing

almost directly into the wind.

mainsail. The boat’s main or principal sail. It is

the sail set on the mainmast.

mainsheet. The line by which the trim (angle)

of the mainsail is controlled.

make fast. To secure the belaying turns of a

rope around a cleat or belaying pin by adding a

single hitch.

marlinspike. A pointed steel tool used by

seamen to separate the strands of rope when

splicing; also, it can be used as a lever when

putting on seizings, marline, etc.

midships. A term describing the position of an

object midway between the stem and stern, or

midway between the sides of the hull.

mizzenmast. The aft and shorter of two

masts on yawls and ketches; the aftermost

of three masts on a three-masted schooner,

ship, or bark.

nautical mile. Known as a sea mile; it is

6,076.11549 feet long; usually rounded off to

6,076 feet.

navigation. Usually refers to celestial naviga-

tion, the determination of a ship’s position by

observation of celestial bodies (sun, moon,

planets, and stars). Electronic navigation

involves the use of electronic devices such as

radio direction ﬁnders, radar, and satellite

navigation aids.

outboard. Toward the sides of a vessel or

outside of it.

outhaul. A device or line used to haul out the

clew (aft corner) of a sail along a boom.

painter. A line at the bow of a small boat or

canoe for securing it.

pay out. To slack away (let out) a line made

fast on board.

peak. The angle formed by the head and leech

of a gaff sail. The greater the angle, the less

peak the sail is said to have.

pelorus. A movable compass card swung in

gimbals and with a sighting apparatus through

which the observer may sight on an object.

piloting. A near-shore navigation method by

which the movements of a ship are directed

by reference to landmarks, other navigational

aids, and soundings.

point. The ability to sail close into the wind.

port. The left side of a vessel looking toward

the bow.

quarter. That part of a craft lying within 45

degrees from the stern; starboard or port

quarter, depending whether aft right or left

corner is referred to.

quarterdeck. The stern deck area of the vessel;

on Navy ships, the deck area at the head of the

gangway.

rail. The boat’s side above the deck line.

reef. To reduce sail area.

reeve. To thread a rope through a block.

rigging. A general term for all ropes, chains,

and gear used for supporting and operating

masts, yards, booms, stays, and sails.

right of way. The legal right and obligation to

hold one’s course and speed.

rode. The length of cable measured from the

hawse hole to the anchor.

rope. A general term for cordage over one inch

in circumference.

rudder. A device that is used for steering and

maneuvering a vessel.

rules of the road. The rules and regulations

accepted by international agreement and

enforced by law in maritime countries,

which govern the movements of ships when

approaching each other.

running. Sailing with the wind astern.

Appendix 231

running rigging. All rope or wire lines used to

control sails.

sail. A piece of fabric of some kind spread to

the wind to cause, or assist in causing, a vessel

to move through the water.

scope. The ratio between the anchor rode and

the depth of the water. A ves sel anchored in 10

feet of water with 70 feet of anchor cable out is

riding at a scope of 7 to 1.

seam. The joint between adjacent planks.

secure. To make fast a line, or to leave a boat

safely moored or tied up with everything

aboard shipshape; also, to tie down a

movable part.

seize. To bind, lash, or make fast one rope to

another, a rope to a spar, etc.

shackle. A wrought-iron or steel ﬁtting with

a pin across the throat, used as a connection

between lengths of chain.

sheave. A grooved wheel in a block, mast, or

yard over which a rope passes.

sheet. A rope or chain fastened to one or both

of the lower corners of a sail or beam and used

to extend it or to change its direction.

shipshape. In correct fashion aboard a ship;

everything orderly, secure, and in its place.

shrouds. Wire stays leading from the upper

part of the mast to the deck on either side to

provide lateral support.

sister hook. Two hooks opposed to each

other and pivoted together on their shanks.

Sister hooks are intended to allow materials

(such as lines or cargo) to pass between the

two hooks and then hold the materials fast

under tension.

snub. To check a rope or line from running out

by making a turn about a cleat, piling, or post.

spars. All booms, masts, gaffs, etc., to which a

sail may be set.

spreaders. Short spars extending from each

side of the mast to spread the shrouds and

give them greater mechanical advantage to

keep the mast straight.

stand-on vessel. The vessel which, according

to the rules of the road for two approaching

vessels, has the right of way and is obligated to

maintain course and speed.

starboard. The right side of a vessel, looking

forward.

stay. Rigging; a wire or line that supports

a mast.

stern. The aft part or back end of a vessel.

swab. A seagoing name for a mop (one swabs

down, not mops up).

tack. To change the course of a ship by

turning her through the wind so she will sail

at the same angle but with the wind on the

other side.

tiller. The handle attached to the rudder by

which the boat is steered if it is not equipped

with a wheel.

topsides. The sides of the hull above the

waterline.

transom. The framework of the stern; the

boards forming the ﬂat stern area of any boat

not having a pointed stern.

trim. The way in which a boat ﬂoats; the set of

a boat’s sails.

true wind. The direction of the wind as

observed from a stationary object.

underway. A vessel is underway when it is

neither anchored, moored, nor aground. It

need not be in motion to be underway.

variation. Difference in direction between

true north as determined by the earth’s axis of

rotation and the magnetic north determined

by the earth’s magnetism.

veer. To slack off and allow to run out (for

instance, veering more anchor line). A change

of wind in a clockwise direction.

wake. The track a vessel leaves astern.

watch. The part of a ship’s company employed

in working it at one time.

way. The progress or motion through the

water of a vessel. A vessel gathers way when

its rate of sailing increases. Don’t confuse

“making way” (in motion) with “underway”

(neither anchored, moored, nor aground).

weather side. The windward side; the side

toward the wind.

windward. “win’ard;” the direction from which

the wind is blowing.

yaw. A vessel yaws when it swings widely from

one side of the course to the other—usually

when running before heavy, quartering seas.

Appendix 233

CREDITS

e Sea Scouts, Boy Scouts of America, gratefully acknowledges the contributions of

the following people for their help in preparing the Sea Scout Manual, 11th edition.

Project Director

Cassie Johnson, National Sea Scout Support Committee

Editorial

KeithChristopher

GeorgeCrowl

RayDerk

RichardJ.Elroy

JimmieL.Homburg

Cassie Johnson

WayneStacey,USCG

234 Appendix

abandonshipdrill.................................86,89

Able rank requirements...................... 53–56

activity committees..................................... 34

advancementreview....................................47

advancement scorecard....................... 60–61

aidstonavigation............................165–170

AIS.............................................................. 190

America’sCup...........................................137

anchor cable............................................... 150

anchoring.......................................... 152–153

anchorparts...............................................147

anchor rode....................................... 149, 150

anchor selection........................................ 149

anchor stowage.......................................... 150

anchortypes......................................148,149

CQRanchor..........................................148

Danforthanchor..........................147,148

drogue..................................................... 149

grapnels...................................................148

homemadeanchor................................148

lightweightanchor................................148

mushroomanchor................................148

navyanchor............................................148

Northillanchor.....................................148

old-fashionedanchor...........................148

plowanchor............................................148

sea anchor............................................... 149

yachtsman’sanchor...............................148

anchoring commands............................... 153

anemometer................................................ 195

Apprentice rank requirements.......... 49–50

assistant crew leader.................................... 14

activity chair.................................................. 14

adult leader responsibilities............... 14–15

advancement.........................................47–61

aquatic nuisance species........................... 215

ANS............................................................ 215

AutomaticIDSystem..............................190

backsplice...................................................118

barometer.................................................... 194

beacons............................................... 165, 166

bearings.......................................................184

BeaufortWindForceScale............196,197

bells.............................................................. 203

bends........................................................... 113

carrick bend........................................... 113

sheet bend.............................................. 113

bight.............................................................107

bitterend....................................................107

bleeding.........................................................97

block parts.................................................. 122

blocks and tackles............................ 122–124

block parts.............................................. 122

double-purchase tackle........................ 124

gun tackle............................................... 123

luﬀ tackle................................................ 124

running tackle........................................ 124

single whip tackle.................................. 123

tackle.............................................. 123–124

two-fold tackle....................................... 124

boarding a vessel.................................. 40–41

boatswain...................................................... 13

boatswain’s mate for administration........ 13

boatswain’s mate for program................... 13

boatswain’s pipe........................................... 40

bowline........................................................ 109

bowline on a bight.................................... 110

breathing,stopped......................................98

bridgeofhonor............................................48

BSA Lifeguard............................................ 66

BSAMissionStatement.....insidefrontcover

BSA Vision Statement........ inside front cover

buoys................................165,166,167,168

bylaws..................................................... 15–16

cable-laid rope............................................ 104

cans..............................................................167

capstan........................................................ 155

carbondioxideextinguishers....................82

carrick bend............................................... 113

chain, marking........................................... 151

chain, shots................................................. 151

charcoal....................................................... 101

chartplotting.............................................182

charts...........................................................171

chiplog........................................................177

cleat hitch................................................... 112

clouds................................................198–200

clove hitch................................................... 111

coaching tips................................................. 31

coil ................................................................104

collisiondrill.................................................84

commands....................... 132, 134, 139, 153

anchoring commands........................... 153

docking orders....................................... 139

helm commands................................... 205

jibing commands................................... 134

tacking commands................................ 132

common whipping.................................... 114

communication..............................38,90–96

communications signaling......................... 93

Index

Appendix 235

compass.......................................................174

conduct of vessels...................................... 160

compressed natural gas............................ 101

consultants.................................................... 34

CoordinatedUniversalTime..................178

courtesy......................................................... 39

CQRanchor..............................................148

crossing situation...................................... 161

cruise log..................................................... 206

crew leader.................................................... 14

currenttable...............................................184

currentvector.............................................184

customs and courtesies....................... 39–45

boarding a vessel.............................. 40–41

boatswain’s pipe....................................... 40

courtesy...................................................... 39

double salute............................................ 40

ﬂag history................................................ 41

ﬂag protocol...................................... 42–45

handclasp.................................................. 39

piping the side.......................................... 40

salute, hand............................................... 39

cutter............................................................128

Dacronrope...............................................103

damagecontrol............................................89

Danforthanchor..............................147,148

dangerbearing...........................................188

dangermarks.............................................167

dayboards...................................................168

day beacons............................................... 166

day shapes.................................................. 163

deadreckoning..........................................180

deadreckoningposition..........................184

decklog.....................................176,180,181

demonstration tips...................................... 31

depth sounder............................................ 191

deviation.....................................................175

deviationtable...........................................176

dinghy..........................................................138

DischargeofOilProhibitedplacard.....213

distance.......................................................179

distresssignals.......................................78,79

docking.............................................. 141–143

docking orders........................................... 139

dory..............................................................137

double bowline.......................................... 110

double-purchase tackle............................ 124

double salute................................................ 40

doubletheangleonthebow...................187

dresswhites,youth.....................................18

dressblues,youthmale...............................18

dress blues, youth female........................... 19

dress whites, adult....................................... 20

dress blues, adult male................................ 20

dress blues, adult female............................. 20

drills.......................................................83–89

drogue......................................................... 149

drychemicalextinguishers........................81

Dutchman’slog..........................................177

EagleScoutAward.....................................48

electronicxes...........................................189

emergencydrills...................................83–89

abandonshipdrill............................86,89

collisiondrill............................................84

damagecontrol........................................89

redrill...............................................84,88

fog..............................................................85

heavyweatherprecautions....................84

manoverboarddrill..................83,86–88

runningaground.....................................85

emergency messages................................... 93

environment..................................... 213–215

EPIRB...........................................................78

estimatedposition.....................................184

ETA.............................................................180

ETE.............................................................180

eye splice..................................................... 115

eye-spliceindouble-braidedrope..........118

ﬁd................................................................. 115

50-MilerAward..........................................67

gure-eightknot.......................................108

reclasses.....................................................81

redrill...................................................84,88

reextinguishing.........................................81

reprevention.......................................80,81

ﬁrst aid................................................... 96–99

rstaidkit.....................................................97

ﬁsherman’s knot........................................ 110

xbytwocrossbearings..........................186

xbythreebearings..................................186

xes..............................................................184

ﬁxing in limited visibility......................... 191

ﬂag history.................................................... 41

ﬂag protocol.......................................... 42–45

ﬂake.............................................................. 104

ﬂat s eam...................................................... 120

otationdevices..........................................74

Frenchbowline..........................................110

fog..................................................................85

food safety................................................... 102

fund-raising.................................................. 39

gale warning............................................... 194

236 Appendix

galley............................................................ 101

garbage disposal............................... 214, 215

geographic range........................................ 166

GlobalPositioningSystem............176,189

GMT...........................................................178

goosewing jibe........................................... 134

GPS....................................................176,189

grapnels.......................................................148

gray water................................................... 215

greatcircles.................................................172

GreenwichMeanTime...........................178

grommets........................................... 121, 122

groundlog..................................................178

groundtackle.............................................147

ground tackle stowage.............................. 150

guest speakers.............................................. 31

gun tackle.................................................... 123

half hitch..................................................... 111

Halotron.......................................................82

handclasp...................................................... 39

hand-heldreextinguisheruse................82

hardware............................................208,209

hawser.......................................................... 104

hazardous material................................... 214

head-on situation...................................... 160

heat exhaustion........................................... 99

heatindex...................................................197

heat-sealing synthetic rope...................... 114

heaving line................................................. 143

heavyweatherprecautions........................84

Heimlichmaneuver....................................98

helm commands....................................... 205

helmsmanship........................................... 205

herringbone stitch..................................... 121

HistoricTrailsAward................................67

hitches............................................... 111–112

cleat hitch............................................... 112

clove hitch.............................................. 111

half hitch................................................ 111

marline hitch......................................... 112

midshipman’s hitch.............................. 112

rolling hitch........................................... 112

taut-line hitch........................................ 112

timber hitch........................................... 111

homemadeanchor....................................148

HornadayAward.......................................67

hurricane warning..................................... 194

hurryrescuecases................................97–99

hypothermia................................................ 99

ICW............................................................. 169

inertial navigation system........................ 190

insignia placement............................... 23–26

International Code ﬂags............................ 96

Intracoastal Waterway.............................. 169

jibing............................................................ 133

jibing commands....................................... 134

ketch............................................................ 130

knots..................................................107–109

bowline.................................................... 109

bowline on a bight................................ 110

double bowline...................................... 110

gure-eightknot...................................108

ﬁsherman’s knot.................................... 110

Frenchbowline......................................110

overhandknot.......................................108

reefknot.................................................108

running bowline.................................... 109

slipknot................................................... 110

squareknot............................................108

stevedore’s knot..................................... 109

knots,nauticalmiles........................176,177

latitude........................................................172

lay of rope................................................... 104

lead line....................................................... 191

lifejackets.....................................................74

lighthouses................................................. 166

lightlist.....................................165,166,167

lightedbuoys..............................................168

lights and shapes....................................... 161

lightweightanchor....................................148

limitedvisibility...........................................85

linesofposition.........................................184

logbook..........................................................38

log, crui se.................................................... 206

LongCruise..........................................35–37

Long Cruise badge..................................... 65

longitude.....................................................172

longsplice...................................................117

lookout...............................................158,204

low head dams........................................... 102

luﬀ tackle.................................................... 124

luminous range.......................................... 166

magneticnorth..........................................175

maneuvering and warning

signals............................................. 164, 164

manoverboarddrill......................83,86–88

manoverboardwaypoint.........................189

MarineDistress

Communication form............................ 92

marine sanitation device.......................... 215

marline hitch.............................................. 112

marlinspike................................................. 103

Appendix 237

MARPOLplacard..........................214,215

Mates.............................................................15

Mayday..........................................................93

meetings................................................27–33

activity committees................................. 34

coaching tips............................................. 31

consultants............................................... 34

demonstration tips.................................. 31

guest speakers.......................................... 31

LongCruise......................................35–37

quarterdeck meeting....................... 32–33

superactivity......................................35–37

two-part program................................... 30

Mercatorprojection..................................171

midshipman’s hitch................................... 112

MileSwimBSA.........................................67

MOBwaypoint.........................................189

mooring a powerboat............................... 140

mooring a sailboat.................................... 141

docking......................................... 141–143

warping................................................... 142

mooring tackle........................................... 154

mooring to a pier....................................... 139

mousing a hook......................................... 124

MorseCode..................................................94

mushroomanchor....................................148

National Weather Service....................... 193

National Oceanographic and

Atmospheric Administration............. 193

nauticalmile...............................................172

navigation...................................................171

NavigationRulesInternational

andInland....................................157–161

navyanchor................................................148

NOAA....................................................... 193

nominal range............................................ 166

Northillanchor.........................................148

nuns.............................................................167

nylon rope................................................... 103

oﬃcer responsibilities......................... 13–14

old-fashionedanchor................................148

Ordinary rank requirements............. 50–53

overhandknot............................................108

overloading, improper loading

of boat..................................................... 102

overtaking................................................... 160

paint............................................................ 210

palm-and-needle whipping..................... 114

Pan Pan......................................................... 93

partsofaboat..................................125–127

partsofasail.....................................126,127

patentlog....................................................177

pelicanhook...............................................208

piloting........................................................171

piping the side.............................................. 40

pitottube....................................................176

plain-laid rope............................................ 104

plottingandnavigation............................171

plowanchor................................................148

points of a sail............................................ 132

polyconicprojection.................................172

powerboats.......................................137–139

power-driven vessels underway............. 162

practical deck seamanship...................... 203

pram............................................................138

preparing to sail......................................... 131

pressurized alcohol................................... 101

primemeridian..........................................172

private aids to navigation......................... 165

propane....................................................... 101

proper maneuvering................................. 159

psychrometer............................................. 195

publicity.........................................................38

punt.............................................................137

purser............................................................. 14

Qualiﬁed Seaman requirements...... 64–65

quarterdeck meeting........................... 32–33

QuartermasterAward................................48

Quartermaster rank

requirements..................................... 56–59

Quartermaster uniform............................. 22

racing........................................................... 136

radar............................................................. 190

radio direction ﬁnder................................ 190

radio alphabet.............................................. 90

radio prowords............................................ 91

radiotelephone procedures........................ 90

rangelights.................................................170

recognitions..........................................62–67

recruiting.......................................................38

reefknot......................................................108

reectors.....................................................170

relative bearings......................................... 204

religiousemblems.......................................67

responsibility between vessels................ 161

risk of collision.......................................... 159

rivergauges.................................................170

rolling hitch................................................ 112

rope.................................................... 103–106

rope, care..................................................... 106

rope, sizing......................................... 105, 106

round seam................................................. 120

238 Appendix

rowing................................................ 145, 146

ruleofresponsibility........................157,158

RulesoftheRoad...........................157–161

Rule2,Ruleof

Responsibility...........................157,158

Rule3,Generaldenitions.................158

Rule5,Lookout....................................158

Rule6,Safespeed.................................158

Rule7,Riskofcollision.......................159

Rule12,Conductofvessels................160

Rule13,Overtaking.............................160

Rule14,Head-onsituation................160

Rule15,Crossingsituation................161

Rule18,Responsibility

between vessels.................................. 161

Rule22,Visibilityoflights.................162

Rule23,Power-drivenvessels

underway........................................... 162

Rule25,Sailingvessels

underway........................................... 162

Rule34,Maneuveringand

warning signals......................... 164, 164

Rule35,Soundsignals,

restricted visibility............................. 164

rules of the road, under sail..................... 136

running....................................................... 135

runningaground.........................................85

running bowline........................................ 109

runningx..................................................186

running tackle............................................ 124

SafeSwimDefense.............................69–72

safespeed....................................................158

SafetyAoat.........................................72–76

safetyequipment.........................................77

safety, general................................... 100–102

safewatermarks........................................167

sailing a small boat.................................... 131

sailingcraft,types......................................128

cutter.......................................................128

ketch........................................................ 130

schooner.................................................. 130

sloop........................................................128

Sunsh....................................................128

yawl.......................................................... 129

sail patch..................................................... 121

sail repair..................................................... 120

ﬂat seam.................................................. 120

grommets...................................... 121, 122

herringbone stitch................................. 121

round seam............................................ 120

sail patch................................................. 121

sailing vessels underway.......................... 162

salute, hand................................................... 39

scale..............................................................172

schooner...................................................... 130

Scout Law...........................inside back cover

Scout Oath or Promise....... .inside back cover

SEAL............................................................ 62

sea anchor................................................... 149

Sea Promise....................... inside front cover

Sea Scout emblem............... inside back cover

security........................................................... 93

seelonce.......................................................... 93

seizings........................................................ 119

semaphore..................................................... 95

sewage disposal.......................................... 215

shackle......................................................... 209

sheet bend.................................................. 113

ship code................................................ 15–16

ship committee............................................ 14

ship organization................................. 11–12

short splice.................................................. 116

shots of chain............................................. 151

signaling........................................................ 93

single whip tackle...................................... 123

60DStreet........................................179,180

ski..............................................................137

Skipper.......................................................... 15

slipknot....................................................... 110

sloop............................................................128

small-boat courtesy................................... 136

SmallBoatHandlerrequirements..........63

small-boat sailing...................................... 131

small-craft advisory................................... 194

SnorkelingBSA..........................................67

soundbuoys...............................................168

sounding..................................................... 191

sound signals in restricted visibility....... 164

special marine warning............................ 194

speedometer...............................................176

speedoverground.....................................189

splicing..............................................115–118

squareknot.................................................108

SSB................................................................ 90

standingpart..............................................107

stationbill..............................................82,83

statutemile.................................................172

stevedore’s knot......................................... 109

storekeeper.................................................... 14

storm warning........................................... 194

Sunsh........................................................128

superactivity..........................................35–37

Appendix 239

tacking......................................................... 133

tacking commands.................................... 132

tackle.................................................. 123–124

taut-line hitch............................................ 112

taraillog....................................................177

thermometer.............................................. 195

thimble........................................................ 209

tidetable.....................................................184

tools.............................................................208

thoroughfoot.............................................. 105

trailering a boat................................. 144, 145

tropical storm warning............................. 194

turnbuckle.................................................. 210

truenorth...................................................175

two-fold tackle........................................... 124

timber hitch............................................... 111

time....................................................178–179

tool safety.................................................... 100

turn..............................................................107

24-hourtime..............................................179

two-part program........................................ 30

UCT............................................................178

underway from a mooring..................... 132

uniforms................................................17–22

dress blues, adult female........................ 20

dress blues, adult male........................... 20

dress blues, youth female....................... 19

dressblues,youthmale..........................18

dress whites, adult.................................. 20

dresswhites,youth.................................18

purchasing uniforms.............................. 22

Quartermaster uniform......................... 22

uniformcare.....................................17–18

work uniform, adult............................... 21

work uniform, youth.............................. 19

Uniform State Waterway

MarkingSystem....................................165

United States Navigation System......... 165

variation......................................................175

varnish........................................................ 210

Venturing Bronze Award.......................... 65

VenturingGoldAward..............................66

Venturing Silver Award............................. 66

vessel maintenance.......................... 206–210

VesselSafetyCheck...................................78

vesselselection.............................................17

VHF-FM.....................................................90

visibility of lights....................................... 162

visualxes...................................................186

visualmarinedistresssignals..............78,79

visual safety................................................. 100

warping....................................................... 142

waste management plan.......................... 215

watches....................................................... 203

water pollution.......................................... 213

waterskiing........................................ 143, 144

waypoints...................................................189

weighing anchor........................................ 153

WesternRiverSystem....................165,169

whaleboat...................................................138

whipping..................................................... 114

common.................................................. 114

heat-sealing synthetic rope.................. 114

palm-and-needle................................... 114

backsplice..............................................118

eye splice................................................. 115

eye-spliceindouble-braidedrope......118

longsplice...............................................117

short splice............................................. 116

windchill....................................................198

windlass...................................................... 155

wing on wing............................................. 135

wire rope..................................................... 119

work uniform, adult.................................... 21

work uniform, youth.................................. 19

yachtsman’sanchor...................................148

yawl.............................................................. 129

yeoman...................................................13,37

zonetime....................................................178

ZuluTime..................................................178

The ScouT oaTh or PromiSe

On my honor I will do my best

To do my duty to God and my country and to obey the Scout Law;

To help other people at all times; and

To keep myself physically strong, mentally awake, and

morally straight.

The ScouT Law

A Scout is trustworthy, loyal, helpful, friendly, courteous, kind,

obedient, cheerful, thrifty, brave, clean, and reverent.

Sea ScouT emBLem

In 1920, a young man had to be a First Class Scout to join Sea Scouts.

As a result, the First Class anchor has been used in the Sea Scouting

program for more than 90 years. The key component of the First Class

anchor is the Scout universal emblem, a ﬂeur-de-lis. The three points

signify the three points of the Scout Oath, duty to God and country,

duty to others, and duty to self. Like a compass, the center point

always points north symbolizing a true course in life. The eagle with

the shield is the national emblem of the United States of America, and

it represents freedom. The scroll with the Scout Motto represents a

Scout’s smile and reminds us to “Be Prepared.” The knot attached to

the bottom of the scroll is to remind you that, as a Sea Scout, you have

promised to do a Good Turn daily. The stars beneath the eagle’s wings

symbolize the ideals of truth and knowledge as guides in the night

sky for ﬁnding our way. They reﬂect our nautical life and suggest a

Scout’s outdoor adventures. The anchor symbolizes Sea Scouts’

maritime heritage.

BOY SCOUTS OF AMERICA

1325 West Walnut Hill Lane

P.O. Box 152079

Irving, Texas 75015-2079

http://www.scouting.org

730176 34731 8

SKU 33239

33239 2012 Printing

Sea Scout Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation